o B9

o
o
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals
O
a Workflow/Solutions Training
Version 2013
o
O
a
o
O SchlumbergerlnformationSolutions
October 7,20'13

o
o
.NT
u o
"n'u'oo'oo' 'o","n,
$chlumIGnUer
t
o Copyright Notice
O 2011-2013 Schlumberger. All rights reserved.

No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or

o translated in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including
photocopying and recording, without the prior written permission of
Schlumberger lnformation Solutions, 5599 San Felipe, Suite100, Houston, TX
o 77056-2722.

a Disclaimer
Use of this product is governed by the License Agreement. Schlumberger

o makes no warranties, express, implied, or statutory, with respect to the product

described herein and disclaims without limitation any warranties of
merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Schlumberger reserves the
right to revise the information in this manual at any time without notice.
o
Trademark lnformation
a Software application marks used in this publication, unless otherwise indicated,
are trademarks of Schlumberger. Certain other products and product names

o are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or

organizations.

An asterisk (*) is used throughout this document to designate a mark of

o Schlumberger.

o
o
a
o
o
o
a
Table of Contents
o
o About this Manual
LearningObjectives
Need
WhatYouWill
.....1
...........1
........2
o WhattoExpect
CourseConventions
lcons.
...........3
........4
Summary ......5
O
Module 1: Basics of the Techlog Window

o LearningObjectives
Lesson'1 :Componentsof theMain\Mndow
Procedurel:MovingtheDockWindows
.....7
.......8
.....10
o Lesson2: MainDockWindows.....
ProjectBrowser
Procedure 't : Filtering Data in the Project Browser
....12
....12
16

a Procedure 2: Applying Conditional Selections

Procedure 3: Grouping Data Objects Manually
Procedure 4: Grouping Data Objects Automatically
20
21
22

o Data Search
Contextual Menu Commands . .
Trash Bin
.
24
25
26

a OutputWindow. . . . .
Properties \Mndow
Procedure 5: Using the Properties Window
26
27
30

o Zonation Window
Markers Manager
Workspace Manager
30
32
33

o Lesson 3: Synchronization Tool

Procedure 'l : Disabling the Project Partial Loading Feature
Procedure 2: Linking Techlog to the Reference Repository
35
36
36

o Procedure 3: Retrieving ltems from the Reference Repository

Procedure 4: Sending ltems from the Current Project to the Reference
Repository
37

38

o Data Locking
Procedure 5: Locking Data . .

Lesson 4: Techlog Project Creation

38
39
40

o Procedure 1: Creating a New Techlog Project 40

o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013

 O
Exercise'1:CreatingtheMyFirstTechlogProject ......
TechlogProlectFolderStructureandSettings
Procedure 2: Opening an Existing Prolect
.... ....
41
44
. . . . . 45
o
Project .
Procedure 3: Opening an Older
ReviewQuestions
Summary
....
.....46
.....47
46
a
Module 2: Data lmport and Export
LearningObjeclives ....49
O
Lessonl:Datalmport. .. . 49
Procedurel:lmportingData..
Lesson2: DllSFilelmport
.. ...51
.....52
o
Exercise 1:lmporting DLIS Log Files.. ... .... 53
Lesson3: LASFilelmport.
Exercise 1:lmporting LAS Files
.....55
.... .. 55
o
Lesson4: TextFilelmport ......58
Exercise 1: lmporting Stratigraphy Data from aTXT File
Exercise2: lmportingtheTOPSlFile...
. . . . . . . . 59
.....61
o
Exercise3: lmportingtheTOPS2File... .....62
Exercise4: lmportingtheTOPS3File...
Lesson5: CSVSpreadsheetlmport.
.....65
....66
O
Exercise 1:lmporting a CSVSpreadsheet.. ..........
Exercise2: lmporting Formation PressureData ..
Exercise3: lmporting aThin SectionAnalysisTable .
....67
66

. . . . . . . . . . 69
a
Lesson 6: lmage File lmport
Procedurel:lmportinglmages
Exercise't: lmportingCorelmages
. . . . 70
......71
.........73
a
LessonT: XMLFilelmport ......76
Procedure 1: lmporting XML Files from the lmport Buffer
Procedure2: lmportingXML Fileswith a Drag-and-Drop Operation
. . . . . 76
.. . .. . 77
O
Exercise 1: LoadingLQCData .......78
LessonS: TimeData..
Exercise 1:lmportingTimeData
........80
.....82
o
Exercise2: lmportingTime Datawith Time Reference . . . . . . . . . 83
Lesson 9: Well ldentification Solver: Data lmport under the Same Name . . . . . 85
Exercise 1: lmporting Data with the Same Name . . . . . . 85
I
LessonlO:DataExport. .......87
Procedurel:ExportingData..
Exercise 1: Exporting Oata..
......87
........ 88
o
ReviewQuestions .....92
Summary .....93 o
ïechlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
a
Module 3: Variable Management
o LearningObjectives
Lesson 1:FamiliesManagement
....95
........ 96
FamiliesDatabase .........96
o Procedure 1:Editing FamilySettings ....
ExportandlmportFamilies....
.... 98
....100
Exercise 1:Editing Family Properties ... . ... 101

a RulesActivationandDeactivation ..
Exercise2: CreatingaNewFamily
........ 103
.........103
Exercise 3: Usingthe FamilyAssignmentRulesTool . .. . .. ... 104
O Lesson2: AliasesManagement
AliasesDatabase
.......108
.........108

o Exercisel:AddingaNewAlias
Exercise2: UsingtheAliaslnventory
Exercise3: GreatingLQCDatasets
.....109
........114
.........115
o Review Questions
Summary
117
117

Module 4: References Management

o LearningObjectives
Lesson 1: lndex Dataset
...119
... . . . 120
Lesson 2: TVD Computation .. . 121

o Procedurel:ComputingDepthMeasurements . .....
Exercise 1: Running a TVD Computation and Creating the lndex Dataset 122
121

Lesson3: lndexDatasetCreation ......125

o Exercise'1 :Creatingan lndexDataset
ReviewQuestions
.......126
.... 127
Summary ....128
o Module 5: LogView
Learning Objectives 131

o Lesson 1: LogView lnterface

Lesson 2: LogView Plots
131
140
Track Data 142

o Procedure 1: lnserting a Track

Exercise 1: Displaying Caliper Gamma Ray Sonic Data in Track 1 . . . . . .
142
143
Variable Management 147

o Procedure 2: Changing the Variable Management Type in LogView . . .

Exercise 2: Checking theVariable ManagementType forTrack2 . . . . .
.

.
147
148
Variable Scales 149

a Procedure 3: Changing the Horizontal Scale 149

o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 iii

 a
Exercise 3: Changing the Horizontal Scale for Density and Porosity Log
DatainTrack3
PaletteEditor.
...149
....150
o
Procedure4: ChangingthePalette .........152
Exercise 4: Modifying the Palette for Tracks 4 and 5
Reference Tracks .
. . 153
154
o
o
Procedure 5: Displaying a New Reference Track 154
Exercise 5: Creating a Reference Track for Track 6 154
Zones. ...155
Procedure 6: Creating a Zonation Track in a Layout . . . 156
Exercise6: Creating a ZonationTrack in a LayoutforTrackT . . . . . . . . . 157
DatasetCreatedfromlogView .....'158
o
Procedure 7: Creating a Dataset with All Data Displayed on the Layout .
ExerciseT:SavingVariablesfromaLayout .........
Lesson 3: Layout and Template
. 158
159
160
o
Exercise 1: Saving the Layout Created as a Template
o
160
Procedure 1: Applying a Template to Other Wells or Datasets 16'1

Exercise 2: Applying the Well9_SHORT Template to Create Another

Template

o
16'1

Exercise 3: Applying the Well9_SHORT Template to other Datasets . . . . 162

Lesson 4: More LogView Options 164
Procedure 1: lnserting a Well Schematic . . . 166
Exercise 1: lnsefting a Well Schematic for Track 3
Plots in Tracks .
167
167
o
Procedure 2: Creating Plots in Tracks 171
Exercise 2: Creating Plots in Tracks 6 and g
Procedure 3: Displaying a Variable as Text
. 173
173
o
Exercise 3: Displaying Variables as Text in Track '10 . . 174

o
.

Procedure 4: Hiding Zonation Shading in Tracks 175

Exercise 4: Displaying the STMTIGRAPHY Zonation as Patterns in
Track 10 177
Procedure 5: Creating a Cumulative Track .
Exercise 5: Creating a Cumulative Track in f rack 14
177
179 o
Procedure 6: Displaying Core lmages 179
Exercise 6: Displaying Core lmages in Track 16 . . .
Procedure 7: Activating Well Overview
. 181
181
o
Exercise 7: Using a Well Overview in Track 17 . . . . 182
Lesson 5: Time Data Display
Exercise 1: Greating a LogView Plot with Time Data
182
182
O
Lesson 6: Basic Processing in LogView 184
Procedure 1:Applying a Processing Method to a Variable 185
a
Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
a
Exercise 1: Applying the Smoothing Function to a DENS Variable . . . . . .
o
185
Lesson 7: Header Editor . 188
Exercise 1: Editing a Header in Techlog 188
Lesson 8: Wndow Screenshot Tool . 194

o
.

Procedure 1 : Capturing Screenshots 195

Lesson 9: Print Options 196

o Layout Printing 196

Exercise 1: Printing a Layout 198
Review Questions 199
Summary ....199
o Module 6: Plots
LearningObjectives ...201
o Lesson 1: Appearance of the Plot
Displayandlcons
lnterface . . . . . 201
....204
Lesson 2: Plot Tabs . . . 205

o VariablesTab .. .
FilterTab
.........206
. .... ...207
ChartsTab ....... 208
o Exercise 1:CreatingaHistogram ...209
Exercise2:CreatingaNeutron-DensityCrossplot .....211
Lesson3: Multi-Well Plots.. ...213
o Procedure 1:CreatingaMulti-Well Plot
BoxPlot
.....213
.........213
Exercise 'l: Creating a Multi-Well Box Plot .. . 214
o Lesson4: MatrixPlot...
Procedurel:CreatingaMatrixPot...
......216
......216
Plot
Exercise 1:Creating a Histogram Matrix .. ... ... 216
a Lesson5: PlotTools
PolygonTypeSelection.....
.........217
......218
lnteractive Selection Tool 221

o Statistics Display
Lesson 6: Regressions and Equations . . . .
222
223
DisplayProperties ........225
o Exercise 1: Creating a Multi-Wells PORO-PERM Crossplot . . . . 225
Exercise2:ComputingaPoro-PermRegression .....228
Procedure 1:Entering an Equation . .... .. . .229
o Procedure2: WorkingwithEquations....
Procedure 3: Saving the Display Properties
...231
231

o Review Questions 232

Summary ....232

o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013

 O
Module 7: Depth lnteraction, lnteractive Selection Mode, Zonation, and
Markerc
Learning Objectives 235
o
Lesson '1 : Depth lnteraction Mode
Procedure 1: Setting the Depth lnteraction Line .
Exercise 1:Usingthe Depth lnteractionTool ..
. ...
.......236
23s
. 235 o
Lesson2: lnteractiveSelectionMode . ......
Procedure 1 : Using lnteraction in the General Workspace
Exercise 1: Workingwith lnteraction intheGeneralWorkspace .......
.....
239
239
240
o
Exercise 2: Creating a Zonation Dataset using lnteractive Selection . . . .
Lesson 3: Zonation
Procedure 1: Using a Zonation
243
245
247
o
Lesson4: ZoneEditor
Procedure 1: Loading and Editing Data in the Zone Editor
Procedure2: Adding aZone
.
.......249
...
.......251
. 250 o
MiscellaneousOptions
Exercise 1:Editing aZonation
Procedure 3: Creating aZone with the Quick Zone Creation Tool
.....253
......254 o
Zones
Graphical Tools for Editing . . . 256
Exercise2: CreatingZonesusing the QuickZoneCreationTool . . . . . . . 260
ZonesManager.... . ....263
t
Procedure4: Picking Zones in LogViewusing Zone Manager . .. . . . . .. 264
Exercise 3: Picking Lithologies using Advanced Zones Creation . . . . . 265
Exercise 4: Using a Zonation to Define an Area Fill 268
o
Markers
Lesson 5:
1:CreatingaMarkersDataset
Exercise
.. .270
.....270
Procedurel:CreatingaMarkerfromZonation .......272
o
Exercise 2: Creating a Marker Dataset from the STRATIGRAPHY
Dataset
ReviewQuestions
.... ....273
...275
a
26BSummary .... ...275
Module 8: Data Editor
o
Learning Objectives

o
277
Lesson 1: Data EditorWindow 278
Data EditorWindow Tabs 279
Exercise 1: Creating a New Dataset in the Data Editor . 287
Lesson 2: NewVariableCalculation and MathematicalOperations . . . . . . . . 288
Procedure 1: Creating and Saving Equations 291
o
Procedure 2: Editing an Equation

o
292
Procedure 3: Removing an Equation 292

Techlog Fundameotals, Version 2013

o
e
Exercise 1:Creating an Equation using the Data Editor . . . . . 293
O Procedure 4: Displaying Variable Array Type Data . .
Exercise 2: Computing a Variable with an Array Variable . . . .
294
296
297

o
Lesson 3: Excel Connection
Procedure 1: Connecting with Excel 297
Exercise 1: Exporting and lmporting the GAMM Curve 297
ReviewQuestions .... 298

e Summary . 298

Module 9: WellTrajectories, Field Map

o LearningObjectives
Lesson1:2DWell Trajectories .......301
...301

Exercise 1: Displaying the Wellg Trajectory in a2D Window . . . . 301

o Lesson2: 3DWell Trajectories

Procedure'1:Creatinga3DWellTrajectory ......... 304
........303
Exercise'l:CreatingaWellg3DWellTrajectory ..... 304
o Lesson3:BasemapTool..
Procedure 1:Creating a Base Map
....305
. . . . . . . 305

I Exercise 1: Creating a Base Map and Displaying Plots on the Map . . . . . 306
Exercise2: CreatingaCrossSection
ReviewQuestions
.......308
.... 309
Summary .... 309

o Module 10: Depth Shifting Tooland Variables Splice Tool

Learning Objectives 311

o Lesson 1: Manual Depth Shifting

Procedure 1: Creating a Depth Shifting Window
311
311
Procedure 2: Depth Shifting a Log 313

a lmportant Points
Procedure
.

3: Saving the Depth Shift . .

313
313
Procedure 4: Applying a Depth Shifting 314

o Procedure
Procedure
5: Block Shifting a Curve (Special Feature)
6: Applying a Horizontal Shift to a Curve
315
3't5
Lesson 2: Automatic Depth Shifting 315

o Procedure '1 : Automatically Depth Shifting a Curve

Properties \Mndow
315
317
AutomaticshiftPropertie.... ... ..... . . 318

O Exercise 1: Depth Shifting a Variable

Procedure 2: Depth Shifting a Variable from the Project Browser
319
.323
Procedure 3: Depth Shifting aVariablefromthe Layout . . .. . .. 325

o Exercise2: DepthShiftingaDataset ........327

o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 vii

 o
VariablesSpliceTool ......330
Procedure 4: Splicing Datasets in theVariables SpliceTool . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Exercisel:CreatingaDataset .....335
o
ReviewQuestions ...336
Summary ....336 o
Module 11: Proiect Data Management
Prerequisites
Learning Objectives
339
339
o
Lesson 1: Project Browser Optimization
Exercise 1: Creating a Filter
Lesson 2: lssues in the Datasets
340
340
340
a
Project Browser
lnventory Tools . .

Exercise 2: ldentifoing lssues in a Dataset

340
341
344
o
Lesson 3: Data Harmonization
Data Harmonization using the Project Browser
Procedure 1: Performing Data Harmonization using the lnventory Tool . .
345
346
347
o
Data Harmonization using Data Harmonization Tools
Data Harmonization Tools Scenarios
Data Harmonization Exercises . . .
347
349
353
a
Exercise 3: Correcting a Missing Unit for a Variable in a Well
Exercise 4: Correcting a Missing Unit for Variable RHOB_DH_ADN_RT .
Exercise 5: Correcling an Unknown Unit . . .
353
353
354
o
Exercise 6: Correcting a Missing Unit for Variable TNPH_ADN_RT . . . . . 355
Exercise 7: Correcting
Exercise 8: Correcting
a Missing Family
an Unknown Family
. 355
356
O
o
Exercise 9: Correcting a VariableAssigned to Multiple Families . . . . . . . . 356
Exercise 10: Correcling a Variable that is not Harmonized . . . . . 356
Exercise 11: Correcting aVariablethathasTwo Units . ...... 357
Exercise'12: Correcting a Variablethat has an lncorrect Unit . . . . . . . . . .
Exercise 13: Adding a Suffix to Variables ....
Exercise 14: Correcting a Valuethat is lnconsistentwith its Unit . . . . . . .
357
357
358
a
ReviewQuestions ....
Summary ....359
358
o
o
o
Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 201 3
o
a
Module 12: Application Workflow Interface (AWI) Basic Concepts
O Learning Objective
Lesson 1: Basic Concepts of the lnterface
361
361

a Workflow Overview 363

Exercise 1: Applying Basic Concepts of the lnterface for a Quick look
Petrophysical Analysis 371
Lesson 2: Shale Volume from Gamma Ray 382

o Exercise 1: Creating a New Workflow

Exercise 2: Computing the Shale Volume from a Gamma Ray Curve . . . . 383
382

I Lesson 3: Zonations in AWl .

Exercise 1: Creating Zones in the Zonation Window
. . . 386
...
Exercise 2: lnserting aZoneusing the lnteractive Selection Tool . . . . . . .
387
390

o Exercise 3: lnserting the Existing Set of Zones from the Zonation Dock
Window
Lesson 4: Tools to Adjust Parameters and Prepare Reports
392
395
Proeædure 1: Statistical Tools 395

o
.

Procedure 2: Fine-Tuning the Result with the Wheel Tool 398

Values Outside of the Predefined Limits 399
Report Options 400

o Exercise 1: Creating a Report

Lesson 5: Workflow Templates and Parameters . . . . .
400
401
Procedure 1: Using the Zonation Dataset Method to Save and Reuse

o Parameters
Procedure 2: Saving Parameters with the Workflow
403
404
. 406
Procedure 3: Parameter Manager Method (Advanced Users) .

o Procedure 4: Loading and Removing Parameters from a Parameter File . 409

Lesson 6: Well Predict Tool
Procedure 1: Starting Well Predict
410
411

o Exercise 1: Using Well Predict

Review Questions
412
418
418
Summary

O
o
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 20'l 3
a
o
o
o
o
O
o
o
o
o
o
O
o
o
o
O
o Schlumberger About this Manual

o About this Manual

o This manual discusses the platform tools implemented within the

Techlog* wellbore software platform. Techlog is a wellbore-
centric petrophysical application composed of a platform and a

o suite of add-on application modules. The platform, which is the

subject of this manual, comprises tools for loading, visualizing,
and editing your data.

o You will learn how to load data from various vendors and sources,
display the data using the various viewers, and use a variety of
tools to prepare the data quality control. You will become
o proficient with the platform tools and you will gain an
understanding of the major principles governing the software. This
training will prepare you for additional courses and advanced

o training.

Learning Objectives l--t

o After completing this training, you will know how to:

lg"-l
L<\
.
o .
load various types of data, including logs, cores, images,
arrays, and zone tops
visualize the data using a variety of visualization tools

o . manipulate data at a simple curve level (editing, smoothing)

and at the dataset level (depth shifting, splicing,
harmonizing).

o . find functions among the editors and graphics tools.

a What You Will Need

ln this training you will need the following documents, hardware,

o and software:
. One of these operating systems:
. Windows 7 (32-bil or 64-bit)
o .
.
Windows Vista (32-bit or 64-bit)
Windows XP (32-bit or 64-bit)

o . 8GB RAM

o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013

About this Manual schlumberser O

: ;::ïï,',i:i:T::'" a
What to Expect O
ln each module within this "-"""ematerial, you will encounter the
"- training
following: O
. Overview of the module
. Prerequisites to the module (if necessary)
. Learning objectives a
. A workflow component (if applicable)
. Lessons, explaining a subject or an activity in the workflow O
. Procedures, showing the steps needed to perform a task
. Exercises, which allow you to practice a task by using the O
steps in the procedure with a data set
. Scenario-based exercises
. Questions about the module O
. Summary of the module.
You also will encounter notes, tips and best practices. O

o
o
a
o
o
a
TechbgFundamentals,Version20l3
O
O Schlumberger About this Manual

Course Conventions
o Content in this manual uses these conventions.

o Characiers in Bold Names of windows, dialog boxes,

menus and tabs, such as "the Open
Asset Model dialog."

o Keyboard commands and action

buttons, such as "click OK."
Names of tools and icons, such as

o "Query tool"
Schlumberger software application
names, such as Petrel*, Techlog*, or

o Characters in italics
ECLIPSE*
Names of files, directories and drive
navigation paths, such as "the

o sample.datfile."
Names of sections and areas in
windows and dialog boxes, such as
"Expeiments area"
o First use of important terms or
concepts, such as compositional
simulation or "Safe mode is used

o Characters in fixed-width
when..."
Code, data, and other literal text the
user sees or enters, such as "Enter

o Characters in Times ltalic

0.1323."
Names of options, functions,
processes, lists, columns, check

o boxes and radio buttons.

For example, choose a calculation
method from the Calc Methodlist.

a fixed-width font inside triangle brackets. Do not include

o

I the brackets when you enter the required information.

lnstructions to make menu selections are written using bold text

o and arrows indicating the selection sequence, such as "Select File

> Save."

O
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
About this l\,lanual
o
lcons
Throughout this manual, you will find icons in the margin
o
representing various kinds of information. These icons serve as
at-a-glance reminders of their associated text. See below for
descriptions of what each icon means.
O
o
Ths
TtÈ icon pohls you to a üp
(
I ro.
I rn" icon haotes lhd the
Best Prac'tbes

ïhb icon hdicales the besl

a
I tlb-abn s r€y lo perlbrm læk

o
lhd wll make your$Ed( totrrr,g a given
6asier. pailbdarty impodarr. $hsn d!,lbrsrl oplions arê
I ilâlbHê.

o
o
o
Exertise RevlewGluestbm
o
Tt{s lcon hdcates lhd it's Tns lcon ilonüûes lh6
)ou turn lo praclice thà
procedtrê.
rêüo!/ÿ quodlons al lho end
deach moûrh. o
o
Pr€mquidtBs
TtÈ icon identifês arry
prereqddles lhd are
l ftatyou wll neod
Thb icon hdcates ary
?dicdions, hardrlôrB,
a
rEqJtêd for the coulse, or dalasêls, o. olher malêrhl
for hdvi(lld modulès. rêaJlêd for lhe cdrss.
o
o
Teclrlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
o About this Manual

o Summary
ln this introduction, we:

o . defined the learning objectives for Techlog introductory

training
. described the structure of the manual
o .
.
outlined what tools you will need for this training
discussed course conventions that you will encounter within

o this material.

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3
a
o
o
o
o
o
a
o
o
o )

o
o
o
o
o
o
o Basics of the Techlog YVindow

o Module 1 Basics of the Techlog

Window
o The Techlog window is very flexible. You can customize its
appearance and organization to suit your working habits. Begin by

o learning the default location and functionality of each window.

Learning Objectives
o After completing this module, you will be familiar with the primary
components of the Techlog main window (Figure 1) and you will

O know how to:

. customize the interface of Techlog
.
o .
access project data
access Techlog modules
. create a Techlog project.
o
o
a
o
o
o
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals. Version 201 3
Basics of the Techlog Window
o
Lesson I Components of the Main
Window O
ln this lesson, you will learn about the components that make up
the main Techlog window and the function of each component.
o
o§t(t+
l\

I
OO Ol F

o
o
Y

o
:

o
t

E
o
o
o
o
o
1
Bï,,,,,,,,irr Iiii',iitltiiiliili
-f r()
o
o
-C{ÿ,
Figure I Main dock wandows in Techlog

Tedlog Fundarentals, Version 2013

o
o Schlumberger Basics of the Techlog Window

o I Title bar lndicates the version of Techlog, the name

of the project, the status of the project, and
the name of the active workspace.

o 2 Menu bar Shows the Techlog domain menus: Home,

Plot, Data, Utility, Petrophysics,
Geology, Drilling, Reservoir,
o Geophysics, and Unconventionals.
The icons at the right end of the menu bar

o can be used to increase the size of the

display area.

. Click . to hide the Toolbar menu.

o . Click I I or press F11 to hide the dock
windows. To restore the dock windows

o 3 Toolbar
view, click ii or press F11 .
Displays the icons that allow you to access
Techlog tools and plots under the Techlog
o menu quickly. By clicking on the bottom left
corner of the toolbar groups, you can
collapse or expand a group/module.

o The toolbar contains commands related to

the project and the modules active in the

o Proiect
browser
project.
Shows all the data and Techlog objects
loaded in the project.

o Any global action on the database, such as

data importing or data filtering, can be done
in the Project browser.

o Output
window
Displays messages from the system,
including information and warnings. lt
allows you to diagnose issues when
O working in Techlog.
6 Display area Displays all Techlog objects (LogView,

o crossplots, histograms).

o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 20'1 3
Basics of the Techlog Window Schlumberger
O
7 Displays properties of the selected objects.
Properties
window Most Techlog objects can be retrieved, O
modified, and configured from this window,
including the units of a variable and
parameters. o
Workspace Allows you to switch from one workspace to
manager another. Techlog operates a system of
independent workspaces to optimize
display.
o
Palette
editor
Allows you to select, create, and modify
color palettes.
o
10 Zonation
window
Stores all of the interval sets within the
project. lt also allows you to limit data
display and analysis to a specific set of
a
intervals.
11 Markers
window
Shows all the markers stored within the
project.
o
12 Contact
manager
Allows you to manage contacts in the
project. o
13 Action Displays a list of all the possible actions

14
manager
Status bar
available on the selected object.
Provides information about available
o
Procedure 1
memory and disk space.

Moving the Dock Windows

o
t3 All of the windows described in this lesson are dockable. This
means that they can be re-arranged at your convenience.
o
To display the dockwindows list, right-click in the Toolbar and
select the Dock windows menu.
o
U
TIP: You also can activate or deactivate a dockable window
from the Dock windows menu. a
1. To move the Project browser, click on the window header
and drag it to the right. The Project browser is now an
independent window that can be moved to another monitor.
o
o
10 Techlog Fundanentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Basics of the Techlog Windou/

Dashboard mode allows you to display windows outside the

o Techlog window. This way you can have the application
open on one monitor and all the other windows (such as
Properties, Project browser, and Zonation) open on a
o second monitor.
2. Move the Project browser over the Properties window. The
Project browser and the Properties window are now
o docked, with two tabs displayed in the same window.
3. Restore the windows to their default position. ln the View

o menu, click Restore default positions ?.

Eq,PropertteEeclitor tu r :
- =
widget ? Dashboard Tile '
o Q actions Miscellaneous windows
Full
SCreen î Dock windows - V mode
!'re!! Window

o NOTE: lt also is possible to pin o (auto-hide) the dock

windows individually to the left, right, or bottom.
,

o Dashboard mode displays objects inside or outside the

Techlog window or as tabs; Floating mode restricts windows
to the display area.

o lndividual windows can be enlarged or minimized within the

display area. You can save the window position by clicking H
Save the current windows position.

o NOTE: lf you are in dashboard mode and would like to

switch to floating mode, click the dashboard mode
a
icon to make the change.

o
o
o
o
o
a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
Basics of the Techlog Window Schlumberger o
Lesson 2 Main Dock Windows
o
ln this lesson, each of the main dock windows in Techlog is
described in detail.
o
Project Browser
The Project browser is where you access and display various
Techlog objects and perform simple operations.
o
Click Datasets to view a list of Techlog objects, including project
wells, datasets, and variables (Figure 2 and Figure 3). The icons
o
representing datasets or variables provide you with information
about the dataset or the type of variable.

Proja(t brgwser
o
:'a:È(i :' laauJrr,rit -8,:a,:a' :. :il' , Lrl,l
a
o
'iDila:9"
' A wettl
E OATAIULT Measred o€pth FI
!! lnaex MeNred Oepti ft
ü LQc Mæsred Oepttr ft
' .:l MlcP
r[ oePru
.:I: CDEPTH
Measred Depth
Meæured Depth
fr
fl
O
Core Depth fl
.:[
':l:
?r
CPERM

CPHI
CShg
.< pc_lab
Core
Core
Êermeabaliÿ
Porosity
Core Mercury Satura...
mO
vlv
v/y
o
Capillary Pr6ilre La... bar

I
E
.:l:

STRATIGMPHY
SURVEY
Meered Depth
Measured Depth
unitll
Ff
ft
o
Meâsurcd Oepth

o
E r[-wellPath ft
Àl wettz
Àl werl3
Âl wetu
Àl wettg
Layouts
Tracl§ lemplale
Cross-plots
o
Lire-plots
Hislograms
Pie-chârts
o
Figurc 2 List of objects o
12 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
a
o Schlumberger Basics of the Techlog Wndow

o Project browser --x

@+iE,
o Proiect DdDoqrmentr\T€cfrbg-Pxl Family
. Datasets
t^

,' Al wettt
o n Al
o Al
wetlz
wettl

o .
n Al
u Al
Layouts
wetm
wettg

a I
ffi
ffi
Triplecombo
wettg
welrg_t

a r
Tracks template
Cross-plots
lir wetts_lQc_l.t EUT_DENs

o .
Line-plots
Histograms
I werrs_tqç_enuu

o .
Pie-charts
Workflons
r'r
o
MyfirstWorldlow
)f mÿrecondwork
(

o Figure 3 Saved layouts, plots, and workflows

o
o
o
o
O Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 '13
Basics of the Techlog Window
o
Project Browser Appearance
These icons in the Project browser access and display various
types of information.
o
"" All objects in the project o
A Project wells
m Layout, track template, and headers o
? Python scripts
lü Histograms and crossplots O
j:. lpsom workspace maps, Kmod, and classifications
).f Workflows and workflows parameters o
; Deleted objects
O
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
14 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Basics of the Techlog Window

o Saved Levels
By default, only the objects saved at the Project level are
displayed in the Project browser.

o To display the objects that are saved at any other level, right-click
on the project header where the location path of your project is
written, and select the level that you wish to display, as shown in
o Figure 4.

Project brow3cr =x

a
O
O
o Al wetts
, Layouts
User x
hÈ
Company

a ffi Triple combo

ffi wettg
Techlog

ffi weltg-t
o .
ïracks template
Cross-plots

o .
lJ wel ts-lqc-lt EUT-DENs
Line-plots
Histograms

O |lll wetts-t-Qc-GnM[,t

Figure 4 Four Techlog levels (Project, User, Company, and

o Techlog) displayed in the Project browser

You can select to display the family name and unit, and sort the
objects in ascending or descending order.
o
O
O Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 I5
Basics ol the Techlog Window schlumberger O
1
13
Procedure Filtering Data in the Project
Browser o
You can filter the data displayed in the Project browser to show
only what to view. After you apply a filter, only the elements
matching the filter criteria are displayed and the Project browser
o
changes color.

There are two methods in Techlog for managing filters. This

o
procedure shows you how to filter data by using the Filter tab or
the Create a filter menu command.

1. ln the Project browser Properties window, click the 7r-

o
Filter tab and select the filter criteria for these options:
. Il/ell: Apply a filter with a specific well name, or with the last
modification date or date of creation.
a
. Dataset: Apply a filter wlth a specific dataset name,
sampling, last modification date, date of creation, or type.
o
You can make several selections at one time.
. Variable'. Apply a filter with a specific variable name, main
family, family, unit, version status, last modification date,
o
type, or description. You can make several selections at one

.
time.
Group: Apply a filter with a group name.
O

,-
Common operators are AND (&) and OR (l), but you also can
use an asterisk (*) as a wildcard.
NOTE: More information about the syntax can be found in
o
the Techlog Help file.
a
o
o
o
o
'16
ïechlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Basics of the Techlog WndoÂt

o
o
a
o
Lasl modilication dat; (ddlM,.,

o Creation date (ddlMMlînît H-.

o OENS I NEUI

o La§t modilication date (ddlM...

a
o
o
o
O
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
Basics of the ïechlog Windou/ Schlumberger
o
2. Alternatively, select variables, wells, and datasets in the
Project browser. Right-click and select '7 Greate a filter. o
. m DAIAfut-t
o
Meàs Gloùal maaaoÊmGllt
(MD Meàs Open/ctose
I i.;." *,, Bàd }
(. SHI-DK w*Q R.lr.$ ItE p.oic(l bro*rcr F'
( ss-or
(:
+'
Bir

Core
si '!-l &nâmê

X
oe|et€-
tH.rc dcfiratcly-.
F2

t»l
Slrift+Del
o
( cer-ro
( cau
(.
.{
cxx
Cdap
Celip
j
,J
Dnplic.tr
Cogÿ rêl.ction Cü+C o
o
Core
L ctnu ütho Vlrltlcmrugcnmct
( crun I tsignto tamity
(. conr tL Addroeliasêsrystem
( cseno
t orN-an
t orn-v
c"bk
Bulk
g*a,
I
(. D.tr. r.f€(en(e...
f c*
"s o
g111il ucrge-
1, oeirs
I.
(
(
D€NSJFT
otPn
Sulk 9.6
(.eàte à tlter
o
oRxo

a
C.eate conditiooal sêlection
(or Comr
* Compar€ twoYaraablet
I FActEso4 Utrô
I fLUD ,,*o ffi Comparc Yàriabl€s

rL rreup
lL oauu
(. sn
Form lr.?i.Élc plot crG.üon
6am'
Gâ-t
tlll
gf
8ox-ptor
H,stogram
a
( xarwr H*,qlp,
Crorr-ptor
(.
(
MEOR
il€ur
Medi
61"11 Prrüdloed
O
(. ptnu_eo perm Ê Reloàdüedàtasêts Shift+t5

Hclp
o
The variable, dataset, or well selected is updated in the
Project browser Properties window.
o
o
O
18 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 20'13
o
 Schlumberger Basics of the Techlog VVindo^'

When a filter is created, the Project browser changes color

and only the variables, dataset, and wells selected by the
filter display.
, Datasets
, A weill
. El DAteruLL Measured De... FT

r[. Densiÿ
O q.
oerus
NEur
Bulk G/C3
Neutron Foros... FRAC
. Elteç Measured De... ft
{. orns Bulk Densiÿ G/C3
«1" rurur Neutron Foros... v/v
. Àl welt2
B onraruu- Measured De... FT

'B t-Qç Measured De... m

. Al wettl
B onraruu- Measured De... FT
. ElLeÇ Measured De... ft
{. orxs Bulk Density G/C3

À! wetl+
. Àl wettg
E onreruu Measured De... FT

ffi DateTime Date Time ms

Etqç Measured De... ft
. El TimeData Date Time ms

3. To remove a filter, right-click in the Project browser and

select ? Remove the current filter.

Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 19

Basics of the ïechlog Window Schlumberger
o
2
t1
Procedure Applying Conditiona! Selections
Conditional selection is an option that allows you to select one or
o
several curves, wells, or datasets. For example, you can use this
option to select specific curves to drag into a LogView layout.
Conditional selection is available only in the Project browser.
o
Similar to the filter option, there are two ways to manage
conditional selection in Techlog, in the Properties window and
with the Conditional selection command.
o
1. ln the Project browser Properties window, open the
o Conditional selection tab and select the filter criteria for
o
lhe ÿl/ell, Dataset, Variable, and Group options.
The variables, dataset, and wells selected by the conditional
selection are highlighted in gray.
o
2. To remove a conditional selection, click in the Project
browser. o
o
O
o
a
O
o
o
a
Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
a
o Schlumberger Basics of the Techlog Window

3
o Procedure Grouping Data Objects Manually
You can group wells, datasets, and variables manually according
trl
to the properties available in the wells, datasets, and logs. Manual
a grouping is accessed from the Project browser.

1. ln the Project browser, select at least two wells, datasets, or

o 2.
variables.
Right-click and select Group.
3. ln the window that opens, enter a name for the group and
o click OK. The group is created and displayed in the Project
browser.

o TIP: You can group any objects in the Project browser.

Project browser =x

o
o
Pro.JlctD:\D-o--!-yrn"gl_ts\ref lllos-:Ît_o" j"9".6J_sP\,vlA?911

'i-!3y"-y"H . ..
Carbonate

o DM
Image
Shaly Sand

o Spectroscopy

a
O
o
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 21
Basics of the Techlog Window Schlumberger
o
Procedure 4 Grouping Data Objects
tll Automatically O
You can use the Properties window to group wells, datasets, or
variables automatically. o
1. ln the Project browser Properties window, click the
Grouping tab.
Properties =+x
o
O bject: Project browser

! Frrter z. Optrons . Con0itronar serect;on

o
rroDerty
o
Va,ue
Display ÿpe
z Hierarchical grouping

o
List
project
Display the group names no
. Wells grouping
Level 1 Country
Level 2 O
Level 3
. Dataset grouping
Level
Level 2
I o
.
Level 3
Variable grouping o
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
a
Group the datasets

O
2. Select one of these options for the Display type.
.
.
Techlog'. Wells, datasets, and variables are not grouped.
Hierarchical grouping: Wells, datasets, and variables are
o
.
grouped according to wells, datasets, or variables
properties (based on the Country in the figure in Stepl).
Project: Wells, datasets, and variables are grouped
o
according to the user.
o
22 Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
a
a Schlumberger Basics of the Techlog Windou/

3.
o Enter the grouping criteria.
This figure shows examples of how objects are displayed in
the Project browser based on the display type and grouping

o criteria.

o
rr,1
-=
;z
À$
1ê

sô
o r5
lË ,z§si::ig
o E t
:iSqé',tâasaB
Ld

o
o
o
O
F §
à

r r
$˧sE;Ë Es§ràr§s§ g;: :, 9§=

o s
I
o - I. ,4

o E EirnrHgS,§tr
EJeeerra!rr
:
r-rËs!
IBtr
EiE§3

o
o
O Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
Basics of the Techlog Window Schlumberser O
Data Search
You can use the search field in the Project browser to display
only the variables or objects that contain the search word you
enter. ln Figure 5, the word gamm is entered as the search criteria
and all wells and histograms that contain a variable named gamm
display in the Project browser.

Project browscr ix

r x
ÇâlTllï

HA m f Li l) i
Project ''
D:\Documents\Techlog-PxlFamity lUnit
, Datasets
. fi Weill
, ü DATAfuLL Measured Depth FT

'l Cnuu Gamma Ray GAPI

. E LQc Measured Depth ft
'l GAMM Gamma Ray GAPI
{1 GAMM_ Gamma Ray GAPI
A welt2
Al wett:
Al wettq
Al wettg
, Histograms
Ll, werrg_Lqc_Gauu

Figure 5 Example of a search from the Project browser

Techlog Fundamentals, Version 20'13 O

o Basics of the Techlog Wndo,v

o Contextual Menu Commands

Right-click on a well, dataset, or a variable to access an
interactive list of the actions available for each Techlog object.
o This list of actions is known as the contextual menu (Figure 6).
The actions available in the contextual menu depend on the object
you select. You can apply these actions to wells, datasets, and

o variables directly from the Project browser.

' :?
o EE:
'ti
rl
!r
55

tiir I
t
I

il§
o
E
"!g
aEr
Itt i
j
-Éi
E"E -v
.9
!3'3
. j-
1t
ù l;: li I r
I

o i
it
:'j.
I
.l

a ,..

o
3
a
-é-Ei
i ! ii
!Ê

:ii:r"
F:i!9

o l
:!.
!igirt

..

o
tl
9:

o E

o SllP
:i::I
È:eÿ!
.aE
9!ra
r a i
:!
ôi d

o i

o Figure 6 Gontextual menus for a wel!, dataset, and variable

o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 t5

Basics of the Techlog Windori Schlumberger
O
Trash Bin
The trash bin allows you to store data deleted from the Project
o
browser.
WARNING: Be aware that if data is deleted with the Delete
command, it will be stored in the trash bin and you
o
can retrieve it. However, if data is deleted with the
Delete definitely command, it cannot be retrieved a
Output Window o
The Output window contains information about every operation
being run in Techlog. These messages provide you with valuable
information and alert you to issues with the applications.
o
Messages display in one of three colors, depending on the
content of the information.
.
o
Green is for information.
Orange is a warning.
Red is for errors.
o
Blue is for command lines.
Each error and warning message is documented with an
explanation about why the error or warning occurred. Figure 7
o
Output
shows a sample green information message.
o
a
:l I l.rl Intormation:
':: l:,, Warning:
-: i;,j Warning:
: r 1-rl [nformâtion:
-: :a lnformation:
'1.:::'lnformation:
.-:
li
:. lnformation:
-;.r lnformation:
o
Figure 7 lnformation message after importing a dataset
o
o
a
26 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
o Basics of the Techlog Window

o Properties Window
The Properties window displays the parameters of any selected
object such as a variable, a workflow, or a log view. The content of
o the window depends on the selected object. The window allows
you to edit the properties of the object.

a For example, if you select the variable DENS in a layout, the

window will show the display properties of this variable. Figure 8
shows these identifying elements of an object when it is selected

o in the Properties window.

o
a
o
O
o
t
o
o
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 27
Basics of the Techlog Windofl Schlumberger

Proecrt,.'
lt
I I
-.' V.ii.blcli- : . i-... :,:
1-
PrgFlty lvutl ____.-_-_
Nâma OENS

\&G,mMbd I
\rnrDô giatus raw üd lalêl
Dàtast OATA'UI.I,
Samplarrg rôte 0.5 FT
Màin tàmity Elcnity
famrly Bulk Daeÿ
family v.n.bl. type cqtitr,G
Unrt 6tc3
Sy(€m mit
Cmpalrble Irrt
L@9 li§
tamrly unrl ÿcm3
OÊ{nptro coÿÿ ol Rllog tull d«Eily 031
Vânablê type
Pàlefie
. [ôt mdifi(atroo
Ditc I}}u O(t 13 ?011
Trme 180{'.41
. lntomtion
Mrnimum valæ 2.031

a
Mà!mum valG 2.?O1
Mêàn 2_270283
dcaat@
Staôdôrd 0.0966956æ7,1812825
M§gng vôlE 201
Number of valu6 t857
Total rumb« ot valu6 æ68
Souce tle
tmt ,l@t

Figure 8 Key items in the Properties window

Tabs Tabs to access the parameters and

properties of the object
2 Object ÿpe Type of the selected object
3 Well, dataset, Full name of the object
variable name
Editable Properties that you can edit for the
properties object. You can edit only those
properties that are highlighted in green.

28 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3

o Schlumberger Basics of the Techlog Window

o Figure 9 shows examples of the properties that are displayed for a

well, dataset, and variable.

o I
§
t:
§
tR É

o :

EÊËËË,
_Ë
Eü
ô6

ïa
J E EÉ3É
-t
É-

o!
o t
T
E

§I
ts
!It li§r
:i"
a E rËsrâ,gtËsï,§,,

o
O
o
o E
o = Ëë

O
I §
'
3È
âg
â
É
I
il
È,
§i § q

o E Ërë 8i',§§§a§-.

o Figure Examples of different items displayed in the

Properties window, depending on the selected
object

o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 29
Basics of the Techlog Wlndofl schlumberger O
Procedure 5 Using the Properties Window
ri You should keep the Properties window open at all times. You
also can use the F4 shortcut to display the Properties window for
any object in Techlog. ln this procedure, you use the F4 button to
make the Properties window display or not display.

1. Press F4 to bring the Properties window to the front.

NOTE: You can edit the unit of the variable manually.

2. Press F4 again to dock the Properties window in its original

place.

Zonation Window
The Zonation window stores all of the interval sets in the project
Zones selected in the Zonation window are reflected in plot
displays and workflows.

To select zones, choose the name of the set from the drop-down
list (Figure 10). ln this example, only one set exists:
STRATIGRAPHY.

E Zonation ...i+x
Zonation:
STRANGRAPHY
ZoneB
' Zone(
ZoneD
ZoneE
ZoneF
ZoneS

Figure l0 Selecting a zonation dataset

30 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 20'13 O

a Schlumberger Basics of the Techlog Windovÿ

After you select a dataset, a list appears that contains all of the
a zones within the zonation set. For example, in a layout, the
selected zones in the Zonation window are highlighted in the
layout (Figure 11).
o
a
o
o
o
o
O
o
o Figure 11
Obiect

Zones selected in the zonation window are

highlighted in the LogView display

o to the Display menu, and choose to display checkboxes or

o icons.

o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 11
Basics of the Techlog Window
o
Markers Manager
The Markers dock window lists all the markers available in your
o
project.
. Click on the drop-down menu to select the marker type
dataset to display.
o
. Use the Marker pane to select specific markers to display
(Figure 12). a
= Mrrtc6
Tops
=x
o
Top-B
-
E
Tot
Rename marker:.. o
- [, Detine marker color..

-TotTol 3
-
Automatic colors definition
o
Figure 12 Markers manager
a
o
o
a
o
o
o
a
L
Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 20 1 3
o
 Schlumberger Basics of the Techlog Wndor{

Workspace Manager
The Workspace manager lists the workspaces open in Techlog
and the windows open within each workspace, such as plots and
workflows. Figure l3shows the active windows and workspaces
displayed in bold.
You can rename and save the workspace. When you reopen the
workspace, the windows are arranged in the same way as they
were when you saved the worksPace.

ln Figure 13, the active window is the layout UnknownMW in the

workspace named Techlog workspace.
-- UUorbpacc =qx
Current workspace
.". Tasks
,= Workpaces
@ Techlog workspace
til Techcore workspace

@ Techlog workspace
r., Techcore workspace
, El Techlog workrpace

o lr.
L[
wer rs_l-ec_N
weug_rec_cau»t
E uT_DENS

Êl unknown:o
ffi UnknownMW:l [Well: WcllU
Data editor
i kil
i o Techcoreworkspace
; r! Savedworkspaces
i r Prqect
I ô Company
I à3 user
§ Techlog

Figure 13 Workspace manager showing several workspaces

Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 33

Basics of the Techlog Windou/ schlumberger O
You can switch from one workspace to another by double-clicking
on the workspace to switch to in the Workspace manager. You
also can close windows or entire workspaces from the contextual
menu (Figure 14).

-- ttOrtspæc
Current workpace
'^,TasK
.= workspaces
@ Techlog workspace
l, Techcore workspace

@ Techlog workpace
G, Techcore workpace
, El tcctrlog wonapacc
i! werts-Lqc-rr U
save.-
L[ wettg_LQc_G -1. Rename r2
EE UnknownM!À ? Ctose... Del
rrrr Datà Gditor

§, Tech<ore workt DÙhbo'rd tcmd'tc

3l save asdashboard template
E saved workpaces
Ë Load a dàshboard template
li LoaO a dashboard template as default

EE Disable default dàshboard template

Add ncu worksprce

E Tecntog
(, Techcore

a, Quanti
..J Wbi

E Ipsom

i:' Kmod

) Muttilinear regression
!{ Oata classification - MLP

Figure 14 Closing workspaces and windows with the

contextual menu

TIP: Hover the mouse over a saved workspace to preview its

content.

Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013 O

o Schlumberger Basics of the Techlog Window

o Lesson 3 Synchronization Tool

The Synchronization tool (Figure 15) allows asset teams to work

o in a collaborative environment where data can be transferred to

and from a shared Techlog project.

Each team member must create a personal project on their local

o space and, from this personal project, they can link to the shared
one. Afler the projects are linked, team members can share their
data with the community through a send and retrieve mechanism.

o This turns the user's local project into a SandBox area where
Techlog users can iterate on the interpretation and share only the
final results.

o User 1 User 2

o ? _r_
o l@J
o
(

I
Shared Project 1
hl
o
@ 15
Figure
Shared Project 2

How the Synchronization tool works

@l
Project Paftial Loading Feature
o It is recommended that you disable lhe Project partiol loading
functionality when using the Synchronization tool, because the

o Synchronization tool displays only the wells loaded in the

Project browser. Using the Project partial loading feature can lead
to a mismatch between the Reference repository and the current
project.

a
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 35
Basics of the Techlog Wndof Schlumberger
o
1
[rl
Procedure Disabling the Project Partial
Loading Feature a
1. Go to the Project tab in the Project browser Properties
window. o
2. Select Options.
3.
4.
Go to the Parameters tab.
Clear lhe Partial project loading check box.
o
5. Click OK to validate.
o
Procedure 2 Linking Techlog to the Reference
I3I Repository
o
-,N NOTE: This procedure assumes that the Reference repository
exists.
o
1. Create a new Techlog project on your private disk space.
2. ln the Techlog main window, select Utility >
Synchronization > Synchronization too!.
O
Utility
o
a
3. Click Link and browse to the location of Reference
repository. The current project is now linked to the Reference
o
repository.

o
o
o
a
36 ïechlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Basics of the Techlog Window

)cedure 3 Retrieving Items from the

O Reference Repository r3
o 1. From the Reference repository pane, select the items to
retrieve.
Click S to move the items to the Current project pane.

o rX'',
Lod 0.b. Rdeh
o

o Current project Reference repository

TE'T

ru EEtrBElË f,rr. Fü6 *i EEEIE|Él I;

&æ
.
.lh6 krlk
. lcffi
^sle ter I
codd I I

o
. a Drd,

E
. Ddk' ! !
. Aw6_d ! !u.g!.!l- I
ii.l.p,éi B E
{]Et tsl
itoc B
ffi',__tr E
E **g.pty tr tr

o tr
Click Close to exit the Synchronization tool. The items
display in the P§ect browser.
O
NOTE: The Send and Retrieve actions are performed at the .Or

o dataset level only.

a
o
o
O
o
I
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 20'13 37
Basics of the Techlog Window Schlumbergêr
O
4
Procedure Sending ltems from the Current
Project to the Reference o
Repository
1. After working with your data, reopen the Synchronization
tool.
o
2. From the Current project pane, select the items you
modified.
o
3. * to send the items you modified
Click
repository pane.
to the Reference
o
d o
Cunent
Lo(k

project
E- (ûMrpwglhi.dlEl)
RdrS

Reference repository
o
æ, EEtBËlü ?
o
ffioE rtr
h -1tu tüt ùh. -|tu lkr I
| , côm.d
,k! !

. lm_q I
Iiltu s
-üGFo+t, E
ril
rBe(
I s*s.rtu
I
El
B
El o
Data Locking o
Data can be locked to prevent other users from overwriting the
data you currently are working with. When data is locked, other
users can retrieve them and modify them locally (in each user
a
project) but they cannot send their changes to the Reference
repository.

You can lock data and view the locked items from either the
o
Current project or Reference repository pane. However, the
items are locked only in the Reference repository pane. o
ln case of an error, a warning window opens listing all the objects
that were not locked in the Reference repository.
a
a
o
38 Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
 Basics of the Techlog \Mndorv
O schtumberger

Procedure 5 Locking Data

To send a Techlog object to the Reference repository, you must
tll
lock it first.

1. From both Synchronization tool panes, select the items to

lock and click Lock.
2. Click CIose to validate. ln the Project browser, you can see
a padlock on each locked item.
o
locked. Use the Synchronization tool to view data
locked by other users.

O Currentproject
k- (C:\kM9-frts\h)
Reference repository

Iitter: EEEBE: ?
Name -satus@f i' ruame .starus
EI
O . ,l We.rt E -l_ r À weilI tr J- usffirel
,-r DataFur tr
[G;;;l -' rata;Jrr tr f1

O lf another user forgets to unlock the data, a data

administrator can unlock them.
lf all items in a specific group are locked, a padlock displays
on the group name.
lf you have items inside a group with at two or more lock
statuses, the ! icon displays in the parent Lockstatus
column.
NOTE: When several users connect to the same Reference ,
repository to exchange modified data, conflicts can
appear between your Current project and the
Reference repository.

There are several tools that can be used to resolve

potential conflicts but a discussion of these tools is
beyond the scope of this training. More information is
available in the Iechlog User Guide.

1ô
Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
O
Basics of the Techlog Window Schlumberger
o
Lesson 4 Techlog Project Greation
o
ln this lesson, you will learn how to create a new project in
Techlog.
The Project lemplate option allows companies to define clear
o
formats for any feature in Techlog that must be applied for a
dedicated addressee. This option typically is offered to service
companies that deliver standard output on a per customer basis
o
The Project template option copies the whole project (including
data) defined as a template into the newly created project. All of
the settings applied in the project template are available for the
o
data that will be loaded into the new project.
o
Procedure 1 Creating a New Techlog Project
td The first time you open Techlog, most of the menus and dock
windows are disabled (they appear in gray). This is because no
o
project is open. You will need to create a new project first.

1. ln the Techlog main window, select Project > New to

a
project
2.
open the New wizard.
ln the New project wizard, enter this information:
. Project name: Do not use a slash (\).
o
.
.
(Optional) Country: This helps filter your projects later.
(Optional) Description: lnformation about the project.
o
Click Next to go to the Folder, status and ÿpe page.
The project is added to your Project lolder automatically. lf
you wish to store it in another directory, click the ellipses (...)
o
button to navigate to and select the location.
(Optional) Choose a Project template from the list or browse
for it by clicking the ellipses (...) button.
o
Set these options for the project template:
. Project stalar: ln progress or temporary.
a
. Project opening default mode'. ln Techlog 2013, only single-
user is available (options are read/write or read only). O
. Project plug-in: For best performance, choose SQLite.

o
40 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumbêrger Basics of the ïæhlog Windor

.
o Unit system: (optional) This option is available only if a
company folder exists.
6. Click Next. A message appears asking you to confirm the

o 7.
creation of the new project folder.
Select the modules you wish to use. You can change this
selection after you create the project.

o 8. Click Next, then click Finish.

Exercise 1 Creating the My First Techlog

o Project

1. ln the Techlog main window, select Proiect > New

o 2.
open the New project wizard.
Enter the appropriate information in the Project name,
to

o Country, and Description fields.

N*prcjæt

a Name, country and dcscription

Pro.,ect namel

My First Techlog Project

o Country:

l_l France

O My lirst training with Techlog

o
a
a
O 3. Click Next.

o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 20'1 3 41
Basics of the Techlog Windo'rv
a
4. ln the Foldei status and ÿpe window that opens, you can
modify the storage path for your project. For this exercise,
use these values:
a
. Project status: ln progress
. Prqect opening default mode: single user [read/write] O
. Prqect plug-in: SQlite
. Unit system:
is installed)
Undefined (for the moment, no company folder o
f,ld prcj«t

Foldcq, itltus lnd typc

o
hoject folder:
D:\Documents\Techlog-Projects\My

Template project path:

First Techlog Project o
ProJect StatuS:
o
in progress

ProJect opening default mode: O

single user lread/writel

Project plug-rn:
SQLite
O
o
Unit system:
Undefined

Click Next. A confirmation dialog box opens asking you to

a
confirm the project folder creation.
Click Greate. Techlog creates the new project folder.
o
a
o
o
42 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
 Basics of the Techlog Window
O schtumberger

7. Select the modules that will be checked out when you open
o the project.
Ncw prcjæt

o ModuL3
Modules (26): ÿ S€lect all

o :{ E
ia I
r ü
Techdata Plus

Quanta
1
./
(,
li
J E wbi
Te€hcore
wbi
,. ô
-/, ?
Op€nspirit
Recail

Quanti.Etan Lite Yr ÊF 3D Vre

o yt

ivr
I
1l
raa
NMR
r (D Techstat
I 3'Kmod
r f,lpsom
1@
i1-l
tf
ProSource
Acoustig
§ tPress
ur .r L 3DP

o 7!Fc
rJl
§l @optry
r f. PYÛEn
r ! rierd uap
r @ Reat-time
J <D Wellbore stabality
J Tt bre pressure
r'i § SHM

o
o 8. Click Next. The project has been created. Techlog displays

o a summary of your project characteristics.

I'Lw p@j«t

nil
o wlt crcrt d
Thc prcrcct

Press Finkh to add at into your projecl list and open it.

o Prqiêct n mcMy First Techlog Project

Foldcr: D\Documents\Techlog-Projects\My First Techloq Project

o Strtur: in progress
Dcâun opcning modc single user [readlwritel

o Plug-in:SQLite

Unlt rÿ3tcm: Undefined

Dcscription : My first training with Techlog

o Op€n the project inside nelv Iechlog window

o
O Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 43
Basics of the ïechlog Window Schlumberge.
o
9. Click Finish to open your newly created project.
Notice that all of the icons are now active. You can now
upload data into your project.
o
Techlog Project Folder Structure and Settings o
When a project is created, Techlog creates a structure of folders
(Figure 16). Each folder contains all of the objects (plots, layouts,
and processing parameters) saved at the Project level.
o
o
o
ûgtut kib! tud! b k&

M4
ILI}}}}I}}}II}I
D HMffi
@.*ffiff&@h"1*oi
ru(ûrc@ O &ilrDa&Ce(#(6æ |

rttàItLIIlIlrIL
cÆc& c& @
-eT*.*&61*r.È

LrtttIùtLIIIltr
a,t*l4!ù aû M tu b Mhln@ffi *
o
o
ree c*il fu lLe ffi lblb 5ç h læ ttl& l&1. I.É
È E4çM r r* .&

rrIlIùtIltIILlr
l-b@BEfuh<6@ffi&*ktuMlffiP&E
.!:daùbk&Mqù
ù

@
lt IrIllrùIIIli
E ffi ffi ,fuL ffi ffi tçtr N b arÉn r+t 5.q
rr
* M o
rrIùürLllslrrlr Éffi*ÊMffi

tu *

nI}IltLI
w
ie

s&&kffi!trl@M
ffi

D
ræ

ry
r.t*rr@

æ
rô
Hl

l
rd

]ÉE
r* rï* *ddü wek wtu

o
Figure 16 Project folder structure
o
The project settings are stored in Seffings.xml file located in the
Settlngs directory. This file contains this information: o
. Name of the project
.
.
Name of the person who created the project
Creation date
o
.
.
Modification log
Opening mode
o
. Licenses used in the project.
a
Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
 Schlumberger Basics of the Tæhlog Window

Procedure 2 Opening an Existing Project

You can open an existing project from the Project menu where
EI
the most recent Techlog projects are listed.

1. ln the Techlog main window, select Project > Recent

projects.
A list of the ten most recently saved projects appears.
2. Select a project.

New,,. Ctrl+Shift+J, N

"- Open... Ctrl+Shift+J, O

Q Ctose... Ctrl+Shift+J, C
. Recent projects -l -

l:: aa.ri Ctrl+Shift+1, I

I
at 2. D:\Documents\Techlog-Projects\My First Project

I .ri)r,rl Ctrl+Shift+J, E
E 3. D:\Documents\Techlog-Projecls\MLC-1

4. D:\NotBackedUp\Florence\Allan\SPWLA 2011.1
ai. Project utilities
=
. 5. D:\Documents\Techlog-Projects\CMR

o ur
lf
Licensing

Print... ctd+q P
rl
,
6. D:\Documents\Techloq-Projects\School

7. D:\Documents\Techlog-Projects\exams
May

'( a| 8. D:\Documents\Techlog-Prolects\Conventional
Options... Ctrl+Shift+J, P
, 9. D:\Documents\Techlog-Projects\EuiltitjEST
Ei Quit Techlog Ctrl+Shift+l Q
rr 10. D:\Documents\Techlog - Projects\Quâ nti

Remove inaccessible projects

3. A confirmation window opens asking if you want to replace

the current project or open the project in a new Techlog
session. Click Replace the current.

@ Schlumbcrgcr

The project 'Iüÿ Hrn Ptoicct' is already open.

Do you want 1o replace the current project or to open

the project into a new Te(hlog?

Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 45

Basics of the Techlog Windov{ Schlumberger
o
3
Procedure Opening an Older Project
This procedure shows you how to open a project if it is not one of
o
the ten most recently saved projects.

1. ln the Techlog main window, select Project > Open to open

o
the Project selection window.
2. Select a project and click Open.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Review Questions
. How can you access the list of dock windows? o
. How do you change from Dashboard mode to Floating
.
mode?
Name three actions you can take from the Project browser.
O
. Where can you read system messages, including information
and warnings, that might help you to understand issues
arising in your project?
o
. What is the shortcut to display the Properties window?
o
46 ïechlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
O Schlumberger Basics of the Techlog Window

o Summary
ln this module, you learned about:

o .
.
using the Techlog main window
customizing the interface of Techlog
.
o .
.
accessing project data
accessing Techlog modules
creating a Techlog project.

o
a
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 47
a
o
O
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o Schlumberger Data lmport and Export

o Module 2 Data lmport and Export

o Techlog can integrate many types of data, including log data,

point data, seismic, deviation files, and image files. Techlog also
supports a variety of the most common formats, including LAS,

a GeologASCll, DLIS/LIS, ASCII file with the wizard, core images,

TechCSV, and the Techlog format (XML).

ln addition, you can export data or any object created in Techlog

o (such as plots and layouts) from Techlog to formats such as LAS,

DLIS, GeologASCll, ASCII file, TechCSV, and the Techlog format
(xML).

o Learning Obiectives ls--

o After completing this module, you will know how to:
. import data files, such as DLIS, LAS, and TXT formats
. import spreadsheet files
O . import image files, such as PNG and TIFF
. import XML Techlog files
o .
.
export data from Techlog
use the Well ldentification Solver.

o Lesson 1 Data lmport

o You can import data in four ways. Which method you use depends
on the type of file and your preference of a process.

o .
.
Drag the files to be imported into Techlog (LAS, DLIS,
Techlog XML, CSV files).
Select Project > lmport from the main Techlog window.

o .
.
Select Home > lmport
Press Ctrl + Shift + J,l.
l.

o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 49
Data lmport and Export Schlumberger
o
Regardless of the method you choose, the action opens the
import buffer (Figure 17) in the Project browser window. o
The import buffer holds in a temporary space all of the data that
you choose to import. This allow you to quality check the
properties of each variable before you import it into the project. o
Project browser
o
IL::ç'
rrc,-ect: 3:',)otu lrc:lts,îecfr og-lro-ec
'L-lL1:Ut!
' () a
-a ? [rr,]i<
Tracb template
Cross-plots
o
Line-plots
Histograms
+ o
Pie-charts
Worldlorvs
Worldlow manager
o
Thin bed analysis
Project parameters
Wells parameters
x o
7am naranllatæ

Figure 17
)

P§ect browser (left) and the import buffer (right)

o
a
a
o
o
o
50 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3
o
o Schlumberger Data lmport and Export

1 lmporting Data
o Procedure
This procedure is applicable for most of the files you will load into
Techlog.
rl
o 1. Select Home > lmport $ to open the import buffer.
2.
o 3.
Click Open *J and browse for files to be imported.
lf the data cannot be parsed automatically by Techlog, the
ASCI! lmport wizard opens.

o 4. ln the Properties window of the wizard (on the right side),

defi ne
.
these parameters:
The dataset type you wish to import: continuous, point data,

o or interval. (lf you are importing zonation datasets, make

sure the Dataset type property is set to
Interval El.)

o . The location of header information in the ASCII file (lmport

from line, Variable name line, and Unit line)
.
o 5.
6.
Delimiter settings.
Click Preview.
ln the Preview window, define these parameters.

o .
.
Reference column (mandatory), selected in lhe Type row
lf applicable, the l(ell name and Dataset name columns.

o You can remove the unnecessary columns by clicking

Remove column(s).
NOTE: lt is not necessary to define lhe Variable and Array o
o columns. Techlog identifies them automatically.

7. Click Load to the import buffer.

8. Click t to import the data into the Proiect browser.
O 9. After data is imported, click Delete X to clear the content of
the import buffer.
O 10. Click Close CI to close the import buffer.

o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 5'1
Data lmporl and Export Schlumberger
o
2
Lesson DLIS File lmport

There are two ways to import -.d/is data: File(s) import or

o
Selective DLIS import.
File(s) import (Figure 18) loads the header and the data, applies
o
the family assignment rules, and calculates statistics when
loading to the buffer.

, File(s) import
o
1./
;E
import with wizard
ASCII file(s)
Images rmport with vvizard
o
l§
lE
lE
Seismic data import
r".nrog project import
Files import - Folders selection
o
Al Multi well file import
1./ Selective DLIS import
lô
i@
OpenSpirit project import
C919D,B prqect imporl
o
Figure 18 File(s) import dialog box

Selective DLIS import (Figure 19) loads the header into the
o
buffer and applies the family assignment rules (quick load). \Men
you transfer files to the Project browser, it loads the data and O
computes statistics.

iy' S"fuai*'"DL§imPort
I
File: C\Users\feinaudMppData\Local\Tei
-iÉ o
r
o
I

Datasets
I
i 'Â wettt
DATAFUTI-
I

I m

o
f

It* B DATAFULL-RESAMPLED-1-FT

i m DATAFULL-REsAMPLED-3-Fr

i a *""'
I] a *'"'
A w"r'q
o
Figure 19
i A wetts

Selective DLIS import dialog box

o
o
ïechlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumbergêr Data lmport and Export

This type of import is useful when working with large files or when
o you wish to view the content of the file. lmported data appears in
the import buffer where you can verify that all variables are
present.

o After data is imported into the buffer, choose the datasets to be

imported into the project and click the green arrow S to move

o them into the Project browser (Figure 20). You can observe the
progress of the import in a Techlog window.

a
Proi(r browrr

o I Well
well
I w.|2
I Werl
I Wei4
I W.ll9
.Dàiae!
I
I
I
werl
Werl2

w€l]

a hpû
Ir* mplaE
Cros-ph§
Uæ-de
HrJiogrâG

o A€-M

o Figure 20 Data import into the Project browser

Exercise 1 lmporting DLIS Log Files

o ln this exercise, you load .d/rs data into your project.

!
o 1.
2.
Select Home > tmport .

ln the import buffer, select Files(s) import from the drop-

down menu.

o 3.
4.
Click Open ;-.
Choose the files listed in the llech/og-2013\01 DLIS
directory and click Open. You now have five files in the
o import buffer:

Welll.dlis Well2.dlis

a Wel13.dlis

Wel19.dlis
Well4.dlis

o
a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
Âa
Data lmport and Expo( Schlumberger
o
5. The files are added as well names. Expand each well and
look at the datasets.
6. There is a problem with the name of the DATAFULL dataset
o
in Well 2. Remove the underscore f)
in the dataset name
Right-click on the dataset and select Rename or press F2. o
7. Choose all the datasets named DATAFULL for all five wells.
TIP: To choose only the DATAFULL datasets, right-click and
select Create a conditional selection. from the
O
contextual menu.

8. Click the green arrow S to import the data into the Project
a
browser.
9. Veriÿ that your data was imported correctly.
a. Expand the wells and the datasets.
a
b. Click on a variable and view it in the Properties dock
window. The properties for each variable appear. o
TIP: The shortcut for viewing the Properties window is F4.
10. ln the Project browser, note that variables appear in black,
gray, or red.
o
.
.
Black: a variable has a unit and has been assigned to a
family. o
Gray: the variable is missing a family or a unit.
. Red: the variable has no unit and no family assigned to it
This display helps you to harmonize and quality check the
a
11.
data. (These topics are discussed later in the training.)
After you quality check the data, click Delete X to clear the
content of the import buffer.
a
12. Click Close () to close the import buffer.
TIP: lf you click the X (in the upper right corner of the window)
o
o
to close the import buffer, both the import buffer and the
Project browser window will close.

To reopen the Project browser and import buffer, right-

click anywhere in the toolbar and select Project browser
from the Dock windows drop-down menu.. o
o
ÿ Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Data lmærl and Export

LAS File lmport

o Lesson 3

When importing *./as files, select File(s) import (Figure 21) from

o the drop-down menu in the import buffer. All other steps in the
import process are identical to the procedure for importing ".d/is
data.

o C:\Users\feinaudi\AppData\Local\Ter
, DatasêG

o , À wetll
. Hl suRvEY
r[ uo
a (. ea
(. ncrnnnoru
. A well2
o . El sunvEv
(' MD
(Au
o A
{. tlcuruenot
Well3

o
A Wel14
A Wel19

21 LAS file import dialog box

o
Figure

Exercise 1 lmporting LAS Files

o ln this exercise, you load the Hole Azimuth and Deviation surveys
into Techlog. These surveys are provided as ./as files.

o 1.
2.
Select Home > Import t.
Select File(s) import from the drop-down menu.
3.
o 4.
Click Open ;-.
Choose these files listed under \Techlog_2013\02 LAS and
click Open.

o .
.
Welll.dlis
Well3.dlis
.
.
Well2.dlis
Well4.dlis

o . Well9.dlis

a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 55

Data lmporl and Export schlumberger O
5.
6.
Expand each well and view the datasets.

Choose the dataset SURVEY for all five wells and

import the data into the Project browser.
click to o
The figure shows the Project browser after adding the
SURVEY files.
o
Projcctbrows€r

-'$" ï , li_, ,,. è, d .. |1 1,"

r

".
q x

o
Pro.lectD:\Documents\Ie€hlog-Projects\l
, Datasets
rI We[1
C) File(s)import
File: C:\Users\feanaud\AppData\Lo(al\Ter
. Datasets
a
.û
rf
ffil oetaruu-
Weil2
ffi oareruu-
§" ' &
Weill
--l suRvEv
wett2
o
.À well3

o
:1 SURVEY
orraruu
ffi IHH I wel3r
r[ wer4 ffi .A ffisuRnrEy
ffionraruu ffi wel4
r I were
ffi oetnrur
ffi*f
X
ElsuRvry
r{ Weil9
. .t suRvtv
o
o
a
O
o
a
o

56 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013 a

o Schlumberger Data lmport and Export

7.
o Verify that your data was imported correctly by expanding the
wells and the datasets. You can see that the SURVEY
dataset was added to each well.

o The figure shows the Proiect browser after the SURVEY

data is imported.
Prdcctbrowscr [ x
=

o ilEm è [! !:',
Project D:\Documents\Techlog-Projects\i

a r Datasets
rg Welll
I ] DATAIULL

o '
' ,{ wett2
,]i
I suRVEv

DATAFULL

o . ü
,.
wett3
,
i SURVEY

:i DATAFULL

o rg
,. r suRve v
Weil4
I- ] DATAFULL

O . ,{
i 11

wettg
SURVEY

I_,I DATAFULL

a ,-.i SURVEY

o 8. Click on a variable and view it in the Properties dock

window. The properties for each variable appear. Notice that
some variables appear in black, gray, or red.

o .
.
Black: A variable has a unit and has been assigned to a
family.
Gray: The variable is missing a family or a unit.
o 9.
. Red: The variable has no unit and no family assigned to it.
Clear the content of the import buffer.

o 10. Close the import buffer.

o
Techlog Fundamentals, version 2013 57
a
Data lmport and Export schlumberger O
4
Lesson Text File lmport

Before ..fxf files are added to the import buffer, they appear in the
o
Data import wizard window (Figure 22). ln this window, you can
veriÿ that your data will be correctly imported. O
The Data import wizard allows you to configure many
parameters.
. Dataset type (continuous data, point data, intervals)
o
.
.
Specific lines from which to import
Line for unit, if it exists
a
. Delimiter of the original file.
o
o
-l !l r kôffiffiIr

?7 : . FÉm lop Frch btoil toryÿ

Oât.erryp.

Ud§ laæ
I
1
imsva
o
tyr
Dara
Occimal@mma
d€limited
æim o
Z@ùonlM
. ælimi6

Îârl.h F
a
SE.

keh Lo.d ro h imFrr tuffer Mrrsrnq vàræ dêr«tron ele§: El Mv = -s25 . 7

Cmd
OhR
rcp<omÀ"ry,a*
k iddifkâù
rc

p
àûomt<
o
25:.fromrop

rvr
Uril
W€ll üm
Frombtom

' L, D.tet mm
oÂTÆÊ1
- L R€fererc.
MO
.FT
. E Zæ Èm
ZOaILNAME
o
a
Figure 22 Data import wizard for zones import
a
o
58 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 20'13
o
o Schlumberger Data lmært and Export

lmporting Stratigraphy Data from a

o Exercise 1
TXT File

o ln this exercise, you import the stratigraphy data for Well1, Well2,
Well3, Well4, and Well9. Before you start the exercise, open the
.txt file to review the data you are about to import, as shown in the

o figure.

- ZONES.txt - Notepad

o File Edit Format View Help

LL
II1
I11
OATASET MO
5TRATIGRAPHY
.I.I1 STRATIGRAPHY
ZONE-NAI4E
7)L5 zoneB
74)2 zone(.
7494 zoneD
o
5TRATIGRAPHY
I11
.I
STRATIGRAPFIY 7907 ZoneE
I1 5TMTIGRAPHY 8215 zoneF
II2 STRATIGRAPHY 7467 zoneB
I.I2 STR,ATIGRAPHY 75AZ zonec
2 7674 ZoneD
o
1
.I I STRATIGRAPHY
1Z STRATIGRAPHY a2z2 zoneÉ.
weII] STRATIGRAPHY 7f73 zoneB
we] I ] 5TRATIGRAPHY 749L zonec
!ÿe]I ] STRATIGRAPHY 758O zoneD
we].I ] 7775 zoneE
o
STRATIGRAPHY
we.II 3 STRATIGRAPHY 875) zoneF
well3 STRATTGRAPHY 8518 zones
we.I 14 STRATIGRAPHY 7405.5 zoneB
we]14 5TRATIGRAPHY 7524 zon«-
we] 14 762L.5 zoneo
o we].I4
we] 14
we] ]4
we]I9
STMTIGRAPHY
STRATIGRAPHY
STMTIGRAPHY
STMTIGRAPHY
STRATIGRAPHY
8218 zoneg
8490.5 zoneF
87L9 zones
lO5)7 zoneB
we]]9 10675 zonec
o
STRATIGRAPHY
we]]9 STRATTGRAPHY 10815.4 zoneD
wel'19 STRATTGRAPHY 112f3.5 zoneE

o 1. Select Home > lmport +.

o 2.
3.
Select File(s) import from the drop-down menu.
From the folder \Techlog_2?l3\03 TXT, select the ZONES.txt
file to import. The lmport Wizard window opens.

o 4. ln the Property area, change the Dataset Type to lnterval.

Notice there are no units in this file.
5. Add the unit (FT) to the Reference variable.
o
o
a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 EO
Data lmport and Export schlumberger O
Click Preview. Your Data import wizard window should look
like the figure. o
o
O.MlyË
2
o
I
0

a
o
o
A wdr mmê
WELL
- n D.iàqmm
OAT§fl
- (, Èrffiê
MD
- E Zoe m-c
ZMLWE
o
o
7. Click Load to the import buffer.
o
o
o
a
o
o
60 TechlogFundamentals,Version2013
a
 schlumberger Data lmport and Export
O
8. Make a quality check of the data added to the import buffer.
o ?qx

o (:)
;1"f, À ü1 "
File(s) import
lÈ !:' r'"
-:
File: C:\Users\feinaud i\AppData\Local\Ten

a . Datasets

' ,ù wetll
, Ê srRancRaPrY
o â ù
{.
Well2
ruto

o ',$
Ê srRaucnnPrv
wetl3
É stRarlcnnPnv

o X
,t
, ,t
wett4
El srRartcRnPriv
Wettg

o El stRancnaPriY

o 9. Click t to import the data into the Project browser.

10. Clear the content of the import buffer by clicking the red X

o 11. Close the import buffer.

TIP: You can select multiple files to add to the import buffer.

o ln the next exercises, you import three files. Because you can add
multiple files in the Techlog import buffer, you will do the final
import to the Project browser at the end of Exercise 4.

o Exercise 2 lmporting the TOPSI File fn

a 1.
2.
Select Home > lmport +.
Select File(s) import from the drop-down menu.
3. From the folder lTechlog_21l3lExerclsesl01 lmport
a Exercise\0l lmport various test configurafionsl, select to
import the file IOPST.txf. The Data import wizard window
opens.

o
a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 61
Data lmport and Export Schlumberger
o
4. ln the Data import wizard window, define these parameters:
. Well name column O
. Dataset nqme column
.
.
Reference unit
Dataset type (lnterval).
a
Two settings are configured automatically:
. Variable name line is set to 1.
o
. Data import is done from line 2.
NOTE: These settings should be verified for any future files. a
m
/r Mipntu -lcwgdHtiôl+Mllryt@9rhFÈEdsqt,ffir.6l o
JÈrômsdddion o
o
i i tl

27 : . t@top fMb(m .,

IE

&El

ÈEt
!@.!
,tr
r.{D
a
o
lêd
æ81 ?5ao

25 :. trcmlop
1213.
tlmbnom
o
ùp. I well Éme - Ü oatast mm - (L Rcter«e - E 2m €mê
ruamel Dêpù Zæ
O
5. Click Load to import buffer. o
3
1 Exercise

1. Select Home > lmport

lmporting the TOPS2 File

l.
o
2.
3.
Select File(s) import from the drop-down menu.
From the folder lTechlog_21l3lExerciseslO1 lmport
o
Exercise\0l lmport vaious test configurafions\, select to
import the file TOPS2.txt.
I
62 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 20 1 3
o
o Schlumberger Datâ lmport and Export

4. ln the Propefi area of the Data import wizard that opens,

o set the Zonation mode to zonation.
You now are able to select Top or Bottom in the table, as

o shown in the figure in Step 5.

NOTE: The property Dataset type was automatically set to
interval.

o 5. Define lhe Top ànd Bottom columns and verify they have the
correct units.
ln this exercise, there is no need to define the reference
O curve. The Top variable will be used as a reference.
ir ei,Bd. rcÀustutlsdtut!ôdblqJottuxMlIryrhb.\01hFt*uctOrmlm.q:

o I
i
on_-
i

28:.Fromlop
tl J ,hrômds dddion

trombonm Poærty lulg

o . 6aGàl

lrnærtfrm

o .
\lb.iôbla
UniS
lÿ8.e
lirc
È..

Dab typc
l1ï'*
o
D.ciml @ |
7aL2

z*,t""r-*ù-
I. D.lamats -îl
detâult

o ryæ À wctt mrc -llop 'Bonom - Ezoæname 'l

o Na@
Unil
1

3
È1110
Kll10
wll10
Daoth
711§
1432
1494
,390
7450
7590
ZoÉ

Zoæ8
zoæC
ZoæD
ZNE

o
4 wll10 7W7 E00o
5 @1110 8215 8300 Zot*+
6 relll1 7467 7500 zoÉ8
7 @lll1 7582 7600 ZotÉ{.
8 rel111 7674 7776 ZoÉD
rct111
!:?? q:?9 a*!

o 6
7
Define lhe Well name column.
Deflne lhe Dataset name column in lhe Property area

o (TOPS2).
lf no column is defined as Dqtqset nome, you have the option
of entering a name.

o 8. Veriÿ that Importfrom /uae is set to 3.

a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 bJ

Data lmport and Export Schlumberger

9. Click Load to the import buffer.

Red error messages appear in the output dock window
during the import process.
[11:28] hmhlgE The reference column (vâriâble 12) is not sorted et line ô4: well14;Unknown;1ü!33.5;ZoneE
I11:281 The releren(e (olun)n tvanable fl2) rs not sorted àt lrne 65: welll,4:Unknown;12065;.

10. Review the original file and make corrections as needed.

Notice that a dot is missing in line 26 of the original file.
lnstead of displaying a depth of 10983.4, the depth is
a
displayed as 109834.
TIP: lt is possible to use the Wizard to edit the file that
currently loaded . Any modification performed (and
is a
saved) in the original file will be immediately
propagated in the Wizard when you click Preview.
o
11 . Save corrections to the IOPS2.txf file.
12. Repeat Step 1 through Step 9 to import it. o
o
o
o
o
a
o
o
o
64 ïechlog Fundamentals, Version 20'1 3
o
o Schlumberger Data lmport and Export

Exercise 4 lmporting the TOPS3 File

a 1. Select Home > lmport $.

o 2.
rab
Select File(s) import from the drop-down menu

o i U J P.ràmBddm

ProFrù
, G۾ra

o Dâbd nare
Data*t lyæ
Import irom iræ
Vaflable name lrre
Tffi3
!,û;;i
3

o
0

Dara rype
Oectmal comma æant

a Zo6a!on mode
. æ|mrter

Tabulalron
d€fôdt

o
5Pà.e

ûk§

o 25 :. Fromtop kombrom

ryr.
Nama

a
Un(

w.lll0 ZotÉ<.
well10 ZoæO
well10 Zorce
weil10 Zoæf
well1l Zoæ8

o 3. From the folder \Techlog_2013lExercises\01 lmport

Exercise\01 lmport vaious test configuraflons\, import the

o 4.
file IOPS3.fxt. The Data import wizard window opens.
ln the Properÿ pane, define Delimiter> Others as a
separator and click Preview.
(')

O 5. Set Keep consecutive separators to no and click Preview.

6. Add a unit (ft) lo lhe Reference column.

o 7. Define the Dataset name as TOPS3.

8. Set the Dataset type as interval.
9. lmport the data into the Project browser.
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 20'1 3 65
Data lmport and Export Schlumbêrger
o
10. Clear the contents of the import buffer.
11. Close the import buffer. o
Lesson 5 CSV Spreadsheet lmport o
Core data is imported as point data in *.csv format using the
File(s) import command. Display the Data import wizard to
verifo or change property settings.
o
NOTE: Excel files (.x/s and .x/sx) are binary files and cannot be
imported using the ASCII import wizard. lf you must
import Exceldata in *.x/s (MS Office 2003) or ..x/sx (MS
o
o
*.
Office 2007 and 201 0) formats, save the files in the csv
format, then import the .csv files into Techlog.

Exercise 1 lmporting a CSV Spreadsheet o

ln this exercise, you upload core analyses in .csv format.

1. Open the folder lTechlog_2013104 CSy and import the

Welll_MlPC.csv file. The Data import wizard opens.
o
2. Venÿ that these property settings are correct or make
changes accordingly: a
a. Set the Dataset type to Point Data.
b. Set the Variable name line to
c. Set the Units line to 2.
1.
o
d. Set the lmport from line to 3.
e. Add the unit ft to the reference if it was not previously
a
added.

o
o
o
o
66 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Data lmport and Export

f. Change the Comma delimiter to yes.

o After adding point data to the import buffer, you should see a
display similar to the figure. The name of your point dataset

o should be MICP.

File(s) import -j
File: C:\Users\AHague\AppData\Local\Ten

o ;
'
'
. Datasets

' A wetll
' E] t'ttcP
a {, orPrH
':1.
.:I:
corprs
CPERM

a ':1.
.:i
cPul
cshq
PC_Lab
=
o 3.
.:l:

Repeat the exercise to import Well2, Well3, Wel14, and Well9

o 4.
MICP data.
lmport the data into the Project browser.

o Exercise 2 lmporting Formation Pressure Data lll

ln this exercise, you upload formation pressure data provided as
O an Excel file.

1. lmport the .csv file into Techlog.

2. Set the Comma delimiter to yes.
O 3. Change the first column to be the reference.
4. lmport the data into only the import buffer.
a Notice that the curves were imported as array (vector) data =-'.
This is done because, in the original file, at least one depth

o 5.
repeats itself.
Clear the content of the import buffer.
6. ln the import buffer, click on the word Datasets.

O 7. ln the Properties window, under the ASCII import parameter,

select Array creation policy.

o
a Techlog Fundamentals, Verslon 201 3 67
Data lmport and Export Schlumberger
o
8. Choose the add qn epsilon to the reference value option. This
option remains selected for any type of data. o
Propertier
object: ImpoÉ buffêl
k*:''r',,,-r.r* Wpll idpntification solver o Conditional sêlêctiôn t
=x

)
o
'à

I Import the well properties

Overwrite the well properties
yes
no
o
Automaticalÿ convert the dâtâ to the de... no
Import mode for SEG-Y files
Deadivate the filter after import
auto
yes
o
. Launch a scnpt before import
Laun(h the Ecript no
ht
o
Làunch à scnpt after rmport
Launch the scnpt yes
o
Scnpt to be launched Techlog\Wbilrnport
ASCII import
Array creation poliry add an epsilon to the reference value
o
Automatic loading of the last configu.,.
Additional datetime format
ignore current file line O
DLIS import
Import orphaned calibrations
duplicate the reference value
ask for each case
t a
This configuration is not optimal for other types of data, such

9.
as Capillary Pressure curves. Choosing the askfor each case
option could be useful for future import sessions.
Upload the .csv file into Techlog again.
o
ln the lmport browser, expand the dataset. This time, the
RFT variables appear with the Point data icon ':1. .
o
10. Configure the Well name and Dataset name by right-clicking
and using the contextual menu.
11. lmport the data into the Project browser.
a
o
o
68 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3
o
o Schlumberger Data lmpo( and Export

o
Exercise 3 lmporting a Thin Section Analysis
Table
tÂ
o ln this exercise, you upload a different type of data: a thin section
description provided as a .csv file.

1. Select Home > lmport l.

o 2. Select File(s) import from the drop-down menu.
,\ ùb,@^ sûd.lc\U5ÉilùlJ).&trdq-MNft&rpl M h'rul I* d ædtu\rE. d§dlyùd

o la .
u r'È.ltlGffi
trom top Frcm bnofr
r,

a 0

o
o
o 10:.F,ombp trom
etu--w25 - /
tu

o I ____-l-
I r@ lrL kr.rnc
iNàmlcæm(t)
lmlffil
lr-82
282
.l
ru%
:

l
l
.4.5-6
MAIU ( M,cdte) (t ) 8EMHqrc FWs S 8trtASIs

lË3 :
. E2
O 5 !t!æ2

3. From the folder lTechlog-21l3lExercises\O1 lmport

o Exercise\02 Table and spreadsheefs\, import the file lhrn
section anaÿsts.csv.
4. ln the Data import wizard, set the variable name line
o 5.
property of the original file to 3.
Click Preview. Notice that this file has no units.
6. Set the unit line property to 0.
O 7. Click Preview. Notice that, in this instance, the application
begins importing the file only from line 10.

o 8. Set the import from line property to 4 and click Preview.

o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 69

Data lmport and Export Schlumberger
o
9. To visualize additional lines in the lower table, increase the
number of available lines and click Preview.
10. Define the curve that will be the reference curve of the dataset
O
11 . Add units to the curves.
12. Enter a Dataset name.
o
13. Remove the Well name from column 1 and add the correct
well name.
14. Perform these tasks to complete the process:
o
a. Load to the import buffer.
b. lmport into the Project browser. a
c. Clear the content of the import buffer.
d. Close the import buffer. O
Lesson 6 lmage File lmport
o
lmage files can be imported using the lmages import with
wizard command (Figure 23) in the import buffer.

E m.g.r import with wizard

o
File(s) import
o
Seismic data import

i
Techlog project import
Files import - Folders selectron
Multi well file import
o
Selective DLIS import
OpenSpirit project import
CoreDB project import
a
Figure 23 lmages import with wizard command

ln the lmage import wizard window, set parameters in the

o
o
Dataset information and lmage information areas of the wizard to
determine how Techlog should read the file. Upon import, you
can either copy the actual file and place it in the project or copy a
link to the location of the image.

o
o
t0 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumbêrger Data lmport and Export

The lmage import wizard window (Figure 24) allows you to

a choose and preview image files to import.

o
o
a
o
o
o
o
Figure 24 lmage import wizard for image files

O Procedure 1 lmporting lmages

o This procedure shows you how to load core data images into
Techlog.

o 1.
2.
Select Home > lmport I to open the import buffer.
Select lmages import with wizard from the drop-down menu.

I 3.
4.
Click Open and navigate to your image folder.
Choose all the images you wish to load and click Open.
NOTE: Techlog allows you to import
*.png,*.tif
,*.jpg,*.bmp,

o *.jpeg, and *.glf image formats.

o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3
Data lmport and Export Schlumberger
a
ln the lmage import wizard that opens, enter a name using
the correct naming convention.
You can enter the name or choose a predefined pattern. The
t
name of images file must comply with the naming convention
for images.
For example, if your image is named
o
Welll_Corelmages_l 567.png, the naming convention is
%oWe IIN a m e%o_% D ata set N a m e %_% D e pt h To p%

lf the name of the file is more complex (for example, if the

o
core image file is CD10789 with 10789 as the top depth of
the core), you must type CD%DepthTop% with CD before the
% to make sure Techlog recognizes the depth automatically.
a
b. lf you wish to copy images into the project, select the Copy
images into the projecl check box.
all
o
lf you do not select this option, a link will be created between
the variable and the actual image during the import process.
TIP: lf there are a lot of images to copy, the performance of
o
U Techlog could be affected; select the Corwert all images
into I color 6lls check box. o
7. ln the Dataset information zone'.
a. Choose a proper unit.
b. Enter a Dataset name.
o
8.
c. Enter a variable name.
Click Preview to view the correctly displayed depth reference.
a
9. Click Load to the import buffer. The dataset is now added
to the import buffer.
10. Click S to import the data into the Project browser.
a
11. Click Delete X to clearthe content of the import buffer.
,
12. Click CIose O to close the import buffer.

a
o
O
72 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Data lmport and Export

a Exercise 1 lmporting Core lmages

Core images cannot be imported by dragging them into Techlog.
t
o The data must be imported using lmage import wizard to be sure
Techlog puts the images at the correct depth. ln this exercise,
you load some .png and .ftffcore images into your Techlog
project.

o 1. Select Home > lmport * to open the import buffer.

2. Select lmages import with wizard from the drop-down menu.
a 3. Navigate to the folder \Techlog-20l3\05 Core images PNG/
Well9/Daylight and choose all files.

o ,, « D.t. ) 05Cor.im.9.5PNG ) vY.lp ) o.yLight

o îî:n 'l 'i 'i 'f 'l 'l

l Dilnlord! 10819-1082 10822-1082 10825-162 1Ga-163 16]1-1083 10&14-1081
7

o .j. R.(€ntPl.(6

.lLbrana
=
'l
2.Png
'l
5,Png
'l
8.Pô9 lPng
'l 'l'p'9
'l
7'P g

. Documcnts

'l 'i 'l 'l 'i '!

108r-1081 108,10-lllBil 1613-164 164G1æ4 16a9-1æ5 1m52-1m5

o d' Muri(

;;::.ï
o.png 3'pn9 6'p'9 9'Pô9 z'Png 5'pn9

rnmn'r,,,.-""."'*::*i:,':ï:,-i:#"ii:îr'3i,,::*.
a r

Opcn lw i C.n..t
-,
-

a 4. Click Open. The lmage import wizard window opens.

5. Select the Copy all images into the proiect check box.
C NOTE: You are importing the file, not creating a link to the file. o

o 6.

7.
ln the /mages information area, the Name model field
extracts information from the file name.
Scroll to the end of the file name list and locate Top Depth -
o 8.
Bottom Depth, as indicated in the Name modelfield:
% DepthTop%-% Depth Bottom %.

ln the Dafaset information area, choose ft from the drop-

o down list in the Depth unit field.

a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 73

Data lmport and Export Schlumberger
o
9. Click Load to import buffer.
10. Load the second image dataset by selecting lmage import
with wizard from the drop-down menu in the lmport
o
browser.
11. Navigate to the image folder llechlo9_2013\06 Core lmages
TlFtWell9/UV and choose allfiles.
o
12. Click Open. The lmage import wizard window opens.
13. Select lhe Copy all images into the projecr check box.
o
14. Verifo the name model to be %DepthTop%-%DepthBottom%.
15. Because this core image dataset is using Core Depth as a
reference, in the Dafaset information area, enter the Depth
a
name field CDEPTH and choose FT from the drop-down list
in the Depth unit field. o
o
o
o
o
o
t
a
The table in the lower left corner shows you how the data is
stored (a dataset with a link to the image at each depth). The
o
scale in the right lower corner lets you preview the images.
o
74 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Data lmporl and Exporl

16. Review the depth table and note the empty intervals.
a 17. ln the lower right corner of the window where a view of the
image is available, modify the zoom factor.

o Each time you click Preview to apply a modification, the

scale is updated.
TIP: The Maximum intemal option is ignored when the top
o and bottom are available. lf only tops are available,
Techlog runs a check on the difference between them
and determines the maximum interval.

a lf the difference between tops is longer than the

maximum interval, the core length will be equal to the

o maximum interval. This prevents the core image from

being stretched between the two tops.

18. Click Load to the import buffer. The data is added to the
o import buffer. You can see the Daylight and UV datasets
under Well9. Notice the different references: MD for the
Daylight dataset and CDEPTH for the UV dataset.
o ,-ts lllg:l-lr qell!! l! vgqg-:, É
File: C\UsersVeinaudi\AppData\Local\Ter

o . Datasets

'1ÏIl,,.,nn,
o (uo
E,
Euv
o {. corPrH
E
o 19. Choose Wellg and click
browser.
t to import the data into the Project

o 20. Clear the content of the import buffer.

21. Close the import buffer.

a
o
O Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3
1ç
Data lmport and Export Schlumberger
o
7
Lesson XML File lmport
XML files are data files that have been previously processed and
o
exported in Techlog. This format contains all the additional
information that a variable can carry, including an associated
palette and well color.
o
There are two ways of importing xml files into Techlog. Method 1
uses the import commands on the menu, Method 2 uses a drag-
o
and-drop function.

Procedure 1 lmporting XML Files from the

O
[3 lmport Buffer
o
ln Method 1, you import an .xml file created in Techlog using the
import buffer.

1. Select Home > lmport I to open the import buffer. o

2. Select File(s) import from the drop-down menu.
File(s) import o
l3 Data import wrth wizard
3 Irrg.t import with wizard
i* seismic dâta import
o
El rechlog project import
Files import - Folders selection
-J
ÀÀ vultr well file rmport
/ Selective DLIS import
O
ô openSpirit project import

3.
@ CoreDB project import

Click Open ;- to choose the .xmlfile you wish to import. The

o
data you import are automatically loaded into the import
buffer. o
4. Choose the data and click S to import it into the Project

5.
browser.
Click Delete X to clear the contents of the import buffer.
O
6. Click Close () to close the import buffer.
o
o
76 ïechlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
O
a Schlumberger Data lmport and Export

Procedure 2 lmporting XML Files with a Drag-

o and-Drop OPeration rf
o ln Method 2, you import xml files using a drag-and-drop operation.

1. Drag your .xrnl file into the display area.

The files are parsed automatically in the import buffer,
e because .xml is the Techlog native format.
Techlog XML data file is the preferred format when

o exchanging data between Techlog users, because it

preserves all Techlog-specific settings (Families, History,
and Well Color).

o 2. Choose the data and click

Project browser.
S to import the data into the

3. Click Delete X to clear the contents of the import buffer.

O 4. Click Close (l) to close the import buffer.

O
o
I
o
o
o
a
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 77
Data lmport and Exporl Schlumberger

1
.û Exercise Loading LQC Data
ln this exercise, you import an .xml file created in Techlog
o
containing Log Quality Control (LQC) data.

1. Drag the XML files from the llechlog_21l3107 XML.xml

folder into the display area.
The LQC dataset for the five wells is now in the import buffer,

:r.F1*('llqp91! :tqI
File: C:\Users\f einaudi\AppData\toca\T€mp\T€
', Datesets
. A wellr
,üLec
tvo
tJ. sw-nn
tJ. cau
':1. crx
':ll cPnl-c
{1. orns
{. oePa
{1. oruo
q, ors-en
Ë racnsoq
f rLo
{" cauu
{. cavu-
{. HarwL
t{. t tEoR

f ruem-our
t'1. Neur

{. pERv-vr-os

{, pnn-our
+J. nr-oux
ql. sor.u
{. woss
{. vsn_rntal
Al w.tp
Al w.ls
Al w.ttq
fi wetE

78 Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013

o Schlumberger Data lmport and Export

Notice that wells have a color and variables have a history,

a as shown on the History tab of the Properties window.

Propcrtict =4x

o /;
oblect: Variable fl,'ÿell1.LQC.6atvllvl)

,'* Se(onclar) Parameters )

PropÉdi
o
.'alrte

Name 6AMM
Version number 1

Version status raw and hest

a Dataset
Sempling rate
LQC

0.s ft
Main famiÿ Gâmmâ Flây I

o Famiÿ
Fâmily veriable
Unrt
type
Gâmmâ Rây
cortinuous
GAPI
I

o Compatible list
Long list
Famiÿ unit gAPl
I
I

o oescription
Variable
Palette
ÿpe
copy of 6R sonic Aamma ra...
{, continuous
I

o , Last modrficetion
Date
Time
Thu D€c 15 2011
15:58:45

o .lnformâtion
Minimum value
Maximum value
0.08100000023841858
tx.t47æ49951r72

a Meen
Sandard deviation
Missing values
33.08919906616211
19.44608116149902
706

o Number of valueg
Total number of values
Source file
15555
16261
C:\Users\f lorent.bringe^De5,,.
Format float
- -:
2. Click inside the import buffer and select all the wells by

o 3.
pressing Ctrl + A.
lmport the data into the Project browser.
4. Clear the content of the import buffer.

o 5. Close the import buffer.

o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 20'1 3 79

Data lmport and Export Schlumberger
o
Lesson I Time Data
o
ln this lesson, you will learn how Techlog handles time data,
unlike previous exercises in which all references were Measured
Depth. Sometimes, you have to upload data with a different
reference, in this lesson, time data.
o
Techlog manages data with 16 significant figures (double
precision data). This allows it to support date-time data. A variable
o
is considered date-time data when its family is Date Time.

You can create a dataset with a reference in date-time by

following a simple workflow within the Project browser or the
a
Data editor. You also can import and save date-time data in a
Techlog project. Alldata processing tools (such as resampling,
combining, or resizing datasets and time shift) work with date{ime
o
data.

ln Techlog, a Date-time reference is stored as a number of

milliseconds, beginning on January 1 , 1900. For example,
o
December 21, 1983, 21.2611 is stored in the database as
2649878771116.07 ms. o
You can load these date-time formats into Techlog:
.
.
yyyy-MM-ddhh:mm:ss.zzz o
yyyy-MM-dd hh:mm:ss
.
.
yyyy/MM/dd-hh:mm:ss
yyyylMM/ddThh:mm:ss
a
. dd/MM/yyyy-hh:mm:ss
. dd/MM/yyyy hh:mm:ss O
. hh:mm:ss dd-MMM-yy
.
.
hh:mm:ss/dd-MMM-yyyy
hh:mm:ss.zzz
o
. hh:mm:ss.
To upload other formats, go to the lmport buffer Properties
a
window where you can add a specific date{ime format that is not
handled by default in Techlog. You must combine these
expressions to import specific date-time files. o
o
80 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumbêrger Data lmport and Expo(

Expressions to Create Date-Time Formats

o Hour without a leading zero (0 to 23 or 1 to 12 if AM/PM display)
hh Hour with a leading zero (00 to 23 or 01 to 1 2 if AM/PM display)

o HH
Hour without a leading zero (0 to 23, even with AM/PM display)
Hour with a leading zero (00 to 23, even with AM/PM display)

o Minute without a leading zero (0 to 59)

Minute with a leading zero (00 to 59)

a Second without a leading zero (0 to 59)

Second with a leading zero (00 to 59)
Millisecond without a leading zero (0 to 999)

o AP orA
Millisecond with a leading zero (000 to 999)
Use AM/PM display. AP will be replaced by either AM or PM

o apora Use am/pm display. ap will be replaced by either am or pm

o
O
o
o
a
o
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 81
Data lmport and Export Schlumberger
o
tâ Exercise 1 lmporting Time Data
a
ln this exercise, you upload a file containing time data (Figure 25).
The reference for this file is in milliseconds, a format that is
automatically recognized by Techlog. o
t
a
o
o
a
Figure 25 Time data in a file to be imported
o
6. Drag the file 1_Well9_DateTime.las from the
\Te c h I og_2 0 1 3 lExerclses I0 1 I m po rt E x e rc i se\O 5
folder into the display area.
Ti m e d ata o
7.
8.
lmport the data into the Project browser.
Clear the content of the import buffer.
O
o
o
o
o
82 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Data lmport and Export

9. Close the import buffer.

O The DateTime dataset is added to the Project browser.
Notice the reference, which is TIME with Date Time as the

o family and ms as the unit.

. À! wettg
El onreruu- Measured Depth Ft

o . Ei DateTime
nME
Date ïime
Date Tim€
ms

ms
( DENS Bulk Density GAPI

a (
(
(
DEPTH

DRHO-LWD
Measured Depth
Bulk Densiÿ Conection
FT

GAPI

GAMM Gamma Ray GAPI

o (
(
HDTH

NEUT
Hole Depth
Neutron Forosity
FT

vN
( Compressional Slowness GAPI

o
SONI

o
Exercise 2 lmporting Time Data with Time
Reference a
For this exercise, you upload a second file containing time data as

o a reference. lf you drag this file into Techlog, the file will be
uploaded as any ASCII file. However, in the Project browser, you
can see that the time reference has no family. lt will not load

o correctly.

Furthermore, in the Project browser, the reference appears to

have no family and no unit. This indicates that the time format has

o not been recognized by Techlog.

, E TimeData

a (. orrus
{. oepru
time
Bulk Densiÿ
Measured Depth
glca
ft

o {. oRuo_lwo
{. cluu
(. uorH
BulkDensityCorrection g/c3
Gamma Pay GAPI

o {. NEw
(. sont
Neutron Porosity vlv
Compressional Slorness US/F

o
o Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 83
Data lmport and Export Schlumberger
a
1. Open the file \Techlog_20l3lExercrses\01 lmporl
Exercisel0S Time datal2 Well9 TimeData.asc in a text
editor.
o
The first column is your time data. The format is not in the list
of recognized formats. You will need to enter this specific
format in the lmport buffer Properties window.
o
'J
.",T{ A B C D E F G H
o
I time D€NS DEPII{ DRHO-LWGAMM HDTH NEUT SONI
2 glcs ft Üca GAPI vlv
3 rÿ3dæil10:01 2.162107 10879.74 -0.03645 æ.9æ74 1679.74 0.22268 103.316
4 rU3o/æ120:02 2.3s863r 1Gæ.74 -o,o3szt 65.7§? læ79.74 0.228852 101.9412
5 1ÿ30/æ120:03 2.1791 lBæ.zl -0.03€[16 66.9537 10879.74 0.2æ2s2 lo3.æ33
Us/F

o
6 rÿ3o/æ120o4 2.369166 1(879.76 -o.o37sl 69.26622 rmæ.76 0.23949 102.8105
', tÿ3,'lml2otÉ Læ7271 tæ79.86 -O.03A7 66.75962 1OS79.86 0.2?0706 97.46492
8 U/30/2OU0:06 2,343674 r$9,.01 {.03849 69.21047 10880.01 0.218431 97.n823
9 ,'ÿ§læ.l:20i07 2.220379 l(Eg,.09 -{r.o42xt 64.55357 10880.0:} 0.231662 95.16951
o
ro 1ÿ30120120:08
ul.rÿ--t]ffiir"---l
12
i3
rr/30/ær2 o:10
10880.11 0.218345 104.893

t1.l30/2012 0: 108g).11 0.2bæ3 S.57557

U/30/20120:11 2.253087 10830.22 '0.05087 69.12749
IGBg).ll 0.2:X)712 102.3856
10880.22 0.22145 103.I399
o
14
15
-t6
1..
11/30/2c120:12 2.332875 10880.32 -0.05644 67.3s67
t1l30/20120:13 2.2107ù1 10880.36 -0.05709 61.99713
1l/30/20120:r4 2.150625 10990.36 0.0557 62.00942
t tr 2_Wellg_TimeData . t-
10880.32 0.2.t5462 96.3.t13
10ss0.16 0.22919s 101..rr69
10980.36 0.215098 r04.2952
r )
o
2. Select Home > lmport 9 to open the import buffer. o
3. ln the lmport buffer Properties window, enter the time date
format using the convention presented in Table 1 and shown
in this figure.
a
. ASCII import
Array creation policy
Automatic loading of ü€ lasl configuration of import wizard no
create an array if ne(essry o
Additional Date Time Iormat

4. Drag the file ^_Well9_TimeData.asc into the import buffer. o

5. ln the Data import wizard, change the well name to Well9.
6. Click Load to the import buffer.
The import buffer displays the content of the LAS file.
o
7. lmport the data into the Project browser.
8. Clear the content of the import buffer. o
9. Close the import buffer.
o
u ïechlog Fundarnentals, Version 20'13
o
o Schlumberger Dâta lmport and Export

The TimeDate dataset is added to the Project browser.

a Notice that the reference time is assigned to the Date Time
family with ms as a unit.

o , El TimeData

DENS
Date Tame

Bulk Density
ms

9/c3
(
o (
(
DEPTH
DRHO-LWD
GAMM
Measured Depth
Bulk Densiÿ Conection
Gamma Ray
ft
9/c3
GAPI
(
o (
(
HDTH
NEUT
SONI
Neutron Forosity
Compressional Slowness US/F

o Lesson 9 Well ldentification Solver:

o Data lmport under the Same
Name

o The Well ldentification Solver is a useful tool when the names of

two wells are not identical due to a typing error, naming
conventions, or other actions that lead to a name mismatch.
o Exercise 1 lmporting Data with the Same
Name
o ln this exercise, you import data from one well to another well.
This is a useful process when the names of two wells are not
o identical due to a typing error or other naming conventions.

You can import data under the same well by renaming each well

o or you can use the Well ldentification Solver.

1 . mport the file \Techlog_2O l3lExercises\O 1 I mport

I

Exercise\04 Well identification solveARUNl.las into the

o 2.
Project browser.
Remove the RUNI data from the import buffer.

o 3. Drag RUN2.las, RUN3./as, and RUN4.las into the import

buffer. Notice that the name of the well is slightly different for
each file.

O
O Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 85
Data lmport and Exporl Schlumberger a
4. ln the import buffer, click on the word Datasets and view the
import properties. The second tab, Well ldentification
Solver, is active by default.
o
5. Veriÿ that the Enabled property is set to yes.

Propêrtiê3 =x
o
Object lmport buftfrr
/ Pàràmeters O
[rport !,e[F ng
Enabted
Project well properÿ to link
lmport buffer well property to link
a
Optional mapping property
Numbêr of well(s)
Project well nâme
f
o
o
lrnport buffer well name
20 well20
well 20 welD0
well_20
well20
'--- All wells ---
welll
t o
wel12
Well3
wel14
wel19
o
On the left, there is a list of all wells in the import buffer; on
the right, there is a list of the wells that already exist in the
o
pOect.
6. Change the name of the well to Well2O to link the wells in the
buffer to the wells in the project.
o
7. Return to the import buffer and import
8. Clear the content of the import buffer.
the data.
o
9. Close the import buffer.
o
a
o
86 ïechlog Fundarnentah, Version 2013
o
 a Schlumberger Data lmport and Export

Lesson 10 Data Export

o Techlog export features allow you to export data to standard

o formats, or connect to an external database.

Procedure 1 Exporting Data

a ln this procedure, you export objects from the Project browser.

1. Click Project > Export t to open the export buffer.

o 2. From the drop-down list, select the format in which you wish
to export the data.

O . Format Las 2.0 (r.las)

Format Lâs 3.0 (i.las)

o GeologASCII format ('.dat)

Format TechCSV('.csv)
Format CSVe.csv)
Format CoTeDBCSV (*.csv)
Format DLIS (*.dlis)
O @ Techlog (r.xml) format
@ Techlog project format
lr OpenSpirit project

o 3. ln the Project browser, select the objects that to export and

click Ô.

o You can export wells with zone and depth limitations. This
feature is available only with LAS 2.0 and 3.0 and TechCSV
formats. You can set the limits on the Limits tab in the

o Properties window of the export buffer as shown in the figure.

ln the Properties window, you also can select the default null
values and create one or more .d/is files when exporting data

o from several wells.

\æ
&db*
a hæ§' ._!q1i.1!1-t§!!!

o
thutrr 919,q!o_
@--.-

l!üiltl
f,ùdü@k d@rkFBr(d-@a
MûdMF.ffi@ @F.,!@.(ilFrere

O v&*ryE.@6h
@rMdehræ.É,.

a
o Techlog Fundamentals, VeBion 20'13 87

\
Data lmport and Export schlumberger O

4. Click Save {al and browse for an export folder.

The data will be exported in the file format that you select. o
5. Click Delete X to clear the content of the export buffer.
6. Click CIose () to close the export buffer. o
tr' Exercise 1 Exporting Data
o
ln this exercise, you export the Caliper (CAL), Gamma ray
(GAMM), density (DENS), Neutron porosity (NEUT), and
Compressional slowness (SONI) data from the DATAFULL
dataset for the wells 1 ,2, 3, 4, and 9 that you loaded into your
o
project. However, you will export only ZoneD data.

1. Create a filter on the DATAFULL dataset.

o
2. Select the CALI, DENS, GAMM, NEUI and SONI variables

3.
and create a conditional selection.
Right-click and select Create a filter.
o
Project browscr
a
t -u '1- '"
rrÀ,@.Famity ;
Pro1ect C:\Techlog-Prqecterl
r Datasets
lUn,t i ^
o
. A weill
. E DAIATULL Measured Depth
{. Cau Cariper
tT
IN
a
{. oervs Butk Density G/c3
{. Cauu Gamma Ray
r1. UeUf
<[. SOtlt
Neutron porosity
GAPI
FRAC

Compressional Slowness US/F

o
' i[l wetl2

' A!
I DATAfULI Measured Deprh
wett3
FT o
E DafafULl Meàsured Depth
' Âl wett+
E OafAfull Measured Depth
FT

FT
o
' Al wettg
E OefefUU- Measured Deprh FT
O
4. Select Home > Export to open the export buffer.
o
ol
l

88 Ïechlog Fundamentals, Version 2013

o Schlumberger Data lmport and Export

5.
o You will export this data with an LAS 2.0 format.
Select Las 2.0 (-./as) from the drop-down menu in the export
buffer.

a 6. Select all the data from the Project browser and click
of the data is now in the Export buffer window.
*. All

7. Open the Properties window for the export buffer.

a 8. Export data from the Stratigraphic interval D only.

a. Open the LimiB tab.
b. For the Limitation parameter, select per zones.
O c. For the Zonation parameter, select STRATIGRAPHY.
d. For the Top zone parameter, select ZoneD.
o Properties ?x

Ob1ect: Export buffer

o /' Palameters
Parameter
o Conditionals€lection
Value
I

.l

Limitation per zone§

o Zonation
ïop zone
STRATIGRAPHY
ZoneD
Bottom zone

o Top zone delta

Bottom zone delta

0
0

O
o TIP: For the Limitation parameter, you also can select to
export only a selected interval. To export the interval,
enter the Top and Bottom for the interval to export.
U

o
c
o
o
O Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 89
Data lmport and Export Schlumberger
o
L Add a property so that data is exported from ZoneD only.
a Select DATAFULL from Well1. o
b Open the Properties window and right-click anywhere in
the Properties tab.
c. Select ''# Add a properÿ.
o
I
Propcrüc3
Ob]ect D.trsct (welll,DATAtuLL)
r x
o
t^

* Add a property*
I

O
X Delete this property
DLIS_FRAME_DIRECI(
DI.I5-FRAME_NAME DATATULL
DUS.FRAME SPACING 0.5
o
FIELD-NAME IIELD1
FILE{D
FILE-NUMBER
welll

FITE-SEI-NAMÊ WELL1
O
a
FILE.SET.NUMBER
FILE.TYPE
INDEX.TYPE
1

CUSTOMER
BOREHOLE.DEPTH
o
d. ln the Add a properÿ window, enter the values shown
the window. and click OK.
in o
., NOTE: Leave the Unit field empty.
o
@ aad a prcperty

o
Name: Interval Exported

Value:
Unit:
ZoneD
o
Description: Export was restricted to ZoneD
a
TIP: You can add a property to any well, dataset, or variable O
from the Project browser by applying the same
U method in the Properties window.
o
90 Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
O
o Schlumberger Data lmport and Exporl

The new property now can be seen in the Properties

o window. The modification has been made only for Well1.

o
o
o
o KB

PRODUCER-CODE
was restricted to ZoneD

o
10. Click Save {eJ.

o 11 . Choose to export one file per dataset using the automatic file
name WellName-DatasetName [LAS Certified].

o 12. Save the files on your desktop.

Techlog creates five files (one for each well).
13. Open lhe Welll_DATAFULL.IaS file and note the parameter

o lnterval Exported.

o
o I Weltr DATAFULI,|as
E Wel|2_DATAFULL.Ias

a t
n
r
Wellll
Well{
WelB
DATAFULL.Ias
DATAFULL.Ias

DATAFULL.IaS

O
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 91
Data lmport and Export Schlumberger

,. WÊll1 DATAFITLL.Iàs

IPÀRÀIEIER:f,IIG . INIT VIII]E ::E::R;:ii:li

sEr DÀÎÀtI,I.l
rII.E-ID ÿLII1
rI!A-MilBIR
rI!8-sEÎ-XIilBt3
0
n!Il1 O
rlrully_Call C.llp.!
PROIXTf,R.(ODE 999
l,,Eui I y_}lEtf lû.uthtr Porcrj.ry
90
lLFâd 1 y_DENS Bulk D.Éity
FIIE.IYPE c1r:ilca{ER
DLIS-FRÀIIE-DIRECIION . nufjltlrG
2010.1 (Rrlcnæ C.ldidâEe 5,
lLFd1y_GÀ[l G.D Rây
DII S_FRÀI{E-}IIHE DàTÀII'LI
1!8.ûi 1ÿ_SO8I CoeÉsrioûâl 3lmês!
ütr-sEÎ-r.lÀlrE IEI.L1
thu 0cÈ 13 2011-1E_0{_39
CCIPÀXY1
lLEùi1y_XD lhâ4lrd [).pià
IIIDfJ(.ÎYPE EOREEOI,E-DEPTT
S FNÀXE SPÀCIIG .
rrllD-trNrE EIEID1
ION-TIXE 20Lgt2l71 L7-6
PBOTX'CER-}IÀIIE 1êùsiâ
PROTX,CI 1êchlog

.uru u)G_rD i DESCRIPIIOII

.EI :
.û : ôeEity el1Dêr [51
.Ê/c3 , coçy of mo8 bult dêrsty [131
.GÀPI : coPY of GR .oDlc gâ@ tây [3]
.tÎ.àc : copy of IPEI æutm lbmlity 116l
.ûs/P : coDy of m roalc cqrËlrioErl [211

14. Remove the current filters and close the import buffer.

Review Questions
& . How can you load data from an Excel spreadsheet?
. Where can you fïnd the import properties?
. How can you obtain header information while loading a .d/ls
file?
. What does it mean when a variable appears in red?
. Can you export only a selected interval?

92 Techlog Fundarnentah, Version 201 3

O Data lmport and Export

Summary
o ln this module, you were introduced to the Well ldentification
Solver and learned about:
o . importing
. data files (.dfs, ./as)

o .
.
spreadsheet files (csv, fxf)
image files
. XML Techlog files.
O . exporting data from Techlog.

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
O
o
o
a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 o2
a
o
o
a
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o 3

O
)
o Schlumberger Variable l\,lanagement

o Module 3 Variable Management

o Variables are series of data (alphanumeric, scalar curves, or

vector arrays) arranged according to a chosen index or reference.
Upon import, each variable is assigned to a family using the

o Family assignment rules tool. Each family has its own display
properties, regardless of the variable name.

For example, any curve assigned to the Bulk Density family

o appears in a linear scale, using a red color between the limits of

1 .95 - 2.95 g/cm3. lf the curve has other units compatible with the

family's unit, an onthe-fly conversion is done and the display

a respects the same limits. ln this instance, the limits are between
1,950-2,950 Kg/M3.

o A/ias is a generic name for variables, but with an order of priority

that you can define.

o Learning Objectives
After completing this module, you will know how to:
s:
-.:
=:+

o .
.
edit the Families database
import and export families
.
o .
use the Family assignment rules tool
work with the Alias system.

o
o
o
o a
e"
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3
0Â
Variable l,|lanagement Schlumbergêr
o
I
Lesson Families Management
The family controls the display settings of all variables, regardless
o
of the variable name.
O
Famllies Database
To access the tools that allow you to change families in the
database, select the Data > Techdata > Families > Families
o
database (Figure 26).

F( üFamities - fd
o
Reference and
coordinates a
fl
Families database
Family assignment rules
Ctrl+Shift+q M

Ctrl+Shift+D U
o
C
Tg
Unknown unit - unit alias list

export (CSV format)

o
Figure 26
& Import (CSV format)

Menu to access the Families database

o
o
o
o
o
O
o
a
96 Techlog FundanEntals, Version 201 3
o
O Schlumberger Variable Management

Figure 27 shows the Families database window that lists all

o families in the database and the display settings for each family.

o IIITI I TTTIIITIIIII
:: I

O Èàiàà t
€
c

o E.g q §8 §q qa
o--rrir 6oÉr

a 6E q §" ary eq
Yd 6ô êOôO6€r

o EErE- RB
oN
8q
fid
q§
oirdir.

SE q Ee
Y - Bry
- O
qn
o ê O g 9 4..

:_

lr,t§ Er
àà
rEItrt
àààààà.E.s.E

a ti F
3
:
E
à
I
o {,g§
![u, §r
ii3*Ëürrà -
O iiËir iis§iiËiËr$$I

o !!r
I

$§;
o t˧
§§rg§§
o Figure 27 Families database window

o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 97

Variable Management Schlumberger
o
You can see two tabs in the window: Families and Edit Families.
The Families tab displays the settings (for example, unit, min-
max, scale, and line color) corresponding to each family. The Edit
a
Families tab allows you to change these settings at three levels:
User, Project, or Company. a
Procedure 1 Editing Family Settings
1. ln the Techlog main window, select Data > Techdata >
O
Families > Families database. The Families database
window opens. o
x{
Femili€s list:
?
ramitres g1trg;;1gl o
Main
Levels

a
fàmily

1 User
2 ProJect
^ lramily

o
I
Core Ane[,sis Routi... Oepth Mâtch Core Permeabilrÿ
Oens,ty
Company
4 Te(hlo9
Bulk Densûy
o
o
lcons in the upper left portion of this window provide these
functions. o
o
Add a family

X Delete a family

ÿ
?
Save your changes (validate properties modification)

Update the display

o
2. Choose the family to be edited. o
o
o
98 ïechlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3
o
o Schlumberger Variable l\ilanagement

3. Right-click and choose the level at which to edit the family,

a User, Project, or Company. The Edit families tab is activated.

o Edrt ianr|es

o Analysis special
Amlysis special
Amlysis Special
l-everett , (Arrey)

Pore Throat Radius

Pore volume (Array)
Distribdion (Ârray)
unitless
UM

96
0r1
0tr1
0

o
amlysis Speciâl RÊsistivity lndex (AEây) unrtless 1

Apparent Màtrix Density ÿcm3

Erine Dengity 9l.rB 0.5

ùc;;1 1.95
ll User

a ÿcm3 1.95

lDensity ÿcrg 4.75

:Oensity 9lcrt3 195
I Density

o 1
Density
o"ngty
Den5ity
Oensity squred
Fluid Densrty
Fluid Oen5ûy Contrast
ÿcnrê
ÿcfri3
9lcm3
1.95

Densrty Gas Densrty ÿm3 0

o ioensity
ioensity
j Oiaraet
Mud tihrate Density
oil
Bû
Oensity
Sue
ÿcï13
ÿ(m3
tn
05
0.5
6
câliper in 6

o
Diàm€ter
Diameter Caliper L in 6

o
o
a
o
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 99
Variable Management Schlumberger O
4. On the Edit families tab, select the family to edit and change
the settings in the Properties window. The display settings
available to modify for the family are shown in the figure.
NOTE: Bulk density is assigned these attributes
"T automatically: a linear scale from 1.95 to 2.95 g/cm3,
a red color, a continuous line type, and no wrap.

'"s Propcrtkr Çx

ll Ouject Mncrnonk list

Property lvatre 1-
iMiltl-iTily-.
Family
....Ps":itv-. ,

Bulk Density
Unit 9/cm3
Left/bottom limit CfechPlot) 1.95
Right/top limit C[echPlot) 2.95
Left/bottom limit (Cross plot) 3.0
Righvtop limit (Cross plot) 1.95

lr-
Scale linear
LogView color
_l
5. Click ÿ to save the changes.

Export and lmport Families

You can export the Families list to an Excel spreadsheet in *.csy
format, modify and add relevant information, then import the
revised list. Upon lmport, you are asked to define at which level
the revised list is to be saved: User, Project or Company
(Figure 28).

rl Famirres . t il til + ,l \, t
Detrendins
fl ramrries dâtabâse ctri+shrft+D M f"ïJ"",""t :#:îi :,ji
I
Iechdata+
ll ramily assignment rules ctrl+Shrft+D, u

ll unknown unit - unit alias list

frs eryort ICSV fonnat) '

)
. ! Export the family list..,
& trnport (CSV formâu ) '.
. ., Export the r"rily .rr,9nh+"nt rule hst...

riOure Ze Exporting the Families list in csv (Excet)format a

I

100 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013 O

o Schlumberger Variable l\ranagement

o Exercise 1 Editing Family Properties t'

ln this exercise, you edit the properties of the Gamma Ray family

1. Select Data > Techdata > Families > Families database to

O open the Families database.
2. ln the Families database window, scrollthrough lhe Families

o list and locate the Gamma Ray family.

TIP: Press a letter on the keyboard that matches the first
letter of the name you wish to locate. ln this instance,
o press G to go directly to this family.

3. Select the family Gamma Ray / Gamma Ray and view its

a display options in the Properties window.

The displayed properties have these values:
.
o .
LogView color: Black
Limits: 0 -150
. Baseline: 75 gAPl
o . Baseline fill: Yellow/Brown.

MD

o (ft)
1:2OO

o 7325

o Edit the display by right-clicking on the family and selecting

Edit the family > P§ect. The Edit Families tab opens.

o o

Families list:
|INE Edit families

o Mâin family
Flow Parameters
'ôamma Ray
Gamma Ray
-ltamity
Waler Flow Rale

_ôdmtRaÿ "
Gamma Ray (Aray)
Unit
bbr/d

^^Ol
Edit the ramily
ir"rin ]ua,

U*r
1Sn
]cross-ptot min

0
O

o Gamma Ray
Gamma Ray
Gamma Ray
6amma Pôy Cleôn
Gamma Ray Count
Gammâ Rây Cutoff
gApl

qAPl
Project
Compâny
150
O

O
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 20'13 101
Variable Management Schlumberger
o
Change these settings in the Properties window:
. LogView color: Green o
. Area fill type: None

Click ÿ to save and validate these modifications.

Notice that the modified items are now saved in the Project
o
7.
level.
Drag the variable into a LogView layout and view the revised
O
display.

itD
o
(ft)
l:25O
o
7325 o
o
7350

8. Repeat the process for the same family, but this time, modify
o
9.
the display properties at the User level by selecting Edit the
family > User and save your changes.
ln the Edit families window, click on one of the levels: User,
o
10.
Project, Company, or Techlog.
View the Properties window. The priority order for the
display settings is User first, then Project, then Company,
o
'
and then Techlog, as shown in the figure.

Properties =x
o
Il
P rop
oUjea: Mncmonic list

u:ql
e rty ivttr" o
I o
P ro]€ ct :6'
Compànl rtl'
Techlog l.És
Use the drsplài propertres '. É:
O
102 Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Variable Management

Rules Activation and Deactivation

O ln the Edit families window, you can activate or deactivate the
rules for any level. When you deactivate a level, you do not use

O the settings at that level. lnstead, you use the settings for the next
level down. Deactivating a specific level is useful when you need
to generate a report or other specific output.

o For example, a Gamma ray displayed with Techlog level settings

always appears with a baseline value of 75 for the area fill. lf you
have no need for the baseline, you can remove them it from the
o settings in the User level.

Because you can use your own display settings, identical data can

a be displayed in different ways. To maintain continuity, use Project

settings instead of your personal settings so that all plots in the
project are harmonized. The same logic follows for the Company

o level.

2
Exercise Creating a New Family 1
o You can create a new family at any level.

1. ln the Edit families tab, select one level: User, Project,

o Company, or Techlog.
2. Click Add
o 3. ln the Family build window, select the Main family, Family,
and Level in which to save the new family and click OK.

ll Family build

O
o
o TIP: Alternatively, you can add a new family to the
predefined list of Main families.

O 4. Go to the Properties window and define the display settings

for the new family.

a 5. Click / to validate and save the changes.

o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 103

Variable Management Schlumberger
o
6. Assign a curve to the new family.
Righlclick on a curve in the Project browser and assign it to
the new family using the contextual menu that appears.
o
7. Display the curve in a layout and verify that the settings are
correct.
o
Exercise 3 Using the Family Assignment O
Rules Tool

Upon import, variables are automatically assigned to specific

families. This is done on the fly according to the variable name
o
and unit by means of the Family Assignment Rules tool.

ln the dataset DATAFULL, some curves are not assigned to a

family. They appear in red. This means that the curve name did
o
not match the existing rules.

In this exercise, you use the Family Assignment Rules tool to

o
assign the variables C_PHl (Core Porosity) and CKK (Core
Permeability) to the correct families.

1. Select Data > Techdata > Families > Family assignment

o
2.
rules.
Thls opens the list of all the rules that were applied.
Use the Quick Search tool to focus on a family of interest. ln
o
this instance, view all the rules in the Core Porosity family.
o
O
o
o
o
o
104 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3
o
o Schlumberger Variable Management

t Notice that the variable C_PHl was not assigned

automatically to this family.

_:i

o
g
o
g

a rg
-o
I

o
@

oq
c
I
5r
ë-
(t
c ˧gEeEEtr
O 5
o
E.
o.

o .{
o
o
I

o ,o

fl,
o

o
_5
o-
o-

o --=
o
ôo
o o

o l/r à.à àà àà
à6666600
o()ooooo
o
qT ggSEg!L

8888888
oùorûrcr(l,(U
LLLLLgL
ooooooo
L, L.' IJ U !' L,, L,,

o
]\@OrÈCOOTO
dÉo\o\clioÈ
HH,\!tt!t=

o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 105
Variable lvtanagement schlumberger O
3. Create a new rule by choosing the list level in which the new
rule will be located in the drop-down menu. The default level
is All. Change the level to Project.
Notice that all of the rules disappear, because they all belong
to the Techlog level. Also, the icons that were grayed out are
now visible.
4. Click Add to create a new rule.
5. ln the Variable name and unit dialog box, define the values
shown in the figure.
Leave the Unit field set with an asterisk (.), so it can be a wild
card. This means the rule will be applied on only the variable
name but not its unit.

a iEi.in,.-*,-t*-.tt- - - -----
I Vain famiÿ Core Analysis Routine

, Famiÿ: Core Porosiÿ

itari"ut.' c_fr{
Unit
:

I 9K ,, çq.ql
6. Click OK.
7. Before applying the rule, test which variables will be affected
as a result of this new assignment rule.
a. Select lhe Test only option and click Apply to all
variables.
b. View the list of variables in the Output dock window.
8. When you are satisfied with the results, clear the Test only
option and apply the rule.
Notice that the color of the variable changes to yellow, which
indicates this rule is applied at the Project level.
9. Select the variable C_PHI in the Project browser. The
properties of this variable show that it is assigned to the Core
Porosity family.
ln the list of all rules that assign a curve, a new rule appears
that has priority above all other rules.

106 TechlogFundarnentals,Version2013
O
o Variable Manæement

o NOTE: lt is possible for two or more rules to contradict each

other. Should this be the case, the rule highest in the
list will be applied first.
o

O àc
o
o
ts
O
o

a Eg
ao

1f,
o
c

o 9
.!

o
, 5ËËgt*Ëïrr
a ào
o-

o o,
6g
o
o

o o
Ë
o-

a
z

o o
À
o

o
ààààààààà
o lt
ql
6660606U6
ooooooooo
888888888
SL!LgLLSL

(l,lU(Uo,o,oooo

o ooooooooo
LLLLgLELL

TJ(J(J(J(JL,IJ\,'\,,

a
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 107
Variable Management Schlumberger
a
10. Repeat Step 3 through Step 9 for the variable named CKK
and assign lt to:
. Main family. Core Analysis Routine
o
. Family. Core Permeability.
The family assignment rules list also can be exported to
o
Lesson
Excel, modified, and imported.

2 Aliases Management
a
A/rases are generic names of variables, with an order of priority
that you can deflne. The priority is defined according to the level of
o
the alias (User, Project, Company, or Techlog) as well as within
each level. o
Aliases Database
O
To access the Aliases database (Figure 29), select Data >
Techdata > Aliases > Alias database.
O
Fq. tl Fanri
-::'".ï::,i".
,. o,,.,",'- @ O
,t Aliases database Ctrl+Shift+D L

,,:i
Aliases inventory

Export the alias list (CSV format j...

Ctrl-Shift-D, A
a
Figure 29
.:r Import the alias list (CSV format)...

Accessing the Alias database

o
o
a
o
a
108 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Variable Man4ement

o This window displays a list of the alias databases in the Techlog

folder (Figure 30). From the Aliases database, you can take these
actions:

o ( Validate and save modifications

Add an alias from the selected level: User, Project, or
Company
O x Delete an alias from the selected level: User, Project, or
Company

o t
+
lncrease or decrease the priority of a variable

o
o Update the display

IL Aliases database x

o x(G*È

o Aliases list:
Alias
Levels
lFamity

l Well
o 2 User
3 Project

o 4 Compa...
5 ïechlog

O Figure 30 Alias list under the Techlog folder

o Exercise I Adding a New Alias

ln this exercise, you add a new alias in the Alias database.
t
o 1. Select Data > Techdata > Aliases > Alias database.
2. ln the Alias database window, select the Project level and

o click Add

o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3
'109
Variable Management Schlumbergêr
o
ln the Alias creation window, enter the values shown in the
figure and click OK.
a
o
Alias:
Main
Best_GR

family: Gamma Ray

o
Family: Gamma Ray
Level: ,- Project
o
OK Cancel
o
You now have a new alias.
Assign the variable names that will be used with this alias.
a. ln the Aliases database window, choose the Alias name
o
BEST_GR and click Add
b. Add these names to the list:
o
.
o
GR"
. GR_o*
. GR-R*
. GAM*

{. Aliases database x
o
Xÿ+9?
Aliases list:
:rtgfl o
Alias
Levels
l Well
ltamrty t^
a
,
2 User
3 Project
u EEST_GR Gamma Ray
o
o
BEST-GR

GR,
GR-R-
GR-O-
GAM,
o
o
1'10 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3
o
o Schlumberger Variable l\ranagement

5. Arrange the list in your preferred order of appearance (which

o also is the order of priority), with the highest prioriÿ at the
top of the list.

o x + a o

o Aliases list
iFamily
Levels

o
I

I| rw"rr
2 user
|. rn i".t
o I
1
, eEsr-en
u*-*
Gamma Ray

It- u**,
o I1 o*'
BEST GR

o I *u.
6. Click ÿ
to validate your modifications.

o 7. Select Plot > Multi-well > Histogram.

8. Use the alias BEST-GR by toggling ON Alias L and clicking

o Greate.

o
o
o
o 9. Select Wells 1 and 9 in the Project browser.
10. Create a filter and a conditional selection for the DATAFULL
datasets.

O 11. Create a second filter on the DATAFULL datasets.

O Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 111

Variable lllanagement Schlumberger
a
12.Drag the dataset into the Wells pane of the histogram
window.
Notice that the list of available variables corresponds to the
o
priority list you defined in the Alias database.
13. The
Click yes.
Variable interpolation window appears after Step 12. o
14. Open a second multi-well histogram. This time, choose the
Gamma Ray family and compare the results. o
The first figure shows a multi-well histogram using the
BEST_GR alias; the second figure shows a multi-well
histogram using the Gamma Ray family.
o
hsni ti,tg I
Histogram Save Open Edit Display -o
Datasets (2) (cAPI) Ê
. A
,
wettl
y E DATNFULL
l.lulti-well hiEtogram: BEST_GR
Filter:
100
!
.Lx * aesr-cR
eGR
GAMM
, Al 0.1 Ë
wettg c
. r E DnTaFULL ü
c
g

, Lf,,L BEST-GR l
E
e GR-RES !
o.os
GRPLl2O4 )
È
=

GRPLO497

GAMM

112 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3

a Variable Management

o , Al welll
l.tulti-well histogranr: Ganrmô Ray (GAPI)
Filter:

o ,MM DATAFULL
.IlGammaRay
.r"I GAMM

o . Al wetlg
,GR
o
o

. ulEl oAtaruLl g

o r l; I
!,GAMM
Gamma Ray
E
J
E
3

o " CR-RES

t
o
15. Remove the current filter.

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 113
Variable l\,lanagement Schlumberger
a
-fi Exercise 2 Using the Alias lnventory
o
The Aliases inventory window allows you to list all of the aliases
in the project. lf you need to create a dataset (for example, LQC)
that will contain the same set of curves for each selected well, you
can do it automatically using the Alias inventory window.
a
1. Select Data > Techdata > Aliases > Alias inventory.
The Quick data mining window opens and displays the
o
Alias inventory table.
r. ülrriiilirùiÉifl
*,, 'âJ GAu l';fl ';ï'l Dr GR
o
:m w.rrtlw"rt oEN f}floArArutrcR i',il'l FOR

5 te(.call .6
I werruiwerrz 7 rec.cart -8
X tuGaltrwell3 5 IQçCAU '7
(- wer4we[4 s GErs.t,
rec.oÉNs -s
IQ(.D€NS .6
IQCOENS -7
Lec.soNr
Lec.soNr
-6
-8
LOC.SONI -5
RUN4.soNI -n
DATAFULT.6R-m,
DAIAFUI.LGRSOIE
DATAruu.cR
ÿ5
.4
-4
ÿ6
DAIAfUITPHIT-ND
r.QqpHrl-Drrx
IQCPI{TI-DU(
LQqfi{T-OtJ(
o
*"ur,*"rn : I?'19.i11"!9LExbË<r*'cAll, -u r-ec.soNr -6 DATArurLGRpLl2o. '6 rQç.â{n-DU(
E
tr
DATATULLCÂU
DATATULLCAIF O]R
gararuu.carc--eo

,c
a
2. Click ![.. tne Aliases selection window opens. All of the
aliases that exist in the Project browser are listed in this
o
window.

Aliases sel«tion o
1(AA
2 (BEST-GR)
3 (CAll)
4 (CD€N)
o
a
5 (CKH)
6 (CKV)
7 (CPOR)
8 (DEN)
9 (DENC)
10 (DENSIY_POROSTM
11 (D6CR)
o
12 (DT)
13 (DT_SHEAR)
S/nselectedcolumns
o
o
Select all OK

3. Select the aliases to appear on the table and click OK. The
selected aliases are now displayed in the Quick data mining
table. Using this dialog box, you can create LQC datasets. o
Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
a Variable Management

3 Creating LQC Datasets

o Exercise

ln this exercise, you create a Log Quality Control (LQC) dataset

o using the Alias lnventory tool.

1. Select Data > Techdata > Aliases > Alias inventory. This
opens the tool and lists all the aliases that exist in the

o 2.
P§ect browser.
Click t[^ to include these aliases in the new dataset and click
oK.
o .
.GR
DEN

a .DT
. NEU

o 3.
NOTE: This step reduces the list to only these four aliases.

For each well, choose the curves to be included.

.o

o
o
o
o
o
O
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 115
Variable l\,lanagement Schlumberger

4. ln the Properties window, under Aliases inventory

selection, verify that the property Keep the original variable
name in the harmonized dataset is toggled to yes.

Propcrtic' =x
Object Aliàs6 inventory
Property

'rl",-:t-P-[tr-]9"{l'p-lry-
Display Aliases inventory
]v.ru" j^
..-...,i

!
o
Display Variables inventory no I
Display Families inventory no I
Display Properties inventory no
I
Display Variables without family inventory no I
Display Variables without unit inventory no
I
Display tamilies not present in the families database inventory no I
Display Wells inventory no I
Display Datasets inventory no I
Display Sampling rates inventory no
!
Display Zones inventory no I
Display Variables list no
!
Display Variables history no I
r Aliases inventory
Display the well name ve§
Hide the empty columns t10

Flide the candidates count column no

Keep the original variable name in the harmonized dataset yes

Display the variable associated to the alias family yes

5. ln the Aliases inventory, click the Build harmonized dataset

icon.

a
u7
rLill
Euild a harmonized
,."1 dataset.

Techlog Fundamentals, Version 20'13

O Schlumberger Variable Management

6.
o ln the Harmonized dataset creation window, enter the
information shown in the figure and click OK to create the
harmonized dataset.

a
o
o For each well, a new dataset is created in the Proiect

a browser using the selected curves.

, Aü welll
E oararuLl

o ,
Fn Inoex
B Lqc
El LQc-Atiases

o (MD
rl. ogtts
{' cn

o {. rusur
rl" sorvl

o Review Questions
. What is the difierence between families and aliases?

o .
.
What is the purpose of the Famity assignment rules tool?
Can you create new families?
.
o What is the use of having different levels of family assignment
rules (user, project, or company)?

o Summary
ln this module, you learned about:
.
o .
editing the Families database
importing and exporting families
. using the Famity assignment rules tool

o . working with aliases.

o Iechlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 117

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
a
o
I
o
a
o
o
o
o
o Schlumberger References Management

a Module 4 References Management

The Reference datasettool (Figure 31) creates correspondences
O between all the references of your well, such as Measured Depth,
Core Depth, True Vertical Depth, and Two-way time.

O The reference dataset is mandatory for these reasons:

. Easily switch between references in a LogView (from MD to

a .
.
TVDSS for example).
Display 2D trajectory or 3D view.
Use modules such as FPress, SHM, and Geophy in which a

o relationship between the various references available is

mandatory.

O F( f Famiries -
Reference and
coordinates - tL atiases -

o m
Rsfercncc d.tâtct
Create Index set.. Ctrl+Shift+D N

o q WD computation... Ctrl+Shift+D T

Coordinates mânagement
u
O *
Well coordinates converter
Well coordinates transformer

o Figure 31 Reference dataset tool

o Learning Objectives
After completing this module, you will know how to:

a . calculate deviation survey data, including TVD, TVDSS,

TVDBML,XandYOFFSETS
. create an lndex dataset with the Reference Dataset tool.
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 119
References Management Schlumberger
o
Lesson 1 !ndex Dataset
o
Within a single well, datasets can have different references, such
as Measured Depth, True Vertical Depth, and Two-way time. The
lndex dataset creates a correspondence table using the reference
of each dataset to link all datasets within a well together and to
o
plot all data irrespective of their sampling system.

Without the lndex, data cannot be displayed in 3D plots or in

o
modules such as Formation Pressure and Pore Pressure
Prediction.
Figure 32 illustrates the variety of depth measurements for both
o
onshore and offshore wells, including these important
measurements: o
KB
o
Kelly Bushing
TVD True Vertical Depth
WDBML True Vertical Depth Below Mudline
MD Measured Depth (Length of wellbore along path) O
TVDSS True Vertical Depth Sub-Sea measured from the KB.

Onshore Offshore
o
Elevltion KB = Elevation
o
Ground Level
ü

Water Depth
o
TVDBML rvDss o
a
32
Figure Well schematics with different depth measurements
o
o
120 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
a
o Schlumberger References Management

o Lesson 2 TVD Computation

The first step in creating the lndex dataset is to compute the true

o vertical depth (TVD) from the deviation survey. This application is

named TVD computation. lt uses a survey dataset to calculate
TVD, the offset of the well, and several additional references.

o The index reference dataset is built from the deepest to

shallowest values from all of the Measured Depth curyes in all of
the datasets. The lowest sampling rate from all of the datasets is
O used to build the MD curve for the index set (if a curve is set to
Ignore, it is ignored).

o Procedure 1 Computing Depth Measurements

tll
This procedure shows you how to compute TVD, TVDSS, and
a other measurements from a survey dataset.

1. Select Data > Techdata > Reference and coordinates >

o 2.
(l rVO computation.
ln the Data source selection window, choose the data
source to be used for Measured Depth, Hole Deviation, and

o Hole Azimuth.
NOTE: ln the !nput(s) (family, alias or variable) selection o
window, a white cell in the Data ÿpe assignment
o column indicates that this input is mandatory; a gray
cell indicates that the input is optional.

3. Click Create.
O 4. Drag the survey datasets into the Datasets side box.
5. lnput variables are selected according to the data source you
o 6.
chose. lf needed, adjust the variables selected.
ln the table, adjust the Elevation and Water Depth

o parameters. Leave the Method set to minimum curvature

and click Apply.
7. Click Yes to confirm that you want to create an lndex dataset

o For each well used as input, Techlog creates a dataset

named Tl_Wellpath that contains the TVD, TVDSS, Dog Leg
Severity, and an lndex dataset.

a
o Techlog Fundâmentals, Version 2013 121
References Management Schlumberger o
ffi Exercise 1 Running a TVD Computation and
Creatlng the lndex Dataset o
ln this exercise, you compute the TVD from deviation survey data
for the Wells 1 ,2,3, 4, and 9. You also will create the lndex
dataset.
o
1. Select Data > Techdata > Reference and coordinates >
q TVD computation. o
2. ln the Data ÿpe assignment window, choose which
mnemonics that you wish to use for Measured Depth, Hole
deviation, and Hole azimuth inputs (mandatory inputs).
o
3. Choose the appropriate families (Measured Depth, Hole
Deviation, and Hole Azimuth), as indicated in the figure, and
click Create. An empty True Vertical Depth window opens.
o
O
o
o
O
(Optional) lf the well is vertical, select the Verticalvell-without
survey oplion Measured Depth is the only mandatory input
a
for this option.
Create a Conditional selection to select all the surveys from
the Project browser (well surveys are present only for Wells
o
1,2,3,4, and 9).
o
O
o
Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
a Schlumberger References Management

6. Drag the deviation survey dataset from the Project browser

O into the left side of the True Vertical Depth window on the
Wells tab.

o (

Dûtdr
,A
Iru€v.nr@rD.plh

15)

w.nl
lllilll
I ltH
D,r.1.r L..àr ô.
SURVIY
tE"Ùon
un(
$ !i !
r,.,or"o.
oflrhor. '
.,.r.r o.Dt
!@
\ôl''
u.
tt
t

.! sunva zlw surytY â !i ' ofl5hor. - !m it

o . tl ||
. tl, I
. rl I
.MD

E
M..,ur.do.pth

norco*ia,on
HCUMflON
Hor.eimdh
rIre
; IH,
SUNTY
swÉY
swrY
oli
0 il
olu
-
,
-
oi8hor. -
ofllhor. '
l"r't.. ,
!m
lm
rmlt
it
ft

.M
O . Àl
, lll
.
w.n2
survrv
(1.
!N M.àlurcdDce(h
.MD

o
r 1l ll norr oarnn

A line for each well appears along with additional parameters.

The parameters are read directly from the well Properties

O window.
ln this example, Welll appears to have an elevation of 90
feet. Elevation, water depth, and other parameters are

o populated automatically if these parameters are present in

the well properties.
TIP: You can check these parameters in the well Properties
o window.

Because the five wells are offshore, enter 1, 0 0 0 f t in the

o l(ater Depth column and right-click to fill up or down.

8. Scroll across to the Method field on the right side of this
parameters line.

o 9. Use the drop-down options to change the method used to

calculate the TVD curve and sampling rate of the new
dataset.
o 10 Click Apply.
A confirmation dialog box appears, presenting the option to
automatically create an lndex dataset. Techlog can do this if
O a dataset does not exist in your well.

o
o
O Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 123
References Management Schlumberger
o
11. ln the confirmation dialog box, click No.
New datasets named TL_WellPath and lndex are created
under each well in the Project browser.
o
Each TL_WellPath dataset contains these properties:

MD Measured depth
o
BOREHOLE_
AZIMUTH
Hole azimuth
o
BOREHOLE-
DEVIATION
DL
Hole deviation

Dog Leg Severity

a
THL
TVD
True Horizontal Length
True Vertical Depth
o
TVDBML True Vertical Depth Below Mudline,
measured from the earth's surface a
TVDSS True Vertical Depth Sub-Sea measured

XOFFSET
from the KB
Offset in the X direction from the well
o
position, measured from sea level
YOFFSET Offset in the Y direction from the well
position.
o
TIP: You can modify the names
method.
in the properties of the
a
Eltt-wettPattr
t[ uo
Measured Depth
Measured Depth
ft
ft
a
(. SOREHOLE-NZMUTH
{. sonexoLr_DEVtATIoN
(. ot-
Hole Azimuth
Hole Deviation
dega
dega a
Dog Leg Severity dega/1O0ft
(. rul
(. wo
True Horizontal length
TrueVertical Depth
ft
ft
o
(. woeirl ft
o
True Vertical Depth Below ...
(. woss True Vertical Depth Sub Sea ft
(. xorrsEr X Offset ft
(. Yorrsrr
I
Y Offset ft
o
Techlog FundanEntals, Version 201 3
o
o Schlumberger Referenæs Management

12. Check your results:

a. Select Data > Techdata > Data editor.
b. Drag the Tl_WellPath dataset into a Data editor window.

uo leonrxotr-azuuTH BoREHoTE-DEItarIoN Dt THt i rvo lwoBMt rvoss lxorrss vorrsrr] -

5sx,sl 5926.9 11 t9t 0.11816 02ra9 8.52 S5É.4 4§.a 9]6A I .r8(x 6.2831
sszi 1 st z1 J,a3 0.L1tt2 0,21119 8,521 55É9 AXg r*9 13812 6.2845
ss27.s1 ssn.t 26.786 o.tlrs o,2rt49 B,9a 5521t u31.a $rt t3819 6.289
s528 I 5ru É427 otrrlB o,znag 23.52a t'ns $r9 ÿ379 !3825 6,2E73
5s28,sl 5528.9 6M 0,77û1 oàtla9 23.56 t5aA 1{16.4 5,138I lJ&r2 6.2886
55æ I 55æ 25,103 o.t7627 02n$ B,tn 552a9 s38.9 5{389 !3E39 6,29
5529.51 5529.5 25339 o.tr5Er 0:37a9 B,sD SS29A U§,a 5r-19t t3Ea6 6.æ14
s5r I Itn 24913 0t7sa o.2ra9 23.8 55299 {19§ 51199 1852 6.2928
5530.51 5rr.5 24ffi 0.1751 05749 23.t32 55 nr {,O,a saao.. 1389 6.2912
59lr I r5r1 2a231 0J7a73 023il9 23,9a 59X9 1440.9 t4409 1J865 6.æ56
55i1.51 55x.5 233É6 Ol71f6 O.Zttag z,.535 rtita arlll.a 5aall lJE71 6,47
35J2 | 5t 2 at. otra 0.23749 23,rÿ, 95:rl9 lrlarg ila19 lJBu 5.æ84
55i2.51 5532.5 23.t4 0JB9 0.Aa9 A.B 5B2t 92,1 ,4121 1J883 6.29S
55rr | 5513 22.145 0.1733 0.Xt119 E.5a 55t29 ..129 136E9 5J011
55lr.5l r$i.s 22§9 o.112!x 023119 23.91 5r33A U3t t413t'1129 r38r5 5.1025
5sx | 59x 2l.gr| 0J7É3 0.Ana9 23,513 55119 s,139 t4439 l.æ01 63)39
r534.9l srx.s 21Stt 077,31 0,ma9 8,5aa srrla 4111 ÿ41.a 1"106 5,!53
5Bi | 9515 zl23 0172 0.23719 23.5a6 55319 449 ,Â49 13a12 53067
5sl5.rl r53r.5 ma18 0J7t69 0.217a9 8.97 9533A 41Sl lJ)17 6JBl
55r I s5r6 n& ot7r,, 0zna9 23.541 55359 «s9 51453 'r{SA 13922 5J0!r5
ss%,51 rs,5.t 20o79 0t711 02ra9 29.55 55Ir 446.a ta46A 13928 63109
5si7 | 55, 19.6â3 0.17æ1 0,237a9 23.552 55-9 s469 9{6.9 13933 6,3123
s537,5l s5r.5 1930t 0.1æ53 02ra9 B.5B 5517A 471 ÿ1lt 13|)38 63137
s5r I 9tx 1891? $fion o.zn$ 21.555 51I,9 a4.l19 lJ9al 63151
ss38.sl 55r.t 8.5n '1/19
0J.m01 0zrt9 23.556 5$ar {a8.a 5a48r tê1l 63Læ
ss, ] 9s,9 1813t 0.16015 0rrrl9 23.t58 trB.g alt8.9 5,1489 13t52 6,!18
55r.51 5sr.5 11.143 0r6Ds1 rr2ra9 28.59 55ær UgI WA 1357 631s
ss I srao 1735 otetn o.ar$ 23.561 5s9 u9.9 w9 r3r1 632ü
si4o.sl iso.5 16955 0r8$a 02ra9 8.52 {50,a 5{50r t§5 63n2
r.r, I ,t, 'ÿr'Jt s509 54509 tJ,)l 532fi
016882 057t9 23.551 55a09
:-:1i?

Lesson 3 lndex Dataset Creation

The lndex dataset creates a correspondence table using the
reference depth of each dataset. This step is necessary to link all
datasets within a well. Without an lndex dataset, you cannot
display items in 3D, display 2D plots according to various
references, or work with specific modules.

As you saw in the previous exercise (in Lesson 2;, you have the
option to automatically create the lndex dataset after your TVD
computation.

To work with all Techlog modules or to use simple tools such as

LogView efflciently, you must have an lndex dataset. This lndex
dataset (also called a reference dataset) is a correspondence

Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 125

References Management schlumberger O
table between all of the references of your well, such as Measured
Depth, Core Depth, TVD, and Two-way time.

The lndex dataset automatically created during the TVD

computation does not include references like Core depth or
Two-way time.

TIP: Why is a WellPath dataset needed?

The lndex dataset is a correspondence table between all
the references of the well. This includes TVD, TVDSS, and
other information in the WellPath dataset, in addition to
non-depth related references, such as Two-way time
(TWT) and drilling date time.

,r', NOTE: To create a correspondence between two references,

both references must be present in the same set. This
also means that every time you import a new dataset in
a well, you will need to recreate the lndex dataset.

fi Exercise 1 Creating an lndex Dataset

1. Select Data > Techdata > Reference and coordinates >
t Create lndex set....
2. Drag one or more datasets into the Datasets navigation pane.
For this exercise, use Well1, Well2, Well3, Well4, and Well9.
, NOTE: All depth measurements appear in the corresponding
column.

i-l SURVÊy 4 lwerll A< MD [O - WE '

! srMrcuHy 5 wdll DAIÆutL MD P ' m-c' wN -
I IQC 6 W.lrl IL_Wdlàü MD UO - m ' ryN -
I OAIAIUIL 7 W!lr2 DAIAIUIL MD MO ' m - ù6 -
\.1 rL w.[Èh
E ]werr? sUryfY MD MO ,
. Ài w€il1 9 wdr2 sruTreu . MD p .
:J OATAFUTL rc WdI2 MKP DTPTH Og} ,
,- sURVEV II we,, tQ( MD rc . ryN,
lsrurreMpHv uwcn2 tw.ilhrh Mo MD , m r wDsi
i'i MIcp ù w.n3 DAT^tuL! MD MD - m-D ' N -
,l Le(

126 TæhlogFundamentals,Version2013
O
 Schlumberger References Management

3. For each dataset, choose the curves to use in the lndex

dataset (MD and DEPTH, in this case) and click Apply.
A new dataset named lndex is generated from this operation.
It comprises a// the depth variables from the datasets present
in a//wells used in the process.

Projcct browicr

.t 1: ' L] l:' ç

rrorect: D:\Docurnenls\Tech og-Pro ectt Farr, y Unit

, Datasets

' i[l weltl

. Al wett2
,' ÀI wettE
' AI wettl
,A wetle

'rAüe:!i*-.:- "-". :- -
, ffi olraruu- Measured Depth FT

. I Dayugtrt Measured Depth tÏ

Measured Depth
' !! Index ft
(uo Measured Depth ft
( goRExoulznturn Hole Azimuth dega
{. BoREHoLE-DEvIATIoN Hole Deviation dega
d coEPrx Core Depth FI
( rHl True Honzontal Length ft
(. wo True Vertical Depth ft

o {, rvogut
(. rvoss
( xorrsgT
True Vertical Depth Below Mudlin€ ft

True Vertical Depth Sub S€a

xoffset
ft
ft
(. vorrsgr Y Offset ft

4. The lndex correspondence table can be displayed and

o checked using the Data editor. Check your results by
dragging the lndex dataset into the Data editor window.

Review Questions
What are the mandatory inputs to calculate TVD?
What is the tie-in point?
ln which cases will you need an lndex dataset?

Iechlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 127

References Management
o
Summary
ln this module, you learned about:
o
.
.
calculating TVD using deviation survey data
creating an lndex dataset using the Reference Dataset tool.
O
o
O
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
128 Techlog FundanEntals, Version 2013
o
t
a
o
a
o
I
a
o
o
o
a
o
o
a
o
o
O
o Schlumberget LogView

O Module 5 LogView

a LogView is the Techlog tool that allows you to display any

variable present in the Project browser. The actions available in
LogView are classified by type. The actions available to you in the
dynamic toolbar depend on the object you select. The fixed
O toolbar and mouse mode always provide you with the same
actions.

o Learning Objectives

o After completing this module, you will know how to:

. configure the appearance of LogView
.
o .
create plots in a track
save and apply a layout.

o Lesson 1 LogView lnterface

LogView (Figure 33) can display any type of data, including log,
o zone, core image, seismic, array data, and core measurements.

@a"tlfl
o a- l
I lü
Cross-plot
ET
Line-plot

o Figure 33 LogView under the Plot tab

o
O
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 131
LogView Schlumberger
o
To display data, drag one or more variables from the Project
browser into a LogView window (Figure 34). The variables for
each family appear according to the parameters set in the
O
Families database. These settings can be viewed in the
Properties window. O

. llwsn GAMM
O
+---------------
. ElmrÆu o GAP! rso
Iuo
(
( ^rro
( ^r2o
MD
(ft)
1:12OO
I

l.
cAu
IN
I

o
r( ^1!o
L ^T60

f:ri^r$ .:
( Hr-x
( 6-0(
o
.d cm-(
lil o
I onH
(. ! rri
(

Lts
.
.t cnac2

( D€r{s
,,r.
o
.( m-9
( o€rR
(.m
<. oom-rm
<. on
o
(tru
(, ctru
Ê tralr
I halsr..
È Hcsoa
o
\. '--.1;.,,i,. ir. !. --'...,i1., i,.
o
Figure 34 Drag variables from the Project browser into the
LogView window o
TIP: lf you do not see the menu bar in your log header, click -
under the Help icon O on the top right corner of the log. o
o
o
tJt Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 O
o Schlumberger LogView

o W.,,9 \æRMôr Ê.r9,

3

LAYour Ll Techlog )
o -
'xYr'!ifi'tf,rÆ1,
.Æw!{r/ I'^rx.,
ii,er.s.

lHl: fd9
wele
rlnrr"-lltxrlrl

, J,:/îTï )
] +
I

o
,,1
15.. r'atrral
A n-b eÈ-
ÿ n.-n (*-æ
l.Éêtæ
æ'
rt

o --
L-------5!3-l
1., l- 16 I

O
i

a ü
;

I/
I
o :l
. zoncD
'Iata.lo

o I
qt<tZd6fd

o Figure 35 Menu bars in LogView

I Mouse mode
o 2 Dynamic toolbar (Common actions)
3 Menu bar
o 4 Layout header
5 Wellheader
o 6 Variables header
7 Data display
o
o
a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 133
LogView Schlumberger
o
Table 2: Toolbar Common Functionalities o
Object selection

lnteractive selection o
lnteractive eraser

Zoom o
Hand move

Graphical variable modification

o
Graphical variable modification: Graphically edit the
log values.
Graphical modification of one variable with a constant
o
value
Graphical modification of one value: Horizontally shift
o
one log value.
Horizontal shifting of one variable: Horizontally shift all
log values.
o
Annotation creation

Quick zone creation

o
Advanced zone creation

Edit the zones

o
Create markers over LogView

Split/Merge variables
o
Depth interaction: lnserts a depth interaction baseline

Custom regression creation

a
Display the values

Display the position lines

o
Vertical adjustment

Horizontal adjustment
o
o
134 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger LogView

Table 2: Toolbar Common Functionalities

o Global adjustment: Adjusts the LogView display
horizontally.

o Automatic horizontal adjustment: Allows you to adjust the

LogView display horizontally and lock this adjustment.
When activated, horizontal scroll bar and zoom functions

o are disabled.

Only depth navigation is allowed.

o 1:1 return to scale 1 display

ln addition to changing the curve color and thickness, tabs in the

Properties window (select an object and press F4) allow you to
O change properties such as the scale of the plot, the datum, and
the reference depth.

o NOTE: Keep in mind that every object has its own properties
that you can modify from the Properties window
(Figure 36).
o

o
o
o
o
o
o
O
o
o Techlog Fundamentals. Version 201 3 135
LogView Schlumberger
o
o
,,rÏ o
o
o
o
O
o
o
o
=
o
§

:=
=É

e
0
o
Eo
e
!-i
ll r .
t
:: . ! : l -i
!
--rl
o
O
o
o-
illclill
?

windows for a few LogView

o
Ordinary track, Variable,
o
136 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3
o
o Schlumberger LogView

The zoom and scale settings are managed with the mouse:
o . To change the layout scale, hold the Ctrl key and move the
scroll wheel.

a . To zoom in and out, move the mouse up or down while

holding down the scroll wheel. lf your mouse does not have a
scroll wheel, hold down the Alt key and the left mouse button

o .
while moving the mouse up or down.
To change the track zoom factor, select a track and press Ctrl
while moving the scroll wheel.

o To improve a layout, many options are available in the LogView

Properties window, the Variable Properties, and LogView
toolbars. (Refer to the user guide for more information.)
O Variable Gives you access to variables from a
management dataset according to a family or alias.

o There are four types of variables.

. Variable management: Displays all
variables from the current well with the
O exact variable name. The variable of
the equivalent dataset with the same

o name in the selected wells are

searched (for example, LQC for the
template well and LQC for the well
where the template is applied).
O ln the wells, if the dataset does not
exist or has a different name, all the

o .
wells are checked to find a variable
with the same name.
Variable with wildcard

o management: Searches for the

variable with the same name
regardless of the dataset in the
selected wells. You can define an
O expression to enlarge the search on
the variable (for example, to allow a

o suffix on the variable).

o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 137
LogView Schlumberger
o
Depending on the expression you
entered, all the curves match this
expression (for example, the
o
expression NEUT. to find NEUT_1).
The default sorting is all the curves
from the exact set first, then all other
o
.
curves matching this expression from
outside this set. o
Family management: Displays the
first variable associated to the
template family in the new layout
regardless of the dataset name. Use
o
.
this level when there is only one
variable per family per well. a
Alias management: Displays the
alias with the higher level if you decide
on a hierarchy within the well. o
lf not, the first alias that corresponds

Variable
to the template is selected.
Allows you to change the appearance of
o
appearance the variables.

Choose the variables (they then will appear

in red) and go to the Properties window to
o
adjust the parameters: horizontal and
vertical axes limits, variable position,
boundaries, curve color, line thickness,
o
Repeated
variable display
unit, and connection type.
Displays the same variable in a track
multiple times, which is particularly useful
a
to simulate seismic traces with a repeated
display of synthetic logs. o
Wrap display Displays the values of a variable not visible

Text mode
in a track.
Displays text values of a variable in a track.
o
o
o
138 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger LogView

o Multiple variable
appearance
modification
Applies a modification to multiple variables
at the same time. These properties can be
modified simultaneously: Color, Font, Type,

o Thickness, Connection, Marker (type and

size), Scale, and Type of Limits
(Mnemonic, User, and Variable).

o Reverse variable
boundaries
I nverts variable boundaries.

Variable filling lnserts a color filling between a variable

o and shading and its right or left limit; inserts shading

between the two curves.
Baseline Modifies track appearance.
O Adjust the zoom factor, display or do not
display zones, modify the background color

o of the track and its width, insert a track

name in the header, adjust the number of
vertical lines, select the color and thickness

o Grid increment
of vertical lines and their scale (linear or
logarithmic).
As many as three grids can be displayed in
modification a track: the main reference grid, a
O secondary grid, and a tertiary grid.
Each has a user-defined increment that
o allows you to capture a greater or lesser
amount of detail from the variables
displayed.

o Save layout and

layout properties
Saves a LogView layout and its properties
and retrieves it later. Saved layouts are

o Apply layoutand
stored in the Project browser under
Layouts.
Allows you to use a layout set up in
properties to LogView for a particular well as a model for
O other datasets/
wells
other wells.

The new wells will display the same

o variables, all of which create a display

using the same settings as those of the
original layout.

o
O Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 139
LogView Schlumberser O
2
Lesson LogView Plots
o
ln this lesson, you will build the LogView plot (Figure 37) using a
variety of tools available in Techlog. This is a self-guided
exercise, so only the first track will be described to you in a step-
by-step manner.
a
For the others, you will refer to the procedure for each track and
create the information required in the track by working through the
o
exercises.

You will begin by building a simple track. You will learn about
other tools in Techlog as you build and modiÿ tracks to create a
o
complex LogView plot.

As you build the full LogView plot, you will learn how to use these
o
controls to display information in LogView plot tracks:
.
.
Display log data in a track.
Check and change variables.
o
.
.
Change horizontal scales.
Modiÿ the palette.
o
.
.
.
Create a new reference.
Create zones. o
Create a dataset for all data in your LogView plot.
NOTE: You will apply this layout to other wells in a later
exercise, so you must build it accurately.
o
o
o
O
O
o
140 Techlog FundanEntals, Version 201 3
o
o LogView

o Callper
Gâmma Ray
Sonlc
Resistlvitÿ
oenslty /
Poroslty
shale Facles
volume I

o o.2w2@
a
u

S-tu1€(rc)

O -t"
o
-,--:::]
eft rol
mt

O Rel.rcfte
(rr)
1:48O
4OWF{ 2 W
^Tto
-o.25 ctc3
______r!g______J
2m o..s
I
FBc .0. ts
ffisl
o.z5
|

I
*t J"l *

O
o
o
o
o
o Figure 37 Example of a LogView plot that you will create

o
o
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals. Version 201 3 141
LogView Schlumberger
a
Track Data
The first step in creating your LogView plot is to add log data.
o
Exercise t helps you to add log data to Trackl , then you can add
additional tracks and data to the plot.
o
1 Inserting aTrack
r3
Procedure
ln this procedure, you will learn how to add, move, and delete a
o
track.
1. On the lnsert menu, select the type of track to add. a
Depending on the type of data you will display, you can
choose from Normal track, Reference track, Array creation
track, or Zonation track. o
2. Hover the mouse over the right border of a track to resize it
until the double-sided arrow icon appears.
TIP: Enter a fixed Track size valuein the track Properties
o
3. To move
window under the Trackwidth option.

a track, select it and press the left or right arrow on

o
your keyboard. When a track is selected, it appears with a
light red background color.
a
,""1 Fï' o
a
TIP: To move a variable, use the same principle: select a
variable and move it with the left or the right arrow of
o
your keyboard.

4. To delete a track, select the track and click Delete. a

TIP: To delete a variable, select the variable and click
Delete.
o
o
142 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger LogView

1
o Exercise Displaying Caliper Gamma Ray
Sonic Data in Track I

o ln this exercise, you create Track 1 in your LogView.

1. Open LogView by selecting Plot > LogView.

2. Choose the DATAFULL dataset for Well9 and create a filter
o 3.
on it.
Choose the variable CALI from DATAFULL.

o 4.
5.
Drag CALI into the LogView window.
Hold down the Ctrl key and choose GAMM, SONI, and
BS-DK.

a 6.
7 .
Drag them into the CALI track.
Zoom in and out by pushing on the scroll wheel and moving
the mouse up or down.
o 8. Stretch and squeeze the LogView image by holding down
the Ctrl key, pushing on the scroll wheel, and moving the

o 9.
mouse.
Select the SONI curve by clicking on it (you can select the
curve in the track or in the variable header). Notice that when

o the curve is highlighted, it turns red with dashed lines.

10. Check the properties of the SONI curve in the Properties
window (F4).

a 11 . Change the color of the variable.

a. On the Display options tab in the Properties window,
click Color.
o b. Select a dark purple.
12. ln LogView, select the BS_DK and CALI curves.

o
O
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 20'1 3 143
LogView Schlumberger
o
13. ln the LogView menu, select lnsert >
Between the variables.
.
'
Area fill... > .

o
TIP: Rightclick and select lnsert area fill between the
variables.
o
o
_ çâ.u_.-
IN ià
q:9[
lrlD [' IN 16

10800
o
dlL !
EiEEI H"::,:**,h€vanab,e5
o
ii { F o
A bi-color area fill is inserted automatically between the two
selected variables.
o
14. ln the variable header, click on color fill and modify the colors
in the Properties window.
a. Scroll down to Bi-color and change the color by clicking on
o
the Color box.
b. Select the correct colors to have the washout in blue and
the mudcake in brown.
o
15. ln the Properties window, activate lhe Opaciÿ option.
o
o
o
o
O
144 Techbg Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger LogView

o 16. Enter Mudcake/trüashout in the Name property.

';
Propcrtlct
Object g-cobr.rca tlll (Mudcake/washc

o 6IN16 . (. variable
Activate

o SONI
IN 16

t !
Valæ
Display in th...
fill
Area
Name
4

yes

yes

a
o
It
1.. I rvge bi-color

L. , if Bt-cotor
Area fill both

o t-+-
tË
, Left
color

IE
O r
lir-
l:'
a I
Your first track is ready

o
o
o
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 145
LogView Schlumberger
O
17. Save the track as a Techlog template so you can use it in
another exercise.
a. Select the track.
o
b. Right-click on the track and select Ë Save the tracks as
a template....
o
o
'l lil
lil lr - m I lill
a
Ir
o
il r

@
* Oisplay as rell oveMfl
ÿ ÊditmarkeE
-1110(} t:'l
X oeme
clrr+c
o
.. Det

ltEt
Ili hd corcatmation-.
& Dap mctcrs.
o
{ 120(} a Boreholc shapc-.
ft tqmtru
tl wett shemalic.
F
o
--! I

Select Project as the level, enter

cALrpER_GAMMARÀy_soNrc as a name, and click OK
o
a
o
o
Llser Ai'
o
OK Carcel
O
'146
ïechlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
 Schlumberger LogView
,

a Your track is now saved in your Project browser under the

Tracks templab foUer.

. Tracks template

o ffi cauPen-caMMARAY-soNIC

o Variable Management
The template you are creating will be used for other wells.
However, some variables might have a different name.

o Notice that none of the datasets contains a variable named LLD,

except for Well9. However, Wellsl ,2,3, and 4 have the variable

o DEPR in DATAFULL, and both LLD and DEPR are assigned to

the Deep Resistivity family. This is where variable management
becomes important.

o NOTE: lf the variable you select is not found, its name appears
in the header as in the template, but the track is empty in
,
the layout. This is default mode.

o Procedure 2 Changing the Variable Management

Type in LogView
O
This procedure shows you how to select and apply the type of

o variable management for a track. There are four options:

. variable manogement
. vqriable manqgemenl with wildcard
o .
.
family mqnqgement
aliqs mqnagement.

o 1. Select the variable in the LogView layout.

2. ln the Properties window (F4), select the Limits tab.
o 3. Go to the Variable management field to change the Type
property value.

o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 147
LogView Schlumberger
O
7 Exercise 2 Checking the Variable Management
Type for Track2 o
ln preparation for the upcoming exercises, ensure that the
variables are set properly for Track 2 in the LogView plot. o
1. ln the LogView menu, select Insert > I
o
I Normal track to
add Track 2 for resistivity data.
2. Drag the variables LLD, LLS, and MEDR into track 2.
3. Select the LLD, LLS, and MEDR variables in the LogView

4.
layout.
Change the Type property to family for each variable.
o
o.2
LLD
OHMM 2000
a
MEDR
o.2 OHMM
LLS
2000
o
o
o.2 OHMM 2000
AI9O
o.2 OHMM 2000

a
AT6O
0.2 OHMM 2000
AT3O
o.2

ô.,
OHMM
AT2O
OHMM
2000

2000
o
lr10
ô., OHMM 2000 O
o
o
o
o
148 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger LogView

o Variable Scales
All variables have scales that you can modiÿ. The Horizontal axis
properties provide three types of limits for you to choose to control

o the variable scale.

. Family: Limits are read from family settings. You cannot

o .
customize them from the LogView plot.
Variable: The limits are defined from the minimum and
maximum values of the variable.

o . User: You can manually set the limits for the track scale.

Procedure 3 Changing the Horizontal Scale

o Family settings define default variable limits.
trl
o 1. Select the variable in the LogView layout.
2. ln the Properties window, open the Limits tab.
3. Go to Horizontal axis properties and select Variable or User.

o Exercise 3 Changing the Horizontal Scale for

Densiÿ and Porosity Log Data in IA
O Track 3

a 1.
2.
Add a normal track.
Drag these variables to add density and porosity log data to
the track:

o . C-PHI .
. PEF .
NEUT
DENS

o . DRHO
3. Modify the C_PHI scale to be compatible with the NEUT log.
o 4. Explore the PEF and DRHO variables Properties window to
create a partial track.

o 5. lnsert a yellow area filling between NEUT and DENS.

O
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 149
LogView Schlumberger
o
6. Save the track as a template.

Sand - Shàle (ND)

o
0.45
PEF
-0.15 o
o
10

0.25
NEUT
6:ï- ---- ---FRAë-- --- -:ô:ii

1.95
DENS
G/C3 2.95
O
o
t)r-Ë
O
i'fu*-
;g o
Palette Editor
You can use the Palettes dock window to:
o
.
.
select a palette
modiÿ boundaries and color dispersions (the boundaries
o
.
represent the limit values)
use the palette in layouts, crossplots (log-log, array-arÂy,
3D), spectrum analyzers, histograms (variable vs. array and
a
3D Vue).
Right-click on the drop-down menu to perform these tasks: o
U Save the current palette with the displayed boundaries
and cutoff. o
, Create a new palette.

X
n
Delete the current palette.

Edit the current palette.

a
O
150 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumbergêr LogView

a You also can open the Palette editor (Figure 38) to edit a palette
by double-clicking on the yellow star from the drop-down menu.

o -xl
"r{
oci
§h È
EE
o oaR
gI f
ui
E

V'

o ,.8è
EFë9
rËilrE
ët 6
I
c
,!
@
ii

o
..
üë§5: ü5 È
6
À
Ê

I
o
ût

o
o G
E
o
e
o t
o'

o a À
o
d
o qP
d

o q
o
Id
5IgËi !
{:;i; §,
. 'd6dG

a d
3
a
I
o

o e
ô
É,
o ;!I§:
o o
.t
o
R
d

o ê
o
o
a
o

o :D lEl I . l!o

o Figure 38 Palette editor

o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013

'15'1
LogView Schlumberger
o
The Palette tab displays information from the Palettes dock
window, including interval limit values, number of intervals, and
type of scale. The Palette editor allows you to customize the
o
palette by:
. defining boundaries and intervals o
. adding patterns and text
. customizing colors, palette, or interval gradient. o
4
[:1
Procedure Changing the Palette
When you drag the VSH_GR variable (or the FACIES04 variable)
o
into LogView, Techlog automatically assigns it the palette that is
defined by the Family variable. This procedure shows you how to
change this palette.
o
1. Ensure that the Palettes dock window is available in your
Techlog display. o
2. Drag the VSH_GR variable into a LogView layout.
3. Select Object Area
4.
fillwith baseline.
Go to the Palettes dock window.
o
,}\
5. From the Palette tab drop-down menu, select the palette to
use. Observe the results in the layout.
NOTE: Every predefined palette has a lower boundary value
a
6.
and an upper predeflned value.

Set the lower and upper limits to match your data range
o
Observe the results in the layout.
ll Prlcttc O
o
o
o
o
152 Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumbêrger LogView

4
o Exercise Modifying the Palette for Tracks 4
and 5

a ln this exercise, you use the Palettes dock window to modify the
palette for Tracks 4 and 5 of the LogView plot.

1. Add Tracks 4 and 5 to the LogView layout.

o 2. Drag the VSH_GR variable into the LogView layout.

3. ln the Palettes dock window, select the WBl256 palette.

o 4. Drag the FACIES04 variable into the LogView layout.

5. ln the Palettes dock window, select the FACIES_s palette.

o
O
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3
aF1
LogView Schlumberger
I
Reference Tracks
You can add a track to your layout and display a reference from
o
your lndex dataset (TVD, TVDSS, etc.).

Procedure 5 Displaying a New Reference Track

o
t3 On the same layout, you can display both the Measured Depth o
and the TVD, TVDSS, or any other reference previously
calculated and present in the lndex dataset.

1. lnsert a new reference track. Rightclick on the layout and

select lnsert > lUl Reference track.
o
2. Go to the Properties window of this reference track and
select the reference to appear in the track.
o
, lïl Reference mànagement
Reference
Unit
:

i
Default_Ref
Default-R€f
-l
t
o
. T Main reference gnd

Match the layout grid

Measured Depth
True Vertical
o
Core Depth
Use the reference of the layout
lr"f
True Vertical Depth Below Mudline
!otp!!ell-9nqth a
a Exercise 5 Greating a Reference Track for
Track 6
o
1.
2.
Add a Reference Track as Track 6 in your layout.
For Track 6, display a reference track with True Vertical
o
Depth Sub Sea (TVDSS).

TVDSS
o
1:

9800
(ft)
1000

+1
I
I
a
l
9825
I
i
I
I
o
9850

o
!
I
I

154 Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013

o
 LogView
a schtumberger

a Zones
You can designate zonations in your LogView layout. By default,
all the zones have the same color but it is possible to customize
o these colors.

Other options also are available by right-clicking on the Zonation

e dock window. The Display command allows you to display the

zones with an icon or a check box (Figure 39).

o
O
a
a
o
a Copy the zone table

tJ Save the zonation as...

a ll Zone family...

o -1
Display
Fitter
' Display checkboxs

Select all Ctrl*A

O Unselect all Ctrl*Shift.A

Figure 39 Display icons command for zones

o NOTE: Options are slightly different if you select one or several
zones before you righlclick.
.,

o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 155
LogView Schlumberger
a
6
t3
Procedure Creating a Zonation Track in
Layout
a
o
The zonation track allows you to insert and use zonation in a
layout. a
. Add a Zonation track for frack 7 in your layout. Go to the
o
1

layout and select lnsert > E I Zonation track.

TIP: Right-click in the layout and select El I lnsert a zonation

U track.

lf you are working with a layout displaying several wells, you

o
can insert a zonation track for each well by selecting lnsert >
Plus... > Ed Zonation track for each well.
The layout displays the newly inserted zonation track.
o
2. From the Zonation dock window drop-down menu, select
the zonation set to appear. The zonation track is updated
when you change selected zones or lhe zonation set.
o
El Zonation
Zonation:
a
o
STRATIGRAPHY

ZoneD
ZoneE
Zonet
ZorteS
o
Define the zone color:
a. Right-click in the Zonation dock window and select
o
3 Define zone color....

4.
b. Select a color and click OK.
Define a pattern:
o
a. Right-click in the Zonation dock window and select fu
Define zone pattern....
a
b. ln the Pattern selection window, pick the pattern for the
zone and click OK. O
c. After the pattern is defined, switch the display of the zone
to pattern mode by right-clicking in the Zonation dock
window and selecting Display the patterns. o
156 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3
O
a LogView

a 5. To assign zone colors automatically, right-click in the

Zonation dock window and select
definition.
{, Automatic zone color

a Exercise 6 Creating a Zonation Track in a

Layout for Track 7
o 1. lnsert a zonation track and display STRATIGRAPHY zonation
in color mode.

o 2.
3.
Define the zone colors (Automatic).
Explore the Zonation track properties to reproduce the
display.

o I
À
d

o (,

d.
o

o E zon ôcn
Zonatron:
STUTIGRAPHY
Zon€B

o
2oæC
Zôn€D
ZoneI
2onet
ZoneS

a
o
o
a
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 157
LogView Schlumbergêr
o
Dataset Created from LogView
After you create a layout in LogView, you can save a dataset that
o
contains all the variables that you displayed on the LogView
layout. This is useful if you are displaying data from different
datasets on the same layout.
a
Procedure 7 Creating a Dataset with A!! Data
Displayed on the Layout
o
13
The layout is now finished. Before saving it, create a dataset that
contains all of the variables displayed on the LogView layout.
o
1. ln the Edit menu, select.l
Copy
AII variables.

Ctrl+C
o
X Delete Del
o
€
Hc.dcr
Retoad all the generic variables F5

a
il
o
Refresh

Sêlc(Î
EE Layout Ctrl+Alt+P

II I
All variables:
nlt ttre tracs
Ctrl+L
Ctrl+T
o
lil Reference

Plus...
track Ctrl+Alt+R
c
tt Vertical header

ÿ Edit zones o
ÿ eoit marken

F!, Layout properties a

o
a
158 Techlog Fundanrentals, Version 201 3
o
o Schlumberger LogView

2.
o ln the Edit menu, select Harmonized dataset > Build a
harmonized dataset....
copy Ctrl+C

o X Detete Del

€ Reload all th€ generic variables F5

o Hcadcl
til Refresh

Sclcct

o m Layout
q. All vâriables:
lll Allthetrack
Ctrl+Alt+P
Ctrl+L
Ctrl+T

o l+ll Refereme tracks

Plus...
Ctrl+Alt+R

: Datâbas€ actions

o êl
[]]
Display properties

Harmonized dataset ..1 Build a harmonazed datas€L..

o /[ Revere the boundaries

§ Merge
(l shifting bas€ lin€
Ctrl+Alt+M
B Add variables into ân eristing hamonized dataset..

o §,

3.
[ayout propenies

Enter a name for the new dataset and click OK. The new

o dataset appears in the Project browser.

Exercise 7 Saving Variables from a Layout

o Vt
1. Create a dataset that contains all of the variables displayed
on the layout.

o 2. Save the data in LogView as a dataset named LQc 2.

a Name of the new dataset LaC-21

Reference family of the new dataæt: Measured Depth

a Sampling rate of the

Reference unit
ne\,v dataset:

ofthe new dataset ft ÿ

OK !"*q
a
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 20'13 159
 schlumbêrger
LogView
a
Lesson 3 Layout and Template
a
After setting a layout for a well, you can save the layout and apply
ln the Layoutwindow, select Save > Save as
lrfft:i.i"asets. O

5':::" ctr,*s a
Save

o
as...

m Save as a template,.. Ctrl+Shift+S

ffi Save as layout of Welll

Propcrtacs
rll Cunent.,,
a
Figure 40
ri.i Current properties as default

Saving a layout
o
The layout is saved to the Project browser under Layouts. You O
can retrieve a layout in the project at a later time. You can apply it
to datasets or wells in the same layout or to individual layouts.
tt
template saves only the content of a layout, whereas a
E
/ayouf saves specific variables and the complete display.
o
.À Exercise 1 Saving the Layout Created as a
Template O
ln this exercise, you save the layout you created in previous
exercises as a template that you can apply to other datasets, O
wells, or layouts.

1. In the LogView window, select Save > Save as a template....

2. Enter a name for the template: wELLg_suoRr. a
3. Select to save the template at the Project level.
4. Click OK. The template is now saved in the Project browser.
. Layouts
o
E wettg suoRt
a
160 TechbgFundamentals,Version2013
O
o Schlumbêrger LogView

1 Applying a Template to Other

o Procedure
Wells or Datasets tf
o 1. Double-click a template in the Project browser.
2. ln the Layout template window, select either Well template
or Dataset template.

o A Well template applies to multiple datasets; a Dataset

template applies to a single dataset.
3. Choose the datasets or wells to which the template applies.

o Exercise 2 Applying the Well9_SHORT tâ

o Template to Create Another
Template

o ln this exercise, you use the template that you saved previously to
create a new layout template.

1. Double-click on the Well9-SHORT template in the Project

O browser.
2. ln the Layout template window, select Dataset template.

o 3. From the Choose datasets to plot window, select the

4.
dataset Welll_DATAFULL and click OK.
Select Save > Save as layout of Welll.

o l,.ryout
H Save... Ctrl+S

El save as...
o 6 save ar a template.*
Save as layout of Welll
ctrl+Shift+S

o Propcrticr
tJ
(.{
Current...

Current properties as default

a 5. Enter a name for the layout: wELLI_sHoRT.

6. Select to save the template at the Project level.
o 7.
8.
Click OK.
Close the layout.

o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 '161
LogView Schlumberger
a
3
aîl Exercise Applying the Well9_SHORT
Template to other Datasets o
ln this exercise, you display the correlation for the five wells.

1. Double-click on the Well9_SHORT template in the Project

O
browser.
2. ln the Layout template window, select Dataset template. o
Do you want to apply the layout template
Project\tayouts\lllcll9_SHORT.xml as a
o
well template or as a dataset template?
o
3. From the Choose datasets to plot window, select the
DATAFUL datasets for Welll and click OK.
o
A LogView layout opens with the Welll data displayed.
4. Select Layout > Other datasets (in the same layout)....
o
-1
ir.I
Duplicate
Go to the reference... Ctrl+G
a
H
VUêll
Horizontal
o
I Apply a global reference limitation...

Ix Cancel the global reference limitation a

ut
a' Other datasets (in new individual layout)...
o
il
a
Other wells (in the same layout)...

Other wells (in new individual layout)...

a
o
,e.
Grab...

Print... o
a
tot Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger LogView

5.
o Select DATAFULL for Well2, Well3, Well4, and Well9.
The layout containing the five wells is now displayed in
LogView. (Wel19 is displayed at lower depths.)

O 6. Adjust the layout by clicking m anO È.

....
-:.-+-r:-+--r-
o
o H I

o -:,,

o
o
o
a
a
o
a
o
a
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 163
LogView Schlumberger
o
Several options are available for the multi-well layout (such
as Activate the well distance and Change the reference).
TIP: You can align the wells based on the top or bottom of
t
one selected zone. Click on the zone to align in the
zonation track. a
7. Select the Alignment criteria to use.

iâir= + ll lfl Il r fll

o
U
I

Save the track as a template.,,

o
Y
!
Edit zones
Edit markers o
copy
o
Ctrl +C

larie
Delete Del

o
8.
Bottom zone

Close the multi-well layout without saving it.

o
Lesson 4 More LogView Options
o
ln this lesson, you will continue to explore LogView functionalities
through practical exercises. These functions help you to further
o
define details in your layout.

The exercises in this lesson present these topics: o

.
.
Well schematics
Plots in log tracks such as histograms, crossplots, and plot
groups
a
.
.
Zonation shading
Volumetric variables
o
. Core images
. Well overview. a
164 Tæhlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger LogView

o As a starting point for the lesson, you need to reopen the

Wellg-SHORT layout. Through the exercises you will build the
layout shown in Figure 41.
t_
o ,.

i/â,.tu l'* I 1* U !J,r lrtlu Ë=l

FI

o
,: l

I r

o
o
o I tlllttrtl
nrtt!!!!!

o h

o ïli F

o F

o H
o :l
ii,l Êt
Fl
a H+l
HÊô
l

al

O l-, : i :
Edl
Ll
tl
i- _Lt

o Figure 4'l Layout to build from Well9-SHORT template

I

o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 165

LogView Schlumberger
o
I
EI
Procedure lnserting a Well Schematic
The Well schematic feature allows you to display well tools and
o
drilling action within every track type, even the reference track.

1. Select the track where to insert the well schematic. o

, NOTE: You can insert a normal track (lnsert > Normal
track) for a better display. lf nothing is selected, the
well schematic is inserted in the first track of the
o
layout.

2. Select to lnsert > !l Wel! schematic. o

3. ln the Well schematic dialog box, select the Type and other
parameters based on the type that you select.

l! Well schcmüc
o
Type:
Casing
o
Casing
ïop depth: (ft) I

i lubrng
lcrossover
hüËTEn
o
Inside diameter: Itrtateriat
lBreak
iBridgePlug
o
o
lCentralizer
Diameter unit:

in

o
4. Click Add.
o
a
o
a
tôo Techlog Fundamentals, Version 20'1 3
o
o Schlumberger LogView

Exercise lnserting a Well Schematic for

a 1

Track 3

o For Track 3, insert the casing (change its color) and display the
openhole intervals.

o Well schematic

Well schematic

o
o Casing ID: 11 in OD: 12 in

OpenHole OD:8.5 in
O
o
o
Plots in Tracks
o You can add histograms and crossplots for selected variables in
your layout tracks. Histograms display plotted information about a

o single variable.

You can add these types of histograms:

o Stand-alone
Histogram
Creates a histogram outside of the
LogView window.

a Histogram
track
in lnserts a histogram into a LogView
track between two defined depths (using
the Reference Top and Bottom
properties on the Limits tab of the
O Properties window).
You also can graphically modify the top

o and bottom of the histogram.

o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 167

LogView Schlumberger
o
til Histograms on Opens a window where you enter the
lllll depth intervals parameters to create histograms. )
ffi Histognms

Depth intervals (FT): 200.00 o

Top depft 10700

Bottom depth: 11500

OK
a
Histogram
zones
per Opens a window where you select the
Zonation dataset to create a histogram.
a
ffi Hirtogo-t
o
Please select one dataset:

o
o
Crossplots allow you to display graphical information in a track
about more than one variable. You can create these types of
o
crossplots in LogView:

Stand-alone
Cross-plot
Creates a crossplot outside of the
LogView window.
o
tr Gross-plot
in track
lnserts a crossplot into a LogView track
between two defined depths (using the
Reference Top and Bottom properties on
o
the Limits tab of the Properties window).
You also can graphically modify the top
and bottom of the crossplot.
o
E Cross-plot
on depth
Opens a window where you enter the
parameters to create these crossplots.
O
intervals
E Cross-plot
per zones
Opens a window where you can select the
Zonation dataset to use to create the
o
crossplot.
a
168 Tæhlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger LogView

When you insert plots on a depth interval or plots per zone,

a Techlog creates a plot group, which allows you to apply global
properties to all plots within the group.

o A group is locked by default, but you can unlock the group in the
Properties window. To unlock the group, select no lor lhe Lock
option (Figure 42).

o Properties =
q x

a l.! timits .ôl Appearance

O [I1 Display limits

Activate

o Figure 42
Histogram color

Option to lock and unlock a plot group

a ln a locked group, the display properties are gobalfor all displayed

plots from one group. ln an unlocked group, the display properties
of each plot can be set individually.

o You can copy and paste a group into a plot track, move it to a plot
track, or remove it from a track. For plot per zone and plot by depth
interval options, the plotted top and the bottom depths are
o different from the top and bottom of the plot itself.

You can modify the display limits in the Properties window to

o produce a correct display independently of the area delimited by

the plot. Figure 43 shows an example of a corrected group plot.

You can move and stretch the plot in this interval without changing
o the data. This option is activated automatically when you add plots
on a large interval; deactivate it by selecting the plot or plot group

a
o
a
o Tæhlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013 169
LogView
o
O
I
r
:
!
o
o
ç
Ê
-E
J" r
>È r
-E[' oÀ
{
o
-jà
o- â

o
o
o
o
o
a
o
a
€tg;iE
aêOôô

Figure 43
T., ...r,,
Gorrected plot group
. I o
After creating the plot, you can modify the top and bottom of each
plotted interval. a
170 ïæhlog Fundamentals, Version 20'1 3
o
o Schlumberger LogView

Procedure 2 Creating Plots in Tracks

o When you select one variable, you can add histograms in the
trl
o layout.

1. Select the variable to display on the histogram.

2. Go to the lnsert menu or right-click in the LogView display

o II L------JILU-T-
I o.as FRAC -0.15
,iPtl o*,
IDENS
o r':sô fô----GApi---1so Tr-rtærT
-=7 | -r:-
*É--
o } t€
*-s:--' I iÉ
| -i
{::
-i5-*
<=-_-
Iir Êr
*=:'

o lloooi .,-.i) +i,

IË
)1 ;IL
t_ i::,utJEm-l
II irmE
o i.-
Q
*
sav€ variable...

Display as well orervifl

o .-
, r Copy

X
Pr:ir
Deme
Ctrl+C
( ifl

Del
'V

o 11100 oF
l8 Oeptrstrittwinoæ
m Datâêditor

o Select the type of histogram plot to display.

o |,l, Standalone Histogram

m Histogram in track
a H Histograms on depth intervals
lE Histogram per zones.
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 171
LogView Schlumberger
O
Display a crossplot:
a. Select the variables to appear on the crossplot. Select the
X-axis variable and second the Y-axis variable.
o
TIP: You can select a third variable. The third variable
used as the color scale.
is
o
b. Go to the lnsert menu or right-click in the LogView
display. o
o
__J!E_UJ______
MO
FRAC -0.15
(FT) ___zE§______
1:5OO Glca 2.95
(':
*_{
I

11000-
r=..
:È--'
.AL §à::IiI (
I

I
I

L"ü
o
Em m EIEGi-li'l
(l
*
Sawvariable-.
Display as well owi*
o
X
: CoW

Detae
clrl +C

Del
o
o
'rt4 uerge Ctrl+Alt+ M

oD6
11100- !B oeptrsnitwinou
ffi Dataediror
-_-_-;- Ctrt D
+

*:ë
''?
--EÉ-,
--- o
--q.

c. Select the type of plot to display.

a
& Standalone crossplot o
E Crossplot in track

E
tr
Crossplot on depth intervals
Crossplot per zones
a
o
a
172 Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o LogView

Exercise 2 Creating Plots in Tracks 6 and 9

o ln this exercise, you insert plots into Tracks 6 and 9. (Refer to

o Figure 41.)

1. ln Track 6 insert a gamma ray histogram every 200 feet.

2. ln Track 9 insert a Neutron density crossplot per zone, using

o gamma ray as a color code.

,istograms group I
I
Group cross-plots
I
o
I

tu.&s_urm lUsJl
u.'oltt'l[41._ :fü
-olt -01 {!5 0 06 0t 0l! 02 02! 0l 0t5 0a I

o
@

o .3

o
s qM (qtl

o
21

a ocedure3 Displaying aVa riable as Text

Procedu
t1
o Thiss procedure
procer
LogView
;View track.
tr
shows you how to displi ay a variable as text in a

1. th variable into a normal tracl(.

Drag the

o 2. ln the Properties
P dock window, set the Activate option of the
Text mode parameter to yes.

a The variable display mode switches from curve display to

text. You can modifu the text display , settings from the
window.

o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 173
LogView Schlumberger
o
3
Exercise Displaying Variables as Text in
Track 10 o
ln this exercise, you display the Hole Azimuth and Hole Deviation
variables as text in Track 10. (Refer to Figure 41.) o
1. Drag the Hole Azimuth and Hole Deviation variables into a

2.
normal track.
Set both variables to Text mode.
o
o
II o
2s6.8

3.
[s7.6 |

Select Alignment > Horizontalto either left or right.

o
o
o
o
o
o
a
o
a
Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
I Schlumberger LogView

4 Hiding Zonation Shading in Tracks

O
Procedure

This procedure shows you how to hide the zonation shading for all
ri
the tracks or for only the track you select.
a 1. Select the LogView window.
2. Go to the Display options tab in the Properties window of

o the multi-well layout and set lhe Zonation > Area Fill >
Display property to no.

a E
Propertieg
OO.lect

[: Limlts A
=qx
Multi wcll layout (Well9-FULL9-2:0 lWell: v\
wetts

o lil
r!
Main reference
Disptay
tr

o *
.I
Cursor/Value
Zonation
Display typ€ b€low the grids

o Pagination durin..
r Arca fill
yes

o
Border zone

o
o 3. (Optional) Select to display the Zone border.
4. Display several Zonation datasets in the same layout:
o a. lnsert a Zonation track.
b. Go to the Display options tab of the Zonation

o Properties window and set the property Zonation

Cunent zones to no.
The current zonation corresponds to the zonation selected
>

o in the Zonation dock window. All of the zonation datasets

present in the well are now available for selection in the
Zonation dataset drop-down menu.

O
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 175
LogView Schlumberger
o
c. Select the zonation to appear in the track to display as
many zonation datasets as you wish in the layout. o
taD
(ft)
!
d
I
tr
É
o
l:2fl) E

Prcpcrü6
o
7475 E tnd(

a
Object Zonrtlon lzonationTrack)

o Appearance

i-
ar1 A wel Welll

o
I
o ,'\ zæm fætor 1
c i-t Size / Print
o
N It Header
.I Zomtion

Zomtion dataæt
Zore tamily
o
Display the exten-
Color mode
Width ot the colo... l()0 o
o
O
o
o
a
o
a
176 Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger LoSVien

O
Exercise 4 Displaying the STRATIGRAPHY
Zonation as Patterns in Track 10
ffi
o For this exercise, display the STRATIGRAPHY zonation patterns
in Track 10. (Refer to Figure 41.)

1. Assign pattern to each zone from the zonation dock window.

o 2. ln the zonation track, select to display patterns.

Properties ix

a STRATIGRAPHY
EI
Ë Appearance
I^
Property Value

o
1

À wett Wel19
s\ Zoom factor 1 I
i-r Size / Print

o ,I
lr|l Header
Zonation
Cunent zon€s I

o Z"* f"rily
STMI]GMPH\
A"; Nrr.
- no

o \
Color mode
Width of the color zone
Zones name

o ;- Top and bottom t:]

Procedure 5 Creating a Cumulative Track

o Array creation track is a track for cumulating ordinary variables.
E
You can display volumetric variables according to their
o contribution to the rock volume.

1. ln a LogView, select lnsert > Track > lf,l Array creation

o track.
An empty track with a pale orange background opens.
2. Drag the volumetric variable you want to display into the new
o track. You can drop variables one-by-one or several at the
same time.

O
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 177
LogView Schlumberger
o
3.
The upper display limits are automatically adjusted when
multiple variables are added:
Define the limits of the track or the accumulation of all the
o
4.
variables by setting the Horizontal axis value on the Limits
tab the Properties window for the track.
Delete variables directly by selecting them and clicking Delete.
o
5. Change the order of the variables in the array track by
clicking the up/down arrow keys.
o
6. Change the display colors/patterns by selecting a variable
and changing its color in the Properties window.
7. Change the orientation of the header display by setting the
a
8.
Header orientation option in the Display options tab of the
Properties window.
Save an accumulated variable:
o
a. Select the Array creation track.
b. From the Save menu, click H Save the variables as
o
array, or right-click and select H Save the variables as
afiay.
This action creates one array in the P§ect browser that
o
contains the accumulated values of all the ordinary
variables composing it. The variables are saved in the
same order they were placed in the original array.
o
o
o
o
a
o
o
178 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 201 3
o
l
o Schlumberger LogView

o Exercise 5 Creating a Cumulative Track in

Track 14
1

o For this exercise, create, save, and display an afiay in Track 14

1. Use these volumetric variables to create the cumulative

track:

o .
.
VX-CALCITE
VX-ILLITE
.
O .
VX-KAOLINITE
VX-QUARTZ.

o 2. Save the variables as an array.

o
o
o
o
o Procedure 6 Displaying Core lmages

o You can display core images in LogView in the same way as any
t3
other log, by dragging the images into LogView. (Refer to
Figure 41 , Tracks 15 and 16.)

o TIP: You can plot other logs directly on top of a photograph.

o To optimize the display, you will change the zoom factor in the
Properties window of the Core lmage track.
1. Select the track where the core images are displayed.
o 2. Drag the data into the track.

a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 20'13 179

LogView Schlumberger
o
Go to the Display options tab of the Properties window for
the normal track.
TIP: This is not the core image track.
a
e,
,,7
4. ln the Properties window, adjust the Zoom factor property.
NOTE: For large images, it may be necessary to use core
o
image display optlmization. Navigate lo Project >
Options > Parameters tab > Advanced... and select
the property \-bits display speed optimizationfor core
o
images.lmages are converted to 8-bit images to
improve the performance of Techlog. o
o
o
o
o
o
O
o
o
1 Zoom factor =1
2 Separation track
3 Zoom factor = 60
o
a
180 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
O Schlumberger LogView

6
o Exercise Displaying Core lmages in Track 16

For this exercise, display core images in Track 16.

o 1. lnsert the Daylight dataset into the layout.

2. Adjust the Zoom factor in the Properties window of the track.
3.
a lnsert a Separation track by selecting lnsert > Plus > Insert
separation track to the left or right of the Daylight dataset
track.

o Zoom factor:80.00

DayLight
o
o
o
o
o
o Procedure 7 Activating Well Overview

o Well overview is a widget embedded in LogView. lt allows you to

r3
navigate quickly along the borehole.

o 1. From the Display menu, select Well overview #.

2. Select a variable to appear in the well overview track.
TIP: You also can select a full track.
O
o
o Iechlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 181
LogView Schlumberger
o
3. Right-click on the variable to display and select Display as
well overview *. O
The well overview allows you to navigate along the well,

4.
moving it up and down or using the mouse wheel.
(Optional) Stretch it to change the LogView scale accordingly.
o
Exercise 7 Using a Wel! Overview in Track 17 o
1. lnsert a well overview display in Track 17 (see Figure
using the GAMM variable.
2. After creating the layout, save it as !{et I9 FULL.
40)
o
Lesson 5 Time Data Display o
Techlog manages data with 16 significant figures (double
precision data), which makes supporting date-time data possible.
O
You also can import and save date-time data in a Techlog project.

All data processing tools (resampling, combining or resizing a

dataset, time shift, and processing in LogView) work with time
o
data. Time data can be displayed in LogView in the same way as
any other dataset. o
1
Exercise Creating a LogView Plot with Time
Data o
ln this exercise, you load data from the DateTime dataset and
apply some smoothing on the data from LogView. o
1. Open an empty LogView layout.
2. ln the first track, display the gamma ray (GAMM) and the
Compressional slowness (SONI) variables.
o
You can either drag the GAMM variable and then the SONI
variable into the layout. Alternatively, you can use the track
templates saved in a previous exercise.
o
a. Drag the CALIPER_GAMMARAY_SONIC track template
into the empty LogView layout.
Techlog opens the Choose datasets to plot window.
o
O
182 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 201 3
o
o LogView

b. Select the Well9_DateTime dataset and click OK.

o
22 Dec 1981

19:50

o 20:00

o 20: 10

o The variables GAMM and SONI are now displayed as a

function of time in the Reference track.

o 3. ln the second track, display the Neutron porosity (NEUT) and

density (DENS) variables. As with the first track, either drag
the NEUT and DENS into a new track or drag the

o NeutronDensityTrack saved in a previous exercise into the

layout.
It often is convenient to display time data in the plot

o
4.
horizontally.
Select LogView > Layout > E Horizontal. The plot is now

o displayed horizontally.

o
o
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 183
LogView Schlumberger
o
5. Save the Layout as we119 TrME.

Lesson 6 Basic Processing in LogView

a
w ln Techlog, you can apply some basic processing on the
o
variables. The Processing menu allows you to open and apply
several processing tools using the current layout.

For example, use Median smooth from the Processing menu to

o
open a dialog box in which you set the parameters of the
smoothing algorithm. This is applied to prepare the data for an
upscaled model.
o
There are many tools available on the Processing menu:

Smoothing: i- Gaussian smooth...

o
Èr Smooth with missing values...
È. Median smooth...
o
Cleaning: ..r(
i
Outliners cleaning...
DesPike...
o
lnterpolation:
$
)
Data clipping
Linearinterpolation...
o
;
Otherc: tÀ
Spline...
lntegrate ... o
È
1
Derivative smoothing...
First last reading... o
f, Standardize (Normalization)
.\ Cumulate o
Compaction: (Several compaction equations available.)
il- Depth shifting (severaloptions are
available)
o
For more details on the individual methods and equations, refer to
the Techlog Help.
o
o
Tech@ Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
 schtumberger LogView
O
1
o Procedure Applying a Processing Method to
a Variable r3
o 1.
2.
Select one or more variables in LogView.
From the Processing menu, select a method.

o Exercise 1 Applying the Smoothing Function

to a DENS Variable
tÂ
o ln this exercise, you use lhe smoothing function. Use the dataset
Wellg_TIME template because most of the processing can be
applied with a time reference.

o 1.
2.
Open the Well9_TIME template.
Select the DENS variable.

O 3. ln the Processing menu, select È Gaussian smooth....

ÿ smttr
o Variable VUell9.DateTimG.DENS

5mooth window size (hh:mm:ss,zz): 00:00:30,000 . Time

using: . -,rrr i .; :i,-.i ,l

O Transformation '.

OK Cancel

o 4. ln the Smooth window that opens, define the size of the

sliding window. The higher the value, the smoother the curve

o because it takes more weighted points into account for the

calculation of the average.
Enter the smooth window size in milliseconds: 3000 0 and

o click OK.
A new variable named DENS_Smooth-30000ms- is added
on the NEUT/DENS track. By default, the results of the

o smoothing are displayed in the original variable track.

NOTE: The asterisk (-) indicates the variable is not saved. o

O 5. Add a new Ordinary track and move the

DENS Smooth 30000ms* variable to this track.

o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 185
LogView Schlumberger
o
6. Repeat Step 2 through Step 5 using different smoothing
window sizes: 60000ms and 3mn (180000ms). a
o
o
o
o
o
æ':o !fifr ,1:* ,l;l' iiii_ ,,,ï ïq, iiii 12,30
r2:1s o
7. The three newly created variables are not saved. Save the
variables. o
a. Select Save > uJ'Modified variables....
Layout Save Edit Display Insert
5 lryout
Advanced o
E
[J
:§
*
save...

Save as-.
Ctrl+S
o
M template...
E

z
ê
. ffi
s"r" as a

save as layout of wellg

ctrl+shift+s
o
É variables..
o
tvtoOitieO Ctrl+Alt+S
l.-
I Propcrücs
i!!
u loÿv cr""nt..
LulltrlL..
-1"

i:m-- U crrr"nt propertiesasdefault

o
o
186 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 20 1 3
o
o Schlumberger LogView

b. ln the Variable save window, select to save the variable

o with a suffix.

wc
ffi Variable

Save the variable DENS-Smooth-3dXDms

Save options

Save as new version of DENS

o Save with suffix

Overwrite the existing variable DENS

Save extension: _Smooth_30000ms

Apply to all OK
-çe!ggL-,

Select the three variables to be saved.

The three variables are saved in the DateTime dataset.

.E DateTime Date Time ms

r[ rme Date Time ms
(. oerus Bulk Densiÿ G/C3
(. OenS-srnoottr-18(X)00ms Eulk Densiÿ G/C3
(. oEtts-Srnoottr-:ooæms Bulk Densiÿ G/C3
(L DENs-srnoottr-60000ms Bulk Density G/C3
tL orPru Measured Depth FT

( onxo-t-wo Bulk Density Correction GlCl

( caun Gamma Ray GAPI
(. uoru Hole Depth FT

(. Nrw Neutron Forosity VN

( sou Compressional Slown... US/F

Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 187

LogView Schlumberger
O
Lesson 7 Header Editor
o
The Header editor is a tool that will help you create and edit
headers for LogView depth plots. You access the Header editor
by selecting Home > Techreport > ud Header editor. o
-t Exercise 1 Editing a Header in Techlog o
ln this exercise, you use the Header editor to edit a header.
'1
. lmport the file 14in Trailer.xml lrom O
Te c h I og_20 I 3 \Exerclses \0 I I m p o rt Ex e rc i s e\0 6 Heade r
Editorinlo Techlog.
The 14-inch header is stored in the Project browser. o
2. View the imported header by double-clicking on 14in Trailer
in the Project browser.

eswehtii
O
krûd tü
,].AE
. It / , \
irirT :

o
COMFANY

WELL
FIELD
COUNW
STAIE
E---_l o
COUNNY

rfl ib Dae ftoessed 6/21413

o
3. Notice that Techlog cannot find the picture to be displayed in
O
the header (notice the § icon).
Double-click the § icon. The lmage properties window
opens. The image displayed in the header should have the
o
name s/b_/ogo_bw.gif and be stored in lhe Company folder.
Because this image is not available, Techlog cannot display
it in the header. You will replace this image with another one.
o
o
o
188 Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger LogVieu/

4. ln the lmage properties window, select Customized in the

a Folder containing the picture drop-down list.

o
o
O
o 5. Click Browse. By default, the folder bin64in the Techlog
installation folder appears.

o 6. Navigate to the llechlo

click Select folder.
g In stall atio n F olde Ap ng folder a nd

7. Enter the full name of the image to be used (including the

o extension) into the Picture name (with extension) field. For

this exercise, enter Pro j ectNe\^rFinish. pnq and click OK.

o Picture information

o Folder containing the picture:

Picture name (with extension) NewFinish

o
8. ln the Header editor, click again on the image rectangle.

O §F-F _\F_

O 9. Select the image.

-

a
o
o Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 189
LogView Schlumberger
a
10. ln the Properties window, set Keep Proportions to no and
set Alignment to right. a
o
-5.96
o
t.24

4.97
o
9.63
no
o
O
o
Adjust the size of the image and its position. The image is
o
11.
now updated.

o
coM9AlrY
WELL
AELD
coMPAr{Yr

Wet
FIELDI
1
o
COUNTY:
SIAIE
COUNIRY
T6I WeI
CO
o
o
Ode Pro@ssed 6,21120'13

TIP: lf you wish to use another image or logo, import an

image by dragging it from your desktop or web browser
into the Header editor in Techlog.
o
I o
190 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
a Schlumberger LogView

o 12. Double-click on the box containing the text COMPANY... to

display the text box editor.

E rdb96a

O l-t
1
"***
te*tob.leccontent
J

o *î.It-"'

o '.
: %Well.COUNo/o
o/oWell.Stateo/o

o CaMel

o 13. You will add several other entries to the Header table.
Click Add a property
F{
.

o 14.ln the Property selection dialog box, set the Property level
to well and the Property name to X.

o § Propcrtyidcctirn

Properÿ level
General
O Y Well Auto (Well1)

Dataset

o
a Property name

Properÿ field

O Preview

a
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 191
LogView Schlumberger
o
15. You also can modify the Header dynamically. Modify the
Header to display EXACTLY the properties shown in the
figure.
o
q'ag
Ten

T€n
obj«
obrd
mme
content
?trl

"i
o
Arial

COMPANY:
.18-BrÙÉ===:!:
%Well.Companyo/o o
WELL:
FIELD:
COUNTRY:
X:
%Well.WELL-NAMEo/o
%Well.FlELD-NAMEo/o
%Well.CountryoÂ
p/owetl.xo6
o
o/oWell.Y%
Y:

o
O
F"
16. Click Add a propertyr .

17. ln the Property selection dialog box, set the Property level
to Dataset. Pick the dataset DATAFULL and the property
o
value KB. Click OK

§ ercp«tyrt«tio
o
Property level

/
General

Well
o
J Dataset

Variable -l o
Property name
O
Property field Vàlue

Preview %Wcll.Datai€tI DATAFULLI.KB%

OK Cancel
a
18. Click Add a property F' .
o
19. ln the
to Dataset.
Properÿ selection dialog box, set the Property level
o
192 Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger LogView

20. Pick the dataset DATAFULL and the property unit KB; click
o oK.
§ Propr.ty *lætiof,
o t Property level

General

o /
r'
Well

Dataset
Auto (Well1)

DATAFULL

Variable

o Property name KB

o Property field

Preview % [
Unit

UI.Wcll. D.trrctlDATAFU tL].KB%

o
Cancel

21 .Your Header should look like the figure. Save the header at the

o .
Project level and enter the name l4rn 'f rail-er edrt-ecl.
14,n Trailù:2
E
H"âd.rdho, Edt ,nrd kld;on

o
P'oFdi6

X â - r.!t \ f, r. r !,tjl, ( p
. Ii / r \

o COMPANY

WELL
FIELD,
COMPA''IY1

welll
FIELDl
co

o
COUI{TRY
x

Elevallat.
I
61æ
w?8
90{r
[m
Dà. fto63sêd 6212013

o L: 'i lor

22. Select Header editor > Save and enter a new name. The
O new header is added to the Project browser.
-
. Headers

o ffil
ffi
14in Traiter
r+in Trailer edited

a 23. Close the Header editor.

O Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 193

LogView Schlumberger
a
8
Lesson Window Screenshot Tool
o
The Window screenshot application allows you to save, copy,
and paste Techlog windows into documents, such as Microsoft
PowerPoint presentations, by using the built-in Window
screenshot tool.
o
These snapshot options are available in the Window screenshot
tool:
o
Current window Screenshot of the selected Techlog
window a
Gurrent window Screenshot of the selected Techlog
(without title)
zone
Graphical
window without the title of the window
Screenshot of the selected Techlog
o
only
Main window
window without the title or scroll bars
Screenshot of the entire Techlog window a
o
o
o
o
O
a
o
o
194 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger LogView

1 Capturing Screenshots
a Procedure

This procedure shows you how to access the llYindow

screenshot tool to capture images of Techlog windows.
o 1. Click O or select Home > TechReport > O Window
screenshot (F12).
o 2. Define the screenshot format and the parts of the window to
capture.
TIP: You can capture only what is on the screen or all of the
o data.

3. Select where to store the captured image: file or clipboard

o and click OK.

lS winow

o screenshot (JPG, PNG, BMP)

o Current window

Current window (without title)

e
a Graphical zone only

Main window

o Storage

File: Q)

o e Clipboard

a t} Tgtp _ oK cancel

o
o
a
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 195
LogView Schlumberger
o
9
Lesson Print Options
The printing interface allows you to print out all the plots that you
o
create in Techlog. Use one of these methods to print the plots,
depending on where you are within Techlog. o
.
.
From Techtog toolbar, select Home > Techreport > Print

From the LogView window, select Layout , ,Ë., print.

H.
o
Layout Printing o
Layout printing is based on the general printing interface but it has
special requirements for depth-plotting. Three tabs are important
to the discussion of printing: Properties, Output, and Layout. a
On the Properties tab, you can adjust three types of printing
settings and measurements: margins, width, and height. O
Margins

Automatic Leaves 1 cm (0.39 inch) of margin in each

o
direction.
User Allows you to modify the vertical and horizontal
margins.
o
Without
Adjust
Uses no margins (for depth plot printing/
continuous feed).
Allows you to adjust the vertical and horizontal
o
scales. There are four types of adjustments
available on the Properties tab. These
adjustments can be different for the vertical and
o
width
the horizontal scales.
o
Adjust
the page
to Adjusts the layout width to fit the paper width. o
Fixed scale Allows you to specify a width and unit for each
track. This option prints the plot according to the
track properties.
o
o
196 ïæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger LogView

o To view and modify this property, select a track

and on the Display options tab in the
Properties window, change the Track width

o Customize
property.

Determines the size of the plot.

the Retains the layout proportions in LogView.
o
Keep
proportions

Height
a Adjust to
the page
Adjusts the layout height to fit the paper height
and allows you to specify the number of pages
to use.
O By default, the number is set to 1.

a Fixed scale Respects the scale defined in the Layout

properties. For example, 1:200.
Customize Allows you to determine the size of the plot.

o Keep the
proportions
Adjusts the layout height proportionally to the
specifiedwidth.

o Position Define the position of the plot within the paper:

left, center, or right side of the page.

On the Options tab, you have the option to save the current
o properties and access some of the properties you previously
saved.

o On the Layout tab, you can configure these options:

Limitation Allows you to define a depth interval directly

o from the Limitation field on the Layout tab.

You must define only the minimum and
maximum values of the interval in the layout

o
reference unit.

The behavior is the same aslhe Apply common

limitation to all the uel/s option.

o Page
footer
header/ Allows you to display the track header on each
page and at the bottom and the well header at
the bottom.
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 197
LogView Schlumberger
O
1
Vt
Exercise Printinga Layout
For this exercise, print the Well9_SHORT layout.
o
1.
2.
Open the Well9_SHORT layout in LogView.

Select Layout r,Ë., print. The Print properties window

o
3.
opens.
ln the Properties tab of the Print properties window, adjust
the parameters shown in the figure.
o
{trh$iÈ
É Pnnter
Pnnler
ÂdobcPDF
properi6-
ÈEE€l x opti* E_|il!yl_
a
lbEEsize Ma.gic

r_-.1
fomt cffi
wffi 2rm
Hcigm 87.52
' Hoiæmt

Vmral mrgins
margins
o
TE wrùbn mrgrG .
ÆJdtoffiffit
AdJd
ffi
Hêiqht
lid«âh
âdj6bepa9Ê - NumFofpage J..oO
o
FoetÉn - kft
o
ffi
.*l
Info@tion
Unit
R.sldion
Totôl
(dpi)
cm

U00
dæulMt rire (mrgins imludêd an 6)1 27 x 87 a
,ts! Print

ti
O
Prinr

-= i::m.",,"*
4. ln the Layout tab, select to display the track header and the
well header at the bottom.
o
5. Select Print into PDF as the print format.
6. Click,S etnt.
a
7. Save the PDF.
o
o
o
198 Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger LogView

a Review Questions
. How do you apply a layout or template to several wells?
.
o When you apply a layout or template, how does variable
management change (user family alias)? How do you decide
which variable to display in the layout?
.
o .
How do you change the properties of a variable? A track? A
layout?
How do you insert a plot or histogram into a layout?
.
O .
What are the different track types?
Which option should you use to apply a single layouU
template to several wells?
o .
.
What is the difference between a layout and a template?
How can you display a layout in TVD?
.
O How can you modiÿ the well header?

o Summary
ln this module, you learned about:

a .
.
configuring the appearance of LogView
creating core image displays
.
o .
creating plots in track
saving and applying a layout.

o
o
o
O
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 199
7

c
o
O
e
o
o
o
o 6

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o Schlumberger Plots

o Module 6 Plots

o The Plot viewer tool allows you to compare multiple

measurements made at a single reference over a 2D plot. ln
Techlog, the Plot viewer tool can incorporate as many as five
dimensions or variables in a single window, along with filters,
o charts, secondary variables, user-defined regressions, and
equations.

All plots are linked to all other plots in your Techlog workspace,
O which means that any point selection you make on a plot is
interactively displayed in other plots.

o Learning Objectives l5J-

o After completing this module, you will know how to:

. configure the appearance of a plot
.
o .
manipulate the plot from tabs in the interface
use the Cross-plot tools for selection
. work with regression equations.
o Lesson I Appearance of the Plot
o lnterface
The Plot tool is in the same menu as LogView. Access this

O feature from the Plot menu where three categories of plots are
available:
.
o .
.
Single well plot
Multi-wellplot
Matrix-plot.

o The most common plots are presented on the left side of the
menu bar. More plot style options are available in the drop-down
menu for each plot category (Figure 44).

O
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 201
Plots Schlumberger

ÈJ
j
a !g
s2
o16vÀ{
iiii
cs€ÈÈ!
5â;â à
i i

â
a
I
I 5
É
o
o

=
:
Ë

§i
o
E8
êo
::l o
6 e!=
a !sà
Ir f
§g*s
I3tlt!
§§
tt t
À
É
a
o
:*r
lrr= T.
6Iv-6<'
Jr ttti o
àâ 5âââ
{ fiEô
o 99V999

tr.a
r o
e
§
È
sn
E

-
,9
-
ÉÉËE§s
-rSi
o
I
4
.<+o
:51,,44û
o
I a
oEE.v-66DE {<<

o
cgs
§ àââ àâââàà âââ
GÉClCCCGÉ

È EEE
v9999VVUg EEEIEE
oy
EO Ee
Éb
a
;o
Ë
ô
Ai
YO
v@
I ile E È<
3 Eà
És§
B++
Ê
§§i§r§ËrË 9BB
i
â
i:

ï ilta r0l0ttilo< t0tîa o

o
o
tI ËÈ
.Ht ô

=
o
E o

E -9
...r E
o
44
Figure Single well, Multi-well, and Matrix-plot options
o
202 Tæhlog FundanEntals, Version 2013
o
O Schlumberger Piots

The Techlog Plot interface (Figure 45 and Figure 46) has a

O central viewing area in which the plot appears. The box on the left
contains the variables, filters, and charts displayed over the plot.

o nrg*iltilltl-,-!h.'B
kalel . + C.Ü.-dd: r.[l.O l^rull - Ubl: CUlÉ - Polôl.at.: G&É
a.a.Énc. (ar: [t25o - a2ar.sl

I
X axrs
0 0.1 0,2 0.3 0.{ 0.5
2
.: 1 DAIATULL 2.05
.i NTUT 2.L 2.1

Y drt 2.r5 2.r5

. 2.2

a
 wetrl 2,2
2,25
. ,-.1 Dllarutl â 2.3 3
(I DENs ù 2.rs
Cold ï z.n
. t welll Ë 2..5 a5

a . :.] DATATULI

Labêl
. Â wettl
'1. 6AMM
?.53
2.6
2,65
5
55
2,6
2.65
1.7
,,-I

o
DATAIULI- 2.75
0.2 0.5
t ruTH
0.1

EUr (r@)
gornt Srze
. À welll
, i DATATUIL

o Figure
iI GAMM

45 Cross-plot interface for a single well plot

O lrciflrs-:gllr;
oaberr (1) I Cre3.-cloihuifEll [i.dmn Po6dÿ - tu[ eBhyl

a . À. weill
./I

.
DATAfut-t
.lJllNedronForoeÿ
NEUT
2

2.t
0
bH: u$obav - sE.r G.nm f,rv ' fahcÊ
0.r 0-2 0.3 0.! 0.5

t
o
. l! I Bull Densny
DEN-BR 2.2

DEN.V
. DENS
È .., .'l i!
Ê z.t

o
DENS.SF]
. ll tl 6amma Ray :3
. GAMM 2.5
I
*.
GR ?.6 ,1"
,At Lntrotogy

o . 2.1
Ct-rTH

fAclEs04 o.r 0.2 o,l 0.4 0.5

. l! a Gamma Ray
hhnÈæ(M)
. GAMM

o
GR

46
o Figure Cross-plot interface for a multi-well plot

o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 203

Plots Schlumberger
o
)
TIP: lf you do not see the variable side box, click on the side-
box icon just under the Glose button. a
The window opens the density values (Y axis) versus neutron
values (X axis). Optional dimensions include:
. color scale for the Gamma ray
o
.
.
point size for the Gamma ray value
label for the value of the lithology flag curve.
a
Display and lcons a
The PIot interface has many icons that make it easy to perform
common operations (Table 3). o
Table 3: lcons in the Plot Interface

Object selection o
O lnteractiveselection
, lnteractive eraser o
-\ Zoom
{9 Hand move o
Annotation creation

. Add a reference annotation a

' Add a dynamic annotation

fi
ttl
Polygon

Custom regression creation

a
G
o,, Display the values

Display the position lines

o
0
'a
Verticaladjustment
Horizontaladjustment
o
,s Global adjustment. To adjust the LogView display
horizontally. o
Lt General adjustment around charts

o
204 Tæhlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
a
o Schlumberger Plots

2 Plot Tabs
a Lesson
ln single well mode, you can drag data into the corresponding X, Y

o axes and color boxes (Figure 47). You also can view the plot
without the variables side-box and drop the data over the
interactive fields that appear when you drag variables into the plot

o window.

NOTE: The Charts tab does not appear for all plot types. o

o
a
o
o
o
O
a
Figure 47 Cross-plot X, Y and color boxes

o
o
o
o
a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 205
Plots Schlumberger
o
a
aros plor Save Orn Êdt Drsprày læri proFù6 9rd,ol
o
a
C.Br-olot: t.llr.O^l^f Ut( - b&l: E^cIE$a - Poi.l tlrc: rtulo
X axis

, n DÀTArutt
rl NEur

, n oATAÉutr
q.
o
DENS

Cold
.l
,
wclll
lll DÂrAlutt
I O
{.

o
GÀMM

bæt
r t w€il1
. l.i DArafurt

goint ÿzc

, n
È raoEso4

DATAIUIL
o
f rrulD

Figure 48 Variables tab display

a
o
a
o
o
o
o
206 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 20'1 3
O
o Schlumberger Plots

o Filter Tab
The Filter tab allows you to refine the display using a different
variable. Most commonly, this is a qualitative variable.
o For example, you might wish to display data points filtering on
facies, fluid code, or any classification group. ln this example,

o choose which facies or which combination of facies to display for a

more detailed analysis of the data.

ln this lesson, you will see how to combine the filter with other

o tools to provide the most accurate data analysis possible. The plot
in Figure 49 displays points belonging only to groups 1 ,2, and 3.
For this plot, FACIES04 is used as color code.

a Cr6s-pkn S.G Oæî Edit

o
..aære (rI): [r25o 4213.5)

0.2 0.3

1
2

o 3
4

É:'i-.r.: .

o
o
o ,t

o Figure 49
ÀA
Filter tab

o
o
a
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 207
Plots schlumberger O
Charts Tab
The Charts tab adds predefined charts to the data (Figure 50).
o
Charts added over the data points allow you to identify the
lithologies and the presence of hydrocarbons. O

k€dêfiÉl.milic È .- i r.r r.,

o
E bF Hqm 24L TEmr/ton
E &Itr HqE 2415. comÉËr*
E
3
I
Eakd H€B CxSwN,
S.ilumkqe CP-lc &CP-ld. N«
s.ilumkg< tu -U & È.-12 k
Sid*afl r 2.t

2.2
a
E hlumFg« k)r ll, kron hr
E khlumBge goÊ15, Ndron gor 2.3

E khlumkqêr hÈ16, krcn b

E Sôlumærgd Forl7. tmM to(
E s(hlumFF turl& Ecoÿoæ, I
Q'
I --
' O
E kruumkg( tuF19, EcoS<q, r Ë''
E khlumbq« tuÊtr21, Mrm A
E khrumæfg« tur-L-2l. M Â

2.6
o
M!
3 o
E S(hlumbeqtr gotsU & 9or-12. Ne

o
50
Figure

Exercise
Charts tab

1 Creatinga Histogram
o
t7
1. Click the Plot tab and select L[ Histogram. a
2. From the DATAFULL dataset in Welll, drag the GAMM

3.
variable into the plot.
Right-click on the plot.
o
Several options are available from the histogram plot menu.
o
O
a
208 ïechlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Plots

o Xui!
I@.firçi
. ll w€ll
H6togram Sâre Open Edit Dirplay Propert,s
Hi.lqr.n:
t.lc..nr.
wàlll.DAT^f ULL
(FI): [72so 6213.s]
o
n
!
.E

a
OAIATUU-
( GAMM

-- i: ota§
if iÉ ts lt tliiÈ .z

o c
save the hiiogram-.

Oupla(.t.
tip!ê1. ::.

Flip hdizml diJ

o vd*46:
üu: [r2s
$

- 32a3.5]
(cq) {, EIlplayÉL<tioqly
Dilplrÿ eldion og
Drpia! ih? rrÉalc4 r;riiil€i
Cùl+Spô(e

Ctl+AlllSF*ê

gdrd§:

a av.r.F &vdEn:
iuû.d
M'ô6um
nw
v.ls:
13.1926
vd6: 167
St.d.rd d.vEno.,

hmuù vd4: l$,lat

12.3955
?
Mm-
apply
CoPr, ùc sü$i6
21,527

O
o 4. Apply a palette to the Histogram.
a. ln the histogram Properties window, on the Display
option tab, select yes for lhe With X palerre option.

o b. Select a palette from the Palette dock window (you can

re-use the WBl256 palette and adjust the minimum and
maximum value for the Gamma ray (0-150)).

o iidq..m: w.lll.DATArUll
rd.éæ. (rl): [1150 - a2aa.sl
lc !00
.
ProFrlrêt
;" Aarlôgr.m ,.i i '.

a 0,1!
0.12
o.tl
0.t

o
i o.æ
Nqûliza
3 o.o,
cdæ
f o.*
o,ol
s
E
o,q
0,ot

o !.02
0.01

gad (olor

ffi
Grdd r.!o

o Hisqam ÿË

-l
L <muat* tqr«,er
aI Qùô!6 (*l

o I

o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 20'l 3 209

Plots Schlumberger
o
5. Save the histogram as a template.
a. Select Save > lrr Save as a template... a
b. Save the template as GAMMA_RAY_HISTOGRAM at the
Project level.
The histogram template now is saved in the Project browser.
o
. Histograms

lu cauua-RnY-HISToGMM
o
6. From the histogram Properties window, complete these steps:
ô
a. On the Display options tab, select no for the ll/ith X palette
option.
b. For the Histogram type property, select Zonation. o
7. From the Zonation dock, select the zones to appear on the
histogram.
Ba.togr.m: Wêlll.DATAfULL
te,æncÈ (Fr): [72so - a2a3.5l
o
0.11

0.1

E! zowon t x
a
0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06
Zonataon:
STRANGRAPHY

ZoneB
a
0.0s

0.04

0.03
5
E
ZoreF
ZoreS
o
o
0.02

0.01

8.
(GAPI)

Drag the FACIES04 variable into the Filter side box

o
o
o
o
210 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
 Schlumberger Plots

9. From the histogram Properties window, on the Display

options tab, select a filter for the Histogram type property.

H nôgrrn i :

I raGs
!
2
3

I ".*
s

o irL

IA

10. Select the five facies.

11. Save the histogram.

a. Select Save > [l Histogram.

b. Enter the name ÿrle l, l- 1_DATAF ULL_ HI STOGRAM_EACIES
c. Select the Project level.
d. Click OK.
, Histograms
TI GAM MA-RAY-HISTOGRAM

hl werrt_oaraFULL_HISToGRAM_FAcIEs

Exercise 2 Creating a Neutron-Density

Crossplot
t7
1. Open a single well crossplot.
2. Drag the NEUT and DENS variables into the corresponding
zone (respectively, X and Y) of the plot area, or into the
Variables tab.
3. Use GAMM as the Color value.
4. ln the Chart tab, select Schlumberger, Por-11 & Por-12,
Neutron Porosity vs Bulk Density, and TNPH.

Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 211

Plots Schlumberger o
I
S. Cticf Add to display this chart on the plot.

o
o
ilillElilldl ritd charE-l Cr6-plot Sare Open tdil Display lnÉrr Properris S€l«tion
ÿale1 '+ CÉ.r-Dlot: Wclll.OAT^f UtL Ê
X axis
R.f...n.G (FI): [7250 - 8203.5] ! O
. Â watl c J,1 C.2 C3 7.1 05 C6
, i-_I DATAFUTI- 1.t
'1.

o
NEUT 1,9

2
, Â welll 2,1
. iI DATAFUTT 2,2
^
1
ü"
a
DENS

Colo,
i 2 2.4
Weill o 2.s
. iI DAÎAFULT
2.ô
,I 6AMM

o
2.,
Labêl
2.C

2.9

0.t 0.3 05

Poanl size NEW (FUC)

O
6. Save the plot as Welll_DATAFULL_NEUT_DENS_GAMM.

.
o
Cross-plots

I Wertt_OAtatULL_NEUT_DENS_GAMM
a
o
o
o
o
o
O
212 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumbergêr Plots

Lesson 3 Multi-Well Plots

o You can use most of the single plot viewers in Multi-well mode

a except for array plot types and plots displaying dip variables.

1 Creating a Multi-Well Plot

Procedure
o 1. Select Plot > Multi-well.
trl
I 2. Select the multi-well plot type to create.
The lnput(s) (family, alias or variable) selection window
opens. This window allows you to select the mnemonic
(family name, alias, or variable name) to be used within the

a method.
NOTE: ln this window, a white cell in the Data ÿpe assigyment o
column indicates that this input is mandatory; a gray
o cell indicates the input is optional.

3. Select the family, alias, or variable to display and click Create.

o 4. ln the plot that opens, drag the datasets into the variable side
box or the display area of the plot.

o Box Plot
A box plot allows you to graphically display groups of numerical
a data. You can use it to compare distributions among multiple
groups or sets of data.

a The shape of the box plot provides information about the log. For
example, if the box is long, log values are quite dispersed. You
can verify the consistency of a log from one well to another to
check that the logs have the same range of values (same
O minimum, maximum, and median).

A box is built by drawing lines between the 25th percentile, the

o 75th percentile, and the median.

. The 1Oth percentile (10 % of the log values that correspond
to the outliers)
o .
.
The first quantile (25 % of the log values)
The median (50 % of the log values)

o . The third quantile (75 % of the log values

o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 213

Plots Schlumberger
o
The 90th percentile (90 % of the log values). These values
are calculated. You can modify them in the box plot
Properties window on the Display options tab.
a
t Exercise 1 Creating a Multi-Well Box Plot O
ln this exercise, you create a box plot to compare the GAMM
variable from the five wells. Before starting this exercise, verify
that all your wells have a color assigned.
o
1.
2.
Select Plot > Multi-well > l!ü Multi-well Box-plot.
ln the lnput(s) (family, alias or variable) selection window,
a
select the Gamma ray family and click Create.
o
o
a
o
The multi-well box plot opens in the Project browser.
o
ln the Project browser, create a conditional selection to
select the DATAFULL dataset for the five wells. o
o
o
O
a
214 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
a
O Schlumberger Plots

4.
a Drag the five datasets into the variable side box or the
display area of the plot.

::ÆL Bor-plot save Opeo tdir Di$lay Iæn PrGsilrg Properti6 S€lection o

a q!*qG)
. Àl wcnl
, r' El DATAFU|I
. [L a Gàm@ Rây
bx_Plot muhl*.llr G.mmi RôY
ri
T

o
GAMM
GR 150
. Àl wdr2

+È*i+
, .rl m DATAfutt
.Ll6ammRay ü loo

o . GAMM
6R_m,,
GR-OlR
6R 02R
Ë-^
Eil

a
0
GR_O3R

GR-R3R
. Âl weil3 -ro
, r L-1 DATAFUIL
. l! a Gamma w!ll:

o
Rav
. GAMM
Gamma Ray-«
6Rs-orE - ,ir,,

o All variables assigned to the Gamma ray family appear. You

can change the variables displayed on the box plot manually
using the variable side box.

o 10% ofthe points

O

a 1 570 of the points

o 500/o of lhe points

o I 5olo of the points

1 0olo of the points

o
o 5. Select to display the box plot for a selected zone by selecting

o the zone from the Zonation dock window.

6. Change the family displayed.

a. ln the box-plot, right-click and select È Family change....

o b. Select the Bulk density family.

o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 215

Plots Schlumberger
o
t Lesson 4 Matrix Plot
You can use matrix plots to generate mutual information on the
same display. The matrix plot allows you to display a defined plot
o
o
for several wells on the same display. All the types of matrix plots
work virtually in the same way.

Procedure 1 Creating a Matrix Pot o

til 1. Select Plot > Matrix-plot and select the plot to create.
a
The lnput(s) (family, alias or variable) selection window
opens. This window allows you to select the mnemonic
(family name, alias, or variable name) to be used within the
method. O
2. Select the family, alias, or variable to display and click Create.
3. ln the plot that opens, drag the datasets into the variable side
box or the display area of the plot.
o
Exercise 1 Creating a Histogram Matrix Plot I
ln this exercise, you create a histogram matrix plot to compare the
Gamma ray distribution in Wells 1,2,3,4, and 9. O
1. Select Plot > Matrix-plot > [[ Histogram matrix-plot.
2. ln the lnput(s) (family, alias or variable) selection window,
select the Gamma Ray family and click Create.
o
3.

4.
ln the Project browser, create a conditional selection to
select the DATAFULL dataset for the five wells.
Drag the five datasets into the variable side box and click OK
o
in the Variable interpolation window.
o
o
o
o
216 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
a
o Schlumberger

Right-click on the plot and select Activate the quantile

O display,lz.
...**EeL Hiogrm tu €û Dkpiry o
il

o m§)
, m oalÆuu
.lr |. emm nry
xh4,m(6ù):cmmlry ?

o . ll wer2
. m oarÆuu
.lr a omm.k
G8-0'

o
n
GPIOIR
G'LO2R
q_0il -:r'"'
G&BR !: - - o ü glf
. Àl wdr3
, Èl DATÆut!
t-5! pÈE
o .Lrtomrunry

@E
GS_03E
GR5.O3R
Rry-(l(
U tuê rh hinqâm.
q mi.ae

o . E DAlÆutt
,Ua6milRry

o Lesson 5 Plot Tools

Other plot tools offer a variety of options for selecting and

O displaying data and quality control.

Use the Selection tools to select data points on one plot and view

o these points on another plot. You also can apply an action after
the points are selected, such as deleting all selected points.

a You can select data points in tvvo ways.

tr Polygon type selection: Draw a polygon around the area of

interest and select the points inside the polygon.

a lnteractive selection: Use the mouse to select the data

points.

o
o
o
o Techlog Fundâmentals, Version 2013 217
Plots Schlumberger o
Polygon Type Selection
A polygon is a graphical object that allows you to select a precise
a
area within the crossplot. There are many options available when
working with polygons. o
Glose a polygon Draw the polygon and close it by coming
back to the first point. The Polygon
closed icon fI indicates your polygon is
o
closed.

Click Enter to select the points inside the

polygon
a
Ghoose a
polygon
Hold down the Ctrl key and click inside the
polygon. You need to be sure you are in
Polygon mode as indicated by the Penci!
o
icon c?. After a polygon is selected, the
borders turn red. O
Choose two or Hold down the Ctrl key and click inside
more polygons
Move a polygon
each polygon.
Choose a polygon and press the keyboard
o
arrows to move the polygon where to
display it. o
TIP: lf you choose multiple polygons, all of them will move
together.
o
Remove a Choose a polygon and click Delete.
polygon

TIP: lf you choose multiple polygons, all of them will be removed.

o
Modify the size Choose one polygon point to change the
o
and shape of a cursor to li, which indicates that the point
polygon is selected. You now can move the
polygon point.
o
Ghoose a!!
polygons
Ctrl + Alt + left mouse button
o
o
218 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 201 3
a
O Schlumberger Plots

ln the Edit menu, two types of Delete commands are available

O (Figure 51):

1,.r,! Delete the selected values

o |:I Delete non selected values.

o l.:x Delete selected values

)e

Ctrl+Alt+Q

o & Delete non selected values Ctrl+Shift+Space

Rcvcrc axcs
.l[ rtip horizontal axis

o 4
E
rtip vertical axis
Reverse axes

o ?
Advanccd
Detine...
filtcr

? Appty

O Equation
l''t:-'.;'.1lla rr iLt::' r-'rl

o 15 Limits

Annotation

o #
f{
Regression/Equation

Folygon Delete the polygons

o Delete the values anside the polygon

Delete th€ values inside the polygon

51 Commands available from the Edit menu

O Figure

a
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 219
Plots Schlumberger
o
Figure 52 illustrates the relationship between a selected polygon
and its log display. o
0.1
Crc..-plot WGlll.O^T^rUI
t rGErc. (rr):
0.2
[72so - !213.51
0,3 0,4
XD
(fr)
titom
o
o
1.9
7500

2.1

I
2.2

a
o
2.5

2.6

2.7 4..

o
2.8

0.1 0.2 0.3 0.1 0.5

NEW (FUC)

Figure 52 Polygon selection and a log display

o
o
o
o
o
a
O
a
220 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger

o !nteractive Selection Tool

This tool uses a selection brush to choose data points (Figure 53).
ln the Properties dock window on the Show options tab, you will

o find options that allow you to choose a brush and adjust the brush
size.

o After you select points, there are two ways to clear them:
. Clear a// selected points by pressing the Esc key or the
Space bar.

o . Clear only specific points by using the lnteractive eraser

or Mouse mode.

o ci6.-plot w.ll T.OAIATUU

Rcl.Én.. (E): I12so - a2a3.5l ID
(ft)
l:lm
0.1 0.2 0.3 0,4 0.5

o 2

2.2
7600

o 3
6
2,3

..o

2.5
7r@

o
o z.o
,aû
2.7

2.4

o
2.C
,9û
!
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5

ilEq (ruc)

o Figure 53
aooo

lnteractiviÿ between plots: Points selected on the

crossplot (left) are highlighted on the layout (right)
o
O
a
o
a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 20'1 3 221
Plots Schlumberger

Statistics Display
ln the top right corner of the crossplot, there is a gray box
o
containing important navigation information, as shown in 3;
Figure 54 explain the content of the gray statistics box.

You can choose not to display the navigation box by setting the
Display option to no on the Display options tab in the Properties
window of the crossplot.

Numberof point5 hidden

c6..û: dr.ilr§ût on top ofthe plot
.d.Ék. (tI). lrrs. .rB.5l
l, ruumuerof pornts

Numberof points ^
u ZôS J./ hrdden on too rrsht
corneroftheplot
selected with the
point5
19 +Numberol
â hrdden on the lett
o<'2!!
Numberof poants - sideof the plot
I r.r
current displav 0
Numberof points in the 1
2.3 dataset. Numberof points
2-ra hidden at the bottom
.o.l 0 0.r 0.2 o.t ofthe plot
ü(Ér)

Figure 54 Crossplot with statistics box

Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013

I Schlumberger Plots

6 Regressions and Equations

o Lesson
Regressions are equation lines displayed through the data points.

o You can add regressions to fit the displayed data or insert them
graphically over the plot.
d+
in the interactive
o Create a custom regression by clicking
toolbar (Figure 55).

Insert Properties
o
Se

Regr*rion
ǧ Byfitter

o 9+
,-:,-
Global

o * Current selection

Equetion
[+ aaa...
o fu add,y=1

o Figure 55
_l

Regressions by filter
Load.,.

o You can insert regressions in four ways:

. By filter: lf a filter variable is used, a regression is calculated

o .
for each filter group.
By zone: lf specific zones are chosen, a regression is
calculated by zone.

o . Global: Generate a regression that takes into account all

displayed data. This does not account for data points that do
NOT appear.

o . Current selection: Generate a regression through selected

points using the !nteractive Selection tool (Figure 56).

o You also can generate regression lines on only filtered data.

o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 223
Plots Schlumberger a
Cross-plot: WeIII.DATAFULL
Rcference (Ff): [7250 - E283,5] o
0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.45
2

2.05
2

2.05
o
2.L 2.L
2.15 2.1s O
2.2
' 2.2
U
(9
2.25 iË,#-...-','; 2.25
o
o
zu
2.3
:t-t
.
tï: Lt{Êt-}^'-? .- 2.3

o 2.35 2.3s
2.4

2.45
2.4
2.45
o
2.5
2.55

0.25 0.3 0.3s

2.55
o
-
NEUT (FRAC)

r':, :-lll :
o
Scale:
OScâb 1: [NEUT - DEt{Sl
legrcssins:
o
Req2 (type = MA; R = -O.626i R2 adj = 0.682; RMSE: 0.0253293; nb = 340)
Equation: DENS = - 2.969154 * I'IEUT + 3.00304
Req3 (type = MAi R = -0.868; R2 ad; = 0.753; RlvlSE = 0.Û32136; nb = 196j
a
Equation: DENS = - 3.416435' NEUT + 3.251418

Figure 56 Regression calculated by current selection

o
The syntax used to deflne regressions is the same as the syntax
used in the Data editor. Refer to the Techlog Help for more
information about predefined operators and correct syntax. Click
o
Help when the interface is displayed to view a list of predefined
functions and the definition details of an equation. a
o
o
Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
 Plots
O schlumberger

o Display Properties
As with Techlog objects, you can modify the appearance of the
equation line using tabs to change the display properties in the
o Properties dock window.
. Parameters tab: Select the regression type (linear, power, or

o .
exponential).
Display options tab: Edit the title, marker size, type, and
color and activate the confidence interval display.

O After you save the crossplots, you can apply these settings to
other crossplots and use them as default crossplot settings.

o Exercise 1 Creating a Multi-Wells PORO-

PERM Crossplot Vt
o ln this exercise, you will create a multi-well crossplot to create a
PORO-PERM relationship in the log domain.

o 1.
2.
Select PIot > Multi-Well > Cross-plot.
ln the lnputs selection window, choose the Core Porosity
family for the X-axis and Core Permeability for the Y-axis.

o 3.
4.
For the color field, use the Gamma Ray family.
Click Create. An empty crossplot appears.

o 5.

6.
Go to the Project browser and select the LQC dataset from
Well 1.

Right-click and create a conditional selection.

o 7. Drag the LQC dataset into the crossplot and click OK in the
Variable interpolation window.

o
o
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 tta
Plots Schlumberger

8. On the Wells tab, verify that the correct variables were used
for each well, as shown in the figure.

ül§lll Filter iCharls

Datasets (5) |

r fi Weill
.,ELQC
e I ll Core porosiÿ

e CPHI_C
r lL fl Core permeabitiÿ
e CKX

'll fl Gamma RaY

. GAMM
GAMM-

'Al wett2
.TELQC
, l_x fl Core porosiÿ
e CPHI_C
,l! fl Core permeability
e Cl«
.l! fl Gamma Ray
o GAMM
Al wett:
Al wettq
Al wetls

9. Go to the Properties window for the multi-well crossplot on

the Display options tab to change the appearance of
variables on the plot. Under the [4/e//s section, make these
selections:
. Under Welll_LQC, click Point and select o
. Under Well2_LQC, click Point and select À

. Under Well3_LQC, click Point and select .

. Under Well4_LQC, click Point and select +
. Under Well9_LQC, click Point and select x

226 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 O

o Schlumberger Plots

o 10. ln the Display line, ensure that the Points oplion is set to Yes.
Your crossplot should look like the one in the figure.
cret._Dbr mùlilù.ll: lcôtê potorltY' corc PÈm..ùalllvl

o 05!015r0253C
t.hl: -*c: -Fit.c

O
O
Iro
o
o
o 05101520251035
cor. tumry (%)

o .
treill -qL
we[9_.QC ^\\"1:
Lac a

o 11. Save the crossplot:

a. Select Save > Cross-plot.
o b. Enter the name cpoR
level.
cPERM and save it at the Project

o 12. Close the crossplot.

O
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 227
Plots Schlumberger
o
-ît Exercise 2 Computing a Poro-Perm
o
Regression

ln this exercise, you insert a global regression to change the

regression type and save a regression equation at the User level. O
1. From the Project browser, under Gross-plots, open the

2.
CPOR_CPERM cross-plot.
ln the Cross-plot menu, go to lnsert > Regression > Global.
o
3.
The default regression type is Major axis. Change it to
Reduced Major axis Y/X
Select the regression in your plot, navigate to the Properties
o
window > Parameters tab and set the property Regression
type to Reduced Major axis Y/)(. o
Your regression should look like the figure.
Cre$-Dlot muhÈsll: [CoE PoE.ry - coÉ

t0
L.hl:
15
sl.cr fit.r
20
Pm..bllry]
o
o
100
o
grc o
I
o
o
o_t

0.01

U.Iç
t5 20

o
Ow.llr_LQC

EçË!fû*
aft[2_rG

C41 (W - nu YÀ; R - 0,7S; R2 d) - 0.S2: GE - 0.52!9S; nb - 7261

o
O
tta ïechlog Fundarnentals, Version 201 3
o
o Schlumberger Plots

4. Select Save > Regression > All as equation.

o 5.
6.
Click the User tab to save the equation in the User folder.
Name the equation PERM_PoRo and click OK. The equation

o 7.
is now saved in the Userfolder.
Save the crossplot with the regression by selecting Save >
Cross-plot to overwrite the existing crossplot.

o Procedure I Entering an Equataon

o You can enter your own equations from a crossplot using the
I]I
Equation editor. This procedure shows you how to create an
equation and display it in a crossplot.

o 1 . Take one of these actions to create an equation.

. From the lnsert menu, click Add equation /+.

o . Right-click inside the crossplot and select Add equation.

cross-plot: well l.DATAFULL

o 0.15
Reference (FT): [725o - 62E3.5]

0.3 0.4 0.45

o
2 2
a
2.05 2.05
a
2.1 2,L
a

o 9. z.zs
2.15
rt.
t^l
.
. at'
tta
aa

,t. aa a .ttr"t
'
2.L5

2.25
u

a a 2,3
fr z.rs
aa
Éa
a
a
f
i-l!
I rl'r
ï
t' 2.3s
2.4 aa ?.4
l'
O,E §
o 2.45
2.5
a aa

IE
-.1

E âÉEl
2.45
2.5

o
2.55 .55
Add equation

o
a
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 20'13 229
Plots Schlumberger
o
2. Enter an equation using Y and X values or the variable
names. For multi-well plots, use only X and Y values. o
l:ii
o
Equti,on

Please, enter a formula: NEUT = 2'DENS - 4.2

t) Help OK CarKel Apply

The resulting plot is shown in the figure.

o
Cross-plot: Well I.DATAFULL
Reference (FT): [7250 - 8283.5]
o
2

2.0 5
0.1 o.2 0.2s 0.3 0.35 0.4
2

2.05
o
2.t
2.15
r
a
a
I
2.t
2.15 o
il- tt- r- t-. i .
.lt.- a

o , ,<
(9

zu
ra
a '
:.:.'].-.:-' 2.25
2.3
o
o 2.3 5 at 2.35
aa
2.4
2.45
t
a aa
ta 2.4
2.45
O
.a

2. s5
ïi... 2,5
2.55 o
0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.45

o
NEUT (FRAC)

,to
o
Re92 (typc
34o)
- ltlA; R = -0.826, R2 àdi

Equation: DENS = - 2.969154' NEUT + 3.OO3O4

- 0.682t RMSE - 0.0253293, nb =
o
ReSS (type = MA; R: -0.864; R2 adj = 0.753; RMSE: 0.O32136;
196)
Equation: DENS = - 3.416435 * NEUT + 3.251418
nb:
o
Eçlrdos:
Fundionl: NEUT=2'DENS-4.2
o
o
230 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3
o
o Schlumberger Plots

2 Working with Equations

o Procedure

You can edit, remove, and copy equations

r3
o To edit an equation, right-click on a curve and select Edit the
equation.

o Remove an equation by choosing the equation and pressing

Delete.

You can copy equations and regressions by selecting Edit >

Regression/Equation > Copy all equations and functions. The
O Output dock window displays all relevant information about the
line.

o Procedure 3 Saving the Display Properties

t3
o Techlog allows you to save the properties of a plot to apply them
to another plot. ln this procedure, you save the properties of a plot
and apply them to a new plot.

a 1. From the Save drop-down menu, select Currents.

2. ln the Display properties save window, choose the
o properties to save and click OK.

o Target

Folder
file
g User - File name NeutDens -

o Properties
, .r lor Limits
v Conserve the user boundaries
lvatues
yes
I

o .r §! Display options
t Appearance
E Data density
o [f Histograms
Select all OK Crr""l
o
,

To apply the properties file to another plot, open a new plot

o and select Properties > Apply.

o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 231

Plots
o
Review Questions
. What are the different types of plots available in Techlog?
o
. How do you insert a second scale in a plot?
. How do you insert an lmage in your chart? o
. Which type of regressions can be inserted in a crossplot
within Techlog?
o
Summary
ln the module, you learned about:
o
.
.
configuring the appearance of a crossplot
manipulating the plot from tabs in the interface
o
. using the Cross-plot tools for selection
. working with regression equations. O
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
232 Techlog Fundam€ntals, Version 2013
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
O
o
O
o
o Schlumberger Depth Interaction, Interactive Selection Mode, Zonation, and l\,larkers

a Module 7 Depth lnteraction,

lnteractive Selection
o Mode, Zonation, and
Markers
o This module covers several tools available in Techlog to link
different viewers and to create zones.

o Learning Objectives l-----

l#:
l<_\
o After completing this module, you will know how to:
. create and edit zones and markers using the Zone editor
.
a .
create and edit zones and markers using graphical tools in
LogView
manage markers.

o Lesson I Depth lnteraction Mode

o Depth interaction is a tool that allows you to display and move a

depth line or a window along a layout. The line or window then
changes accordingly and the tool automatically updates the

o display of the connected ploUtools that are listening to the depth

information sent by LogView.

o Procedure 1 Setting the Depth lnteraction Line

t3
This procedure shows you how to launch the Depth interaction
o tool and set the depth interaction line.
1. Open a LogView layout.
o 2. Activate the mode by clicking dedicated
mode toolbar.
ti in the Mouse

3. On the layout, left-click at the desired depth on the LogView

o where the interaction line is to be inserted (this is now your

starting point). The red line now can be moved up or down.

o
a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 23s
Depth Interaction, Interactive Selection Mode, Zonation, and Markers Schlumberger
o
When moving up and down in a LogView, only the selected
depth intervals will be displayed in the plots or in the table. O
, NOTE: This functionality works by well, meaning that
connected objects have to be part of the same well set.

4. You can run the Depth interaction tool using a sliding depth
o
window. Crossplots are able to listen and display values
according to the zone of interest defined in the layout.
Activate the sliding depth window mode in one of these
o
ways:
. Right-click on the red depth interaction line and select
Activate the window mode.
a
. Left-click on the depth interaction line, then change the
associated property named Active window mode to yes in
the Properties window.
a
5. (Optional) Open and synchronize other objects (such as
another LogView with different variables or any single well
O
plot) with your LogView depth.
b. (Optional) Open the 3DVue or Data editor. The listening
status of each object must be set to ON, so that each open
o
window will listen to the layout.
Toggle ON listening mode. Rightclick on the background of
each window and click E Listening mode ON. The icon
o
displays in green.

Exercise 1 Using the Depth lnteraction Too!

o
ln this exercise, you use the depth interaction tool. Before starting
the exercise, you will need to re-open several objects saved in
o
previous exercises.

You also need to organize the windows so these four objects are
o
displayed.

TIP: lt is best to use Dashboard mode. O

.
.
.
Layout:Well1_SHORT
Histogram: GAMMA_RAY_HISTOGRAM o
Crossplot: Welll_DATAFULL_NEUT_DENS_GAMM)
. A Data editor table.
O
236 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Depth lnteraction, lnteractive Selection Mode, Zonation, and l\,larkers

From the LogView Welll_SHORT layout, activate depth

o
1.
interaction mode by clicking tt Depth interaction in the
toolbar.

o 2. Click at the desired depth on the LogView layout where to

insert the interaction line.
3. Activate the sliding depth window mode by right-clicking on

o the interaction line and selecting Activate the window

mode.
After the window is activated in the layout, you can modify

a the top and bottom of the interaction window on the LogView

layout manually.
TIP: You also can manually enter the top and bottom in the
o Depth synchronization Properties window.

4. Activate Depth listening mode for the plots by right-clicking on

U

o the background of each window, then clicking

mode ON to change its color to green.
N Listening

5. Activate the listening status for the Data editor table by

a selecting Tools > § Listening mode ON.

The display is now ready for depth interaction.

o 6. Scroll on the depth interaction window on the LogView

display and view the results on the histogram and crossplot.
Only the points included in the depth interaction window
display on the plots.
o ln the Data editor window, the depth corresponding to the
exact location of the interaction line appears in red; the

o depths corresponding to the lnteraction window appear in

gray.
Refer to the figure that follows.

o
o
o
o
a Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013 237
Depth lnteraction, lnteractive Selection Mode, Zonation, and Markers Schlumberger
o
isEEt!::lIr3!iâÊtlEit§EËr:!6!et!i§
É8lrt9g99rÉ99tàa3tat5âa.t8-eÉàt99:
â
t o
§E!iIââiiâE!3!!E!§!E§!iE§iâÊâEâ!iâ Ê

tà§rt:tÊt!ttFÉti*:5;:âtâttsâ?:rtà:
â.â;t35àt-tgârt&tÈiltÊtirâtt;îttlt
B::;tît*tI3tI*ttEaÈlÉliit;râI:i!::
t o
il o
a
!.1
o
o
t
o
I
I O
!
a

88
o
r
o
I
!
i§
a
ot
o
I O
o
238 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 201 3
o
o Schlumberger Depth lnteraction, Interactive Selection l/ode, Zonation, and Markers

7.
o Move the depth interaction in LogView, modify the size of
the window, and observe the results in the different windows.
8. To remove the depth interaction window, select it and press

o 9.
Delete.
Deactivate the listening mode for plots and table to display all
data.

o Do not modify the display; you will re-use it in the next lesson.

Lesson 2 lnteractive Selection Mode

a lnteractive selection mode allows you to create interaction

a between the plots and other viewers (layouts, tables). You can
select the points using two methods:

Polygon selection

o lnteractive selection mode

,r
o NOTE: lnteraction only works between viewers on the same
workspace. You cannot connect two viewers in two
different workspaces.

o Procedure 1 Using lnteraction in the General

Workspace 13
o ln the Techlog workspace, you can activate interaction between a
layout, Data editor, a crossplot (2D and/or 3D), histogram,

o Spectrum analyzer, or spider plot.

1. Click and hold to display the full drop-down menu of o

o 2.
lnteractive selection mode.
Select a brush color.
3. Brush over the layout or plot to select points or depth

o intervals. Points selected will be highlighted in the other open

plots or layouts.

o
o
a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 239
Depth lnteraction, Interactive Selection Mode, Zonation, and I/arkers Schlumberger
o
tr Exercise 1 Working with lnteraction in the
General Workspace a
For this exercise, you reuse the display used in the depth
interaction exercise. o
. Layout: Welll_SHORT (clear the STRATIGRAPHY zonation

.
selection from the Zonation dock window)
Histogram: GAMMA_RAY_HISTOGRAM
O
.
.
Crossplot: Welll_DATAFULL_NEUT_DENS_GAMM)
A Data editor table: GAMM, DENS, NEUT, and SONI. o
1. Click and hold to display the full drop-down menu of the
O lnteractive selection mode.
o
2. Select the LogView layout.
3. The interactive selection color is blue by default. Change the
o
color.
a. Click the small triangle on the lnteractive selection icon
to open the drop-down menu.
o
b. Select the green brush color.
c. Choose some intervals on the log. Observe the results
the other plots and in the table.
on o
I
o
I2
3 o Select
o
(T
*
4
aOO one color on the list..
' ..* Cancel selection:
.4 Edit..
o
lI t-ist initialization X Detete
Dataset list
O
X Delete...

H
H
Create a labeling variable from selection,..

Save the variables zonâtion from the selection,..

o
I
,J loaA from Yariable.-
o
240 Techlog Fundanrentals, Version 2013
o
O Schlumberger Depth Interaction, lnteractive Selection Mode, Zonation, and Markers

o 4. Go to the histogram plot, select a second brush color, and

choose some bins on the histogram.
5. Observe the results on the other plots and table.

o 6. Go to the crossplot, select a third brush color and choose

some points on the crossplot. Observe the results on the
other plots and in the table.

o 7. Go to the Data editor, select a fourth brush color, and

choose some points on the crossplot. Observe the results on
the other plots and in the table.

a
o
o
o
o
a
o
li
o
o ;â
i"
:l
ir
I:
i:
o 3

:
ri rl
"i

O
J
t

o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 20'1 3 241

Depth Interaction, lnteractive Selection l\,lode, Zonation, and Markers Schlumbergêr
O
8. lf you made an error in selection, use
eraser to clear the bad points.
the " lnteractive
a
You also can select the category of points to remove.
9. Remove only the blue selection.
a. Click the mouse and hold to display the full drop-down
o
menu of the " lnteractive eraser.
b. Go to the blue drop-down menu and select. x Cancel
selection.
o
a
.
o
Seled

l
.4 Edir-

+ Add one color on the list...

X Delete o
I List initialization

Dataset list
o
x Delete...
O
lËt Create a labeling variable from selection...

fT
tà
Save the variables zonation

Load from variable...

from the selection...
o
10. Delete all of the selected point-intervals.
O
11. ln the drop-down menu of the ' lnteractive eraser, select
Al! > . i Cancel selection.
12. Close the LogView display as well as the table and plots. o
O
o
o
242 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 20'1 3
o
O Schlumberger Depth lnteraction, Interactive Selection Mode, Zonation, and i/arkers

2
o Exercise Creating a Zonation Dataset using
lnteractive Selection A
o ln this exercise, you create a zonation dataset for wells 1,2,3, 4,
and 9 using the tnteractive selection tool. For each well, you will
select the seal, reservoir, and water zone.

o 1.
2.
Open the Welll_SHORT layout.
Because you will be working with all five wells in this
exercise, you can simplify the layout. Remove the VSH,

a FACIES, and TVDSS Tracks and clear the STRATIGRAPHY

zonation from the Zonation dock window.
3. Apply this layout to another dataset in the same layout
o 4.
(select the DATAFULL dataset for the five wells).
Define the color of the interaction. For this exercise, use
. light brown for the seal
O . red for the reservoir
. dark blue for the water.
o 5. Select another color (different from the four default colors):
a. Left-click on one of the colors and select Edit in the drop-

o down menu.
b. Add other colors to the default list by clicking Add one
color on the list.
a 6. Using the brush colors, define the seal, reservoir, and water
zone for each well.

o
O
o
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 20'1 3 243
Depth Interaction, Interactive Selection Mode, Zonation, and Markers Schlumberger

7. After selections are complete, go to the O lnteractive

selection drop-down menu and select tJ Save the
variables zonation from the selection.

o
o
8. ln the Save the interaction as zonation window, enter the
name zonation Interactive Selection and click OK.
o
@ Sarc thc intcnanm 6 ô zilëtion

Zonation name: Zonation-Interactive_Selection

o
OK Cancel o
9. Remove the selected intervals using the Interactive
eraser by selecting All > . i Cancel selection. o
10. Select the Zonation_lnteractive_Selection zonation from the

11 .
Zonation dock window.
Modiÿ the colors to have the same color code: light brown
o
for the seal, red for the reservoir, and dark blue for the water
zone.
a
o
o
244 Iechlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
a Schlumberger Depth lnteraction, lnteractive Selection Mode, Zonation, and Markers

12. Right-click in the reservoir zone and align the zones using
O the reservoir top.

o
o
e
o
o
Lesson 3 Zonation
O
A zonation is a specific dataset that stores your zones of interest

o as intervals. ln the Project browser, these datasets are displayed

with this icon El (Figure 57) and are defined with the Dataset type
lnterval in the Properties window (Figure 58).

O Preiact b,row'ar ?x

O Proj€cti Dr\Do(uments\Techlog-Prc ^
' iiï"i;;"r
o i I oatarull
.L mde,
,ILec

o , Ê
.'l t"ttcp
stnalcRapHv
{t uo

o ,. i suRvev
"., Tl-wellPàth ,
. ,

o Figure 57 Zonation dataset

a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 245

Depth Interaction, Interactive Selection Mode, Zonation, and Markers Schlumberger
o
E
":' PropGrüæ
OU.;ect DâtËct WeIII.STRATIGRAPHY)
a
I name
Dataset STMflGRAPHY
o
i type
Dataset I interval
o
I
' Well name Welll
Number of samples 5

i Reference family Measured Depth

i
i

i
Reference name
Reference unit
MD
ft o
i ,oo 731s (ft)
i Bottom
i Sampling rate
8215 (ft)
unknown
o
I Reference (estimâÎed) 225 ft
i ' Creation date
I Date Mon Dec 3 2012 o
i rir. 12:06:06

o
I

I ' Last modification

i Date Mon Dec 3 2012
I Time 14:02:30

Figure 58 Properties of the zonation dataset o

Each zone is defined with a top and a bottom. The Top and
Bottom values can be easily displayed by dragging the zonation
dataset into a Data editor window. ln Figure 59, the zone name at
O
depth 7,494 is defined by a missing value. As a result, ZoneC and
ZoneE are not contiguous and there is a gap between depths
7,494 and 7,907.
O
Each zonation is defined by a reference curve and at least one
curve defined with the family Zone Name (Figure 62). Other
information such as Zone description, Hydraulic zones, Fault
o
block, and Zones parameters can be present in the dataset.
o
o
o
246 Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
O Schlumberger Depth lnteraction, lnteractive Selection Mode, Zonation, and Markers

o By comparison, there is no gap between ZoneB and ZoneC,

because the bottom of ZoneB is the top of ZoneC.

o
Dàtà eclitor

o vo lzoruE-ruave
731s1 731s zoneB
tæzl ru32 zonec

o tlreltæaZ
,lsrl l
azrsl
t*t zonet
azr zoner

o Figure 59 Zonation definition

)

o Procedure 1 Using aZonation

EI
a You can use zonations in all Techlog modules (LogView, Plots,
Data editor, AWI). Zonation selection is performed in the
Zonation dock window.

o 1. ln the Zonation
drop-down list.
dock window, choose the zonation in the

a El Zonation
Zonation:
Zonation-Quick_Sand
. x

O Zonation_Advanced
Zonation_Facies

O Zonation_f rom-M a rkers

Zonation_lnteractive_Selection
Zonation_Quick

o Zonation_Quick-Sand
EErr.-
lzon-u
lZone-l5
o lzorre-2
IZoæ-END

o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 247
Depth lnteraction, lnteractive Selection Mode, Zonation, and lrlarkers schlumberger O
2. Choose the zones to use.

E Zonation i x
Zonation:
STRATIGRAPHY

t:
ZoneB

o
o
ZoneS

Several options are available from the Zonation dock

window. When you right-click within the window, the menu in
the figure appears. The commands in this menu allow you to
display the interzones, define the color and the pattern of the
o
zones, and change the name.
Display the rnlerzones
o
Display the repeated zones

Propâgate selection ' o

,ll Zone sort

!
i,
Define zone color..
Define zone pattern...
o
3 Automàtic zone colors definitron

E
Display the

RÊnamethezone
patterns Ctrl +Alt+z, C
O
E Define as delault zonation
a
Copy the zone table

'.,;." -'. .. ,,: :

o
a
{El Savethezonationas,..

o
o
248 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 O
o Schlumberger Depth lnteraction, Interactive Selection Mode, Zonation, and [,larkers

3. (Optional) Display zones in the Zonation dock window with

a check boxes, icons, or both.
a. Right-click within the Zonation dock window.

o b. Select Display > Display checkboxes or Display >

Display icons.

o Lesson 4 Zone Editor

The Zone editor allows you to easily create and edit zonation
O datasets. Zone settings, such as color and comment, also are
accessible and editable using this tool.

o The Zone editor view is based on a tree representation of the

zonation (Figure 60).

o : Zone editor (zonation: STRAnGRAPHY reference: Measured Depth. unit ft)

zeË1*-------l!ueu wettf lwetta !Wel19

. I Zon€8
o Ô top
I bottom
711 t.000
9999
e !

I
ZoneC

o t lZoneD
l*," 7432.m
-9999

I top
o I bottom
t lZoneE
.;::j;i,,. 1494.000
.',,1,. - -9999

o l*3*, I 7907.000
-9999

I
t lZoteF
8215,000
Î-:ï*,
o r! ZoneS
-9999

a
1*3*, I -9999.000
-9999.000

au10

o Figure 60 Top and bottom for each zone and well in the Zone
editor

O
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 249
Depth Interaction, Interactive Selection Mode, Zonation, and Markers Schlumberger
o
Each node represents a zone. The wells appear in each column
and the zone top or bottom depths are displayed in rows. Each
cell displays the depth value at the top and bottom of a zone for a
o
o
particular well. An empty or missing value in a cell means that no
value is defined for the cell.

TIP: The order in which the wells appear can be changed by

dragging the well names into the Zone editor header. You
can rearrange the order of the zones either by dragging a
zone or with the shortcuts Ctrl + up-arrow or Ctrl + down-
a
arrow.

To launch the editor, select Data > Zone editor.

a
*..Eæl o
ffi Array editor
ÿ Graphical zone editor
AB Welt editor (Legacy) o
Figure 61 Launch the Zone editor
o
Procedure 1 Loading and Editing Data in the
Ifl Zone Editor
o
1. Open the Zone editor from Data tab > Zone editor.
2. Drag wells into the Zone editor window.
3. Choose a zonation in the Zonation dock window.
o
4. Select the zones to edit.
5. After the data load, double-click on a cell to edit it.
o
TIP: You can edit name and depth.

When a zone is selected, the lower part of the window o

updates to show the zone color and description. You can
change the color if needed.
a
o
o
250 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Depth lnteraction, lnteractive Selection Mode, Zonation, and Markers

6. Assign a random color to a zone color by clicking auto or

o choose a color by clicking the colored square to the left of the
text field.

I Zone editor (zonation: STMIIGMPHY refr x

O d!
r-

Zones

o .lZone|
I top 8215.000
I bottom -9999

a . ! ZoneS
t top

o
. A L.A--

auto zoneF modified

7. Modiÿ the description of the zone in the text field. All of your
o changes are recorded when you save the zonation.

Procedure 2 Adding aZone

o 1. Click Add zone E.
rf
2. ln the Zonation window, enter the name of the new zone and
O click OK.

$
e
Zætinn

Name of the new zone:

New_Zone

o OK Cancel

o lf an item was selected previously, the new zone is listed

after the selected item; otherwise, it is inserted at the bottom.
NOTE: A deleted zone is ignored, while a hidden zone (clear a
a the selection in the dock window) is taken into account
when you set values for the zones or save the
zonation.

o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 251
Depth lnteraction, lnteractive Selection l\ilode, Zonation, and l\rarkers Schlumberger
o
3. Remove a well from the editor using the top header
contextual menu (right-click on the well name to remove). o
I Zone editor (zonatioru STMIIGRAPHY ref, x
d!
Zones I wettr
-'----''t-
Sort using this column
a
r§
o
ZoneF
Reload the information of this well
{t top
0 bottom X Remove the column Welll
.!
..
ZorreS

t top
-.--,.Er---*
a
o
auto zoneF modified

4. After all changes are complete, save the zonation by clicking

Save [J. The zonation dataset is saved in every well present
in the editor. o
, NOTE: When a zonation is saved, if the top of a zone is
empty or contains a null value, the zone is skipped. lf
the bottom of a zone is empty or contains a null
value, the top is saved and the bottom is considered
o
to be the top ofthe next zone.
o
o
o
o
a
o
o
252 Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
 Depth lnteraction, lnteractive Selection Mode, Zonation, and Markers
O schtumberger

o Miscellaneous Options
There are several additional options available in the Zone editor
Properties window (Figure 62).
o " Propcrtics .x
3 oolect Zone cditor

o Property Vàlue

Reference Measured Depth

a name
Zonation
Background zone color
STRAilGRAPHY
yes

width
Fix the columns

o
50
precision
Values 3

Valueformat f:[-]9.9

o Display the missing va... yes

Display the informatio... yes
Update the editor afte... yes

o Figure 62
Save with the original ...

Zone editor Properties window

no

o There are several conflgurable properties in the Zone editor

Properties window.

e Unit
Reference
Define the unit in which to display values.
Choose the type of reference with which
to work.

a All the wells present must have the data

needed to use the selected tyPe of
reference.
O Zonation Name Enter the name of the zonation.
Background zone Display the zone color as background
o color
Values precision
color for the item.
Set the precision with which the values

o Values format
are displayed.
Change the way numbers are
represented.

o
Techlog Fundamentals, version 2013 253
O
Depth lnteraction, lnteractive Selection lvlode, Zonation, and [,larkers Schlumberger O

Update the editor Set this to update the editor when the
zone
after selection is changed in the Zonation a
selection window and the editor is not the active
window.

This option is useful when using zones in

o
LogView and editing at the same time.
Use maximal
precisionwhen
Save values with the maximum precision
available or with the currently displayed
o
saving
Save with the
precision.

lf this option is set to True, each zonation

original reference dataset is saved using a reference
a
identical in type to the original one (if the
dataset was already present). o
lf this is set to False, zonation datasets
are saved using the current reference
type.
o
TIP: Use Ctrl + A to expand/collapse all items.
o
a Exercise 1 Editing a Zonation
ln this exercise, you manually edit a zone using the Zone editor.
O
1. Select Data > Techdata > Zoneeditor. a
2. Drag Well1, Well2, Well3, Well4, and Well9 into Zone editor.
3. ln the Zonation dock window, choose STRATIGRAPHY. O

a
o
o
a
254 ïe*rlog Fundanfftab, Version 2013 O
o Schlumberger Depth Interaction, lnteractive Selection Mode, Zonation, and Markers

4. values.
o HI
:
Expand ZoneD to display the top and bottom

Zone editor (zonation: STRATIGMPHY refereme: Measured Dept[ unit ft)

I

I
x

:-'-liwàttz -ltMi4
%Ë-- ----
a I ZoneB
! ZoneC
frweru
7315.000
7432.W
7467.W0
7582.W
liweir3
1373.W
7491.000
Itwàls-
7405.500
7528.W
10537,000
10675.000
|

. JZoneD

o .l top
+ bottom
I ZoneE
74Y.m
-9999
7907.000
7674.W
-9999
8222.W
7580.000
-9999
7715.W
7621.ffi
-9999
8218.000
10815.400
-9999
11233.500

! Zonet 8490.500
o 8215.000 -9999.000 8253.000 -9999.000

! ZoæS -9999.000 -9999.000 8518.000 8719.000 -9999.000

auto

o 5. Edit the bottom of ZoneD in Welll to create a gap between

ZoneD and ZoneE.

o :
l,l I
/orcs
Zone editor (zonation STRAilGRAPHY relerence: Measured Dept[ unit

werrr jrwerrz ltwettl ]rw"r+ ltwetts

ft) x

o
I

I E ZoneB 7373,000 7405.500

7315.000 7467.000 10537.000

E Zonec 7432,0æ 7582.000 7491.000 7528.000 10675.000

.! ZoneD
I lop 75E0.000 10815.400

O ,
I ,E
.} bott..
ZoneE
-9999

+ top

o !
r !
I bon..
ZoneF
ZoneS
8215.000
-9999.000

a auto

6. Click Add zone E and name it zonec.

o 7. Choose the new zone.
8. Right-click on ZoneG and select Fill the row with > The
total depth (TD) of each well in the contextual menu.
9. Click Save the Zonation kl.
10. Name the new zonation STRATIGRAPHY_EDlT.
11 . Verify that this zonation has been created in all five wells.
12. ln the Zonation dock window, choose the new zonation

o STRATIGRAPHY-EDIÏ

Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 255

Depth Interaction, lnteractive Selection lvlode, Zonation, and l\,larkers Schlumberger
o
13. Choose ZoneS.
14. Right-click and select Define Zone Golor. o
15. Choose a color in the pane.

Procedure 3 Creating aZoîe with the Quick

O
Zone Creation Tool

1. ln LogView, click Zone creation +! in the dynamic toolbar.

o
2. Delimit the different zones by left-clicking at desired positions
directly in the layout. a
3. Select Save > E Save the zones....
The zones appear and a text log (second track) has been
inserted automatically into the layout.
o
You can edit this text curve to add comments about each
zone. O
4. From a graphical point of view, this ZoneName track also is
customizable.
a. Select the text variable. o
b. Navigate to the Properties window and click the Display
options tab.
All the properties under the Text zone allow you to edit the
o
display settings of the text zones.

GraphicalTools for Editing Zones

t
There are several options available in LogView for editing
zonations. These options are accessed by clicking Zone editing
a
in zonation tracks..I.
.
.
Add azone
Split a zone
o
.
.
Merge a zone
Disconnect two zones
a
. Move the top of a zone
. Delete a zone. O
a
256 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
a Schlumberger Depth lnteraction, lnteractive Selection lvlode, Zonation, and Markers

Add a Zone
a Click on a depth with no zone to add a new zone (Figure 63). Click
to incorporate a new top.

O
,

a
o
Figure 63 Adding a zone
o Split a Zone

a When you click on a zone, it is split into two zones (Figure 64)
Click in the zonation track to incorporate a new top.

o
e
I
a Figure 64 Splitting a zone

o
o
o
a Tæhlog Fundâmentals, Version 20'13 257
 schtumberger
Depth lnteraction, lnteractive Selætion Mode, Zonation, and Markers
O
Merge a Zone
When you delete the top of a zone that is connected to another
zone, the zones are merged with the priority given to the upper
o
zone (Figure 65).

,r'!to (
r{
o
o'
E

,r15
( o
N
O
a
r
N
,uto o'
E
o

7æ3
N
o
Figure 65 Merging zones

To merge a zone, move the cursor over a top, select it and press
o
Delete. Notice that the cursor changes during this operation.
o
Disconnect Two Zones
To disconnect two zones, click on the bottom grip of a zone and
move the cursor upwards. Notice that the cursor becomes an
o
arrow for this task (Figure 66).

a
a
o
\
G rip
o
Figure 66 Disconnecting two zones
o
o
258 ïechlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Depth lnteraction, Interactive Selection Mode, Zonation, and N,larkers

Move the Top of a Zone

O Change the top depth by clicking on the top of a zone and moving
the cursor up or down (Figure 67).

O 77fl ,r51t

o ,775 ,775

a 7A{Xt ,a(x,

o 7o73

Figure 67 Moving to the top of a zone

7525

o Delete a Zone
To delete a zone, place the cursor over a zone name and press
o Delete (Figure 68).

o
7rfi 779()

7775 ,775

o ,aa,,J 7A(X!

o ,a25 7423

o Figure 68 Deleting a zone

o
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 259
Depth interaction, lnteractive Selection l\,lode, Zonation, and [,tarkers Schlumberger
o
n Exercise 2 Creating Zones using the Quick
Zone Creation Tool c
ln this exercise, you create your own zonation from the LogView
window using the quick zone creation tool. o
1. Open the Welll_SHORT layout.
2. ln the Zonation dock window, remove the STRATIGRAPHY
zonation.
o
3. ln the dynamic toolbar, click +E Quick zones creation.
4. For this exercise, you will delimit the main sand bodies using
O
the Quick zone creation tool. Delimit the different zones by
left-clicking at the desired positions directly in the same track
of the layout. o
5. Select six to eight sand bodies.
6. Save the zonation as Zonation_Quick_Sand by selecting
Save > H Save the zones.
o
,E Zonation-Quick-Sand
o
1"o
ZoneDescription
O
The new zones appear in the Zonation dock window. Some
adjustments are needed because the intervals between the
sand bodies should be left empty.
o
a
o
o
O
o
260 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
a
o Schlumberger Depth lnteraction, lnteractive Selection Mode, Zonation, and Markers

7. Click ,I
a to change the mouse mode and modify the zones
limits, or add additional zones.
t

o
I

o
a
o
o
o
o
o
After allof the sand bodies have been identified, assign a
o
8.
yellow color to all the zones:
a. Go to the Zonation dock window.

o b. Select all of the zones, right-click and select

zone color.
t Oefine

c. Select yellow.
a 9. Verify that there is no zone between your sand bodies by
activating the Display the interzones option from the Zonation
dock window.

o ln the LogView layout, the intezones are now visible.

o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 261
Depth lnteraction, lnteractive Selection Mode, Zonation, and Markers Schlumberger
o
ln the Zonation dock window, the zonation name now
appears with an asterisk (-). This indicates that the zone has
changed.
O
10. Save the zonation by right-clicking in the Zonation dock
window and selecting &! Save the zones. o
11. Click OK. The window shown here appears.

E zonton
Zonation:
=x o
Zonation_Quick_Sand'
Zone_1
IZone-l'rZone-3
IZone-3
ÿ{.I!I+ a
aîÀ-saonz , 9-':p'"v_t':p":*':""'
Izone2
tià,Iizo,*-z -- ":oT-"-t-*lT:i ,
o
lzore-r- al zonesort
lZoæ7iZoæ

IZone
Zone 8
8 Zone
8

-q
a
o
Zone_9
IZone-9lone-l1 O Automatic zon€ colors definition
Zone-11
Displav the patterns ctrl*Alt+Z' c
ri"."_ii,2"."_rz

I
Zone_72
lZone-12izone-13
Zone-13
Zone-13iZone-14
tl Define as defàult zonation
o
I
Zone-14
Zone-i4rZone-i 5
Zone_15
Izone_15tzone_2 copy the zone table
o
Zone2
IZone-2iZone-EN
Zone-END
D H
Ll
Savethezonation
Savethezonation as...
a
IZone -ENDiEND
F
!
Cancel the zonation changes

Zone family...
o
?
Display

titter
o
o
a
262 ïæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Depth lnteraction, lnteraclive Selection Mode, Zonation, and Markers

Zones Manager
o The Zones manager is an advanced feature that allows you to
pick zones in a LogView layout (Figure 69).

o Editin
Fffi
o rlT........El
folda Nam€
à dolmil? I -2
I é
.*
-.
-
light
ËY Clean
Sônd
Shaly sand
I
::...;
ililiiilii.,,:
rLi',',:!''.t'

Sh.lÿ r.îdlIhn bcdÉ

o
* Shale Shaly ,nt6Yâ13

^ Carbonôle Il9m
tiltcr

l,.tu*, '^roj 3

o Zoætion dàta-t:

t{ôm - Color D"rript.on

irL-qjTlî-l +

5
ZmB Zmlrojrrdrctilt
o Zoncc
ZmO
Zoî.8
Zoî.1im_rrom_tfaûa6
Zonalid-txraJ
Zmrim-qrid
Zoôâfioll-Aalvâ,rc€d

o
Zo aç
Zon s I I
Selection

o Figure 69 Zones manager

The Zones manager is globally subdivided in two parts: Selection

o area and Editing area.

Editing The upper section of the window displays both the

area newly created zones and the zones that were
o edited from previous datasets (the zones moved
from the lower section to the upper section).

o There is a toolbar (1) with actions to add, edit,

delete, and update the zones to create or edit items
and a search field (2) allows you to retrieve objects

o quickly.

ln addition, you can apply filters (3) to restrict the

display and availability of a zone, depending on the

o fo ld er leve I (U se r/P roj e cUCo m p a n ylTe c h I og) .

a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 263

Depth lnteraction, lnteractive Selection Mode, Zonation, and Markers Schlumbergel
o
Selection The lower section of the window corresponds to the
area existing zonation datasets available in the project. )
You can choose any of the zonation datasets in the
drop-down list (5) and move them to the upper
window using the two arrow buttons (4). o
You can choose either the overall zonation set or
selected zones
o
4 Picking Zones in LogView using
13
Procedure
Zone Manager a
The Zones manager is an advanced feature that allows you to
pick zones in a LogView layout. ln this procedure, you use the
Zones manager.
o
1.
2.
Open a LogView layout to pick zones.
ln the dynamic toolbar, click and hold on the +! icon and click
a
Advanced zones creation. The Zones manager
Er'
opens.The first time you open the Zones manager, it is
empty. Create the Zones/Facies.
a
a. Click Add a new zone *.
b. ln the New zone properties window, define
.
o
Name and Description for the zone
. Color and Pattern
O
. Level in which you wish to save the zone (Project, User,
or Company).
c. Click OK. The new zone is added lo lhe filtered zones lisl. a
d. Modify the zones by selecting ".
e. Remove a zone from the list by selecting X Delete
selected zones.
a
3. ln the zones lisl, select the zone/facies to be picked.
4. Go back to LogView. The cursor now is different and shows
the zone/facies to be picked.
a
5. Brush the intervals that belong to the selected zone/facies.
TIP: You can use the Advanced zone creation tool with
o
several wells at the same time.
U
a
264 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Depth lnteraction, lnteractive Selection Mode, Zonation, and Markers

6. Switch to the next zone/facies to be picked and repeat Step 2

O through Step 4.
7. Before saving the zones, move the top and bottom of the

o 8.
zones by hovering the mouse above the zones/facies or
delete a zone by pressing Delete.
When you are done picking the zones/facies, select Save >

o H Save the zones.

3
t Exercise Picking Lithologies using
Advanced Zones Creation
ln this exercise, you define lithologies using the Advanced zone

o creation tool.
1. Open the Welll_SHORT layout.

o 2. From the Zonation dock window, remove the

STRATIGRAPHY zonation.
3. ln the dynamic toolbar, select E/ Advanced zones creation.

o 4.
The Zones manager opens.
Create a lithology.

o a. Click the Add a new zone * icon.

b. ln the New zone properties window, define
. Sand

o .
.
Color
Pattern.

o c. ln the Patterns browser window, enter the first letters of

the lithology you wish to select to reduce the list.

o
o
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
a^Â
Depth lnteraction, lnteractive Selection l\,lode, Zonation, and Markers Schlumberger
o
d. Select to save the facies at the Project level and click OK.
The new zone is added to the filtered zores list. o
f ,*-r"t*
Nam lsam I
ËtüBhffi

[æ
l-l ræ
t-'-..,.----.--.. Pàtt.rn
o
lE Msiw snd or endsoæ
l**"*l R!ppl"-!Cq.dqq land ot e!.j
lE lsano
lE
lE sana«oæ
lE sanoy ootosoæ or dolomite
lE s*"tiææ
.+-::+-: +- .+- .+
o
a
Descrigtron:

Proj«1 r âCompanÿ r El«hlog

co,or:

Leve
t-------------__ltr
ProJect
o
@ c"*",
a
5. Repeat Step 4 and create these lithologies: Shaly sand,

6.
Shale, and Carbonate.
ln the zones list, select the first lithology to be picked, Shale
o
--
E ZOneSmanager
'Àa
Y'
o
toider -]ru.rn"
Sand
Shaly sand
lColor I cattern ; Description
l;i;l;!;i;l;i;l;i;i; Clean sand
' .:. ' .:. ' .-Shaly sand./Thin oeds
o
Shale
Carbonate
interva is
a
tilter
.: User 't Project Y â Company rl El Techlog
o
Zonation dataset:
Name - rColor lPanern ]Description
-it
a
O
o
266 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 20'13
o
o Schlumberger Depth lnteraction, Interactive Selection Mode, Zonation, and Markers

o 7. Go back to LogView. The cursor now is different and the

Shale pattern lithology appears.
8. Brush the intervals that correspond to Shale lithology.
9. Continue the exercise to identify Sand, Shaly sand, and
O Carbonate.
TIP: You can move the top and bottom of the zones by

o hovering the mouse above the zones/facies or delete a

zone.

o 10. When you are done picking the lithologies, select Save >
H Save the zones and name the zone
Zonation Advanced.

o sana, -

o.45
C
sàJe
PHI
(ND)

{.15
BS-OK ru
I {.25 qca
O
IN O.25
ioNt æPR reu rI
Refcacncc 40 ffit 2@o rsH-I TVOSS
(fr) Æm FACIESO4 (fr)
lr5oO pt tq o,2 oHMM 2000 qç 0uG6 l:500

o 7400

7425

o 7450

7475

a 7500

7525

o 7550

7575

o 7600

762s

a 7650

7675

O 11 . lt appears that one lithology (Coal) is missing. To reopen the

Advanced zone creation window, select Edit > E,' Edit zones

o 12. ln the Zone manager, create a new lithology named Coal.

o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 267

Depth lnteraction, lnteraclive S€lection Mode, Zonation, and Markers Schlumberger
o
13. Select the coal interval in the layout (around 8161 ft). You

14.
can take this opportunity to refine your lithological analysis.
When you are done, save the zone as described in Step 10
a
and retain the name Zonation_Advanced.
Keep the layout open for the next exercise. o
Exercise 4 Using a Zonation to Define an Area
Fiil
o
Geologists use the Advanced zone creation tool to identify
facies from borehole images. A very convenient way to present
a
results is to use the Gamma ray measurement and add shading
corresponding to facies analysis.

ln this exercise, you use the lithology determined to apply this

o
method.

1. lnsert a new normal track. a

2. Drag the GAMM variable into the new track.
3. Select the track and remove the zone display
Go to the Ordinary track Properties window.
for this track. o
Open the Display options tab.
Set the Display property to no.
O
,I Zones
Display no
o
r fill
o
Area
-':l i., -,
Area fill type color

4.
Display ÿpe below the grids

Select the GAMM variable, right-click and select r-,

I

Add fill
o
5.
to the higher limit.
Select a temporary color for the fill. a
6. Click on the area fill and go to the Properties window.
7. For the Type property, select zonation, then the name of the
zonation to use, Zonation Advanced.
o
a
268 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Depth lnteraction, lnteractive Selection Mode, Zonation, and Markers

8. Set the Color mode to pattern.

o Propertie =x
r. Object: Fill to the highcr limit (Unknown)

o Property
Name
lvatue
Unknown
t^
I
r.l Variable

o r
Opacity
Display in the header
:

Type zonatron

O ll FillirU orientatior
llll p color
ll
o nattem
E Zonation

o
-
a The area fill object now is using Zonation-Advanced as a
filling pattern.

o È

.9
!

"8r
a l:@

7375

72()0

o 7125

7450

7475

o
7500

1525

7550

o
'7575

7@0
.7623

7650

o 7675

7700

7725

o '7750

o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 269

Depth lnteraction, lnteractive Selection Mode, Zonation, and Markers Schlumbergêr
a
Lesson 5 Markers
o
The new dataset type markers are available in Techlog and
correspond to a top or bottom of a zone. You can create markers
directly in LogView or import them from a file such as.txt or ./as. O
Markers are managed in the same way as Zonation, from the
Markers dock window.
o
1 Exercise 1 Greating a Markers Dataset
Double-click on the CALIPER_GAMMARAY_SONIC track
template and apply this track to the Well1, Well2, and Well3
o
2.
DATAFULL datasets.

ln the LogView dynamic toolbar, click ÿ Create markers

o
over LogView.
3. ln the Markens manager window, create four markers at the
project level.
o
TIP: The Markerc manager works the same as the
Advanced zone creation manager. o
- Markers manâger
+ 'x+ N
o
Foider - lCoto,
a
Name I
Description

']
1

')4
o
o
Filter

/ User Project rf Company .r @ Techtog

-
Marker dataset:

Name -lcotor loesirrptlon 1

o
o
l
o
270 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Depth lnteraction, lnteractive Selection Mode, Zonation, and Markers

4. Select one marker in the upper part of the window and pick
o the marker on the layout for the three wells.
r---r------l
ttt
o I
|
I
t'J""---'i;:----'---i:1

lito.,l
|
16
es-o*
rN 16l
|

Lo l:.0 us F

o I lhr ! c'vt' "i l

I
FD
(ft)
I l!1@ io GAer r5o I
1'l@

7iJtJ(J

o
o
o 7@O 76,0(l

o 77l){) 77(){)

o ffi,l3
,æo 7A{Xt

o Afrer markers are displayed, select Save > Save the

markeni and enter Marker j.
WARNING: Creation mode and editing mode are not the
o same thing. Before you save the markers, you
are working in creation mode; after you have
saved them, you are working in editing mode.

a
o
o
O
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 271
Depth lnteraction, lnteractive Selection Mode, Zonation, and Markers Schlumberger
o
1
trl
Procedure Creating a Marker from Zonation
ln this procedure, you create markers from a zonation dataset.
o
1. ln the Project browser, select a zonation dataset.
2. Right-click and select one of these commands.
o
: Create 'markelrs' set from zone tops: The tops of the
zones define the references of the markers.
o
=
:
Create 'marker' from zone bottoms: The bottoms of the
zones define the references of the markers.
Create 'markels' from zone tops and bottom: The top
o
and the bottoms define the references of the markers.

For example, if a zone is defined by a top and a bottom, two

o
markers will be created, one for the top and one for the
bottom.
o
3. Enter a name for the marker dataset. The newly created
dataset is available in the Project browser.
o
o
o
a
o
o
o
o
272 ïedllog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
 Depth lnteraction, lnteractive Selection Mode, Zonation, and Markers
O schtumberger

Exercise 2 Creating a Marker Dataset from the

STRATIGRAPHY Dataset
fn
ln this exercise, you create a Marker dataset from a specific
zonation dataset.

1. ln the Project browser, create a conditional selection to

select the STRATIGRAPHY dataset for the five wells.
2. Right-click and select 3 Create 'markets' set from zone
tops....
Global managcmcnt
Open/Close

? Refresh the project browser F5

-T Rename t2
: Delete,.. Del
* Prqlcct broütct x Derete definitery... Shift+Del

: Duplicate
ai_UÆ1..Lbr_, Copy selection Ctrl+C
Project D:\Documents\Techlog-Proje
, Datasets
E Quarun
' l+ Add vanable
. wettt Daiàgct managemcnt
E oarnruu
!! Inde,
Ef Datasetcheckup
I Lqc
El GeatC mârker's€t rrom zone topi-
,! t',ltcP
E SfRanCmpXy {T Create 'marker' set from zone bottoms'.

I SUnVgy E Create'marker' set from zone tops and bottoms...

E tL-wettPattr Dru fittcring.nd comp.ri$n

3 Tops ? create â fitter ctrl+J
s: wett2 . create conditional setection ctrl+w
ril wettg
Al wett+
Al wetts Partial load
? R€load the datasets Shift+F5

Hclp
O Interactive help (tlashHTML) F1

Techlog Fundamentals, version 2013 273

O
Depth Interaction, lnteractive Selection lvode, Zonation, and l\,larkers Schlumberger
o
Enter a name for the marker dataset.

EI Màrkudàtàqt Em:
o
Please type the marker dataset name: Strati_TOd
o
oK l- àncei
o
Open the CALIPER_GAMMARAY_SONIC track and apply
this track to the five DATAFULL dataset.
From the Markers dock window, select the Strati_TOP, right-
o
click and automatically assign colors to the markers.

-i M:rkcrs
ÿrati-TOP
9X o
o
I
€t
Define color of selected markers..

Automatac colors defanition o

The markers now are displayed with colors on the LogView
o
display.

---r--
tl..ttttt r---r--*-t r---r--- o
I r----l---r- | l----r- | [-
lElpl
l(htl(rt,l..llriirl
| ',rm F------::-----:-
,llrl
| r,rm T--------=r----

t
:.1 | rrN T- o
/l) o
,l*
l
t
o
[^
I
o
o
274 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 201 3
o
o Schlumberger Depth Interaction, lnteractive Selection Mode, Zonation, and Liarkers

o b. Modify the current markers or add new markers by clicking

7.
Graphical marker editing tool.
Save your modifications. Right-click inside the Markers dock
z:

a window and click

=l Markcrr
tl Save markers....

ax

o Strati_TOP'

q, Define color of selected markers...

o €t
H
Automatic colors def inition

Save markers... N
r^f
§
o Cancel changes...

o Review Questions
. How do you initiate the interactivity between &
o .
the different
viewers (Data editor, Cross-plots, and layouts)?
What methods can you use to create zones?

o .
.
How do you edit zones?
How can you modiÿ the appearance of zones?
.
o .
Can you create a zonation in TVDSS?
How can you delete a specific zone for several wells at the
same time?

o Summary
o ln this module, you learned about:
. depth synchronization

o .
.
depth interaction
zones in the Zone editor
.
a .
graphical tools to create zones in LogView
marker creation and management.

o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 20'1 3 275
Depth lnteraction, lnterâctive Selection Mode, Zonation, and Markers Schlumberger
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
276 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
o
o
o
o
o
,

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
a 81

o
l
o Schlumbe.ger Data Editor

o Module 8 Data Editor

o The Data editor allows you to observe, change, create, export,
import, and discretize data. lt allows you to calculate new
variables or apply mathematical operations to existing curves.

o You can perform the calculations on the entire depth interval or

only in a restricted interval. Additional mathematical operators
include add (+), subtract (-), multiply (*), divide (i), and power ("*).

o Learning Objectives +t, -

o After completing this module, you will know how to:

. access and use the functions in the Data editor window
L#§

o .
.
calculate variables
manage equations
.
o import and export data with Excel.

o
o
o
O
o
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 277
Data Editor Schlumberger
o
fl Lesson 1 Data Editor Window

Launch the Data editor by selecting Data > Data editor. After
o
opening the window, choose one or more datasets or variables
and drag them into the Data editor window (Figure 1). o
You can display variables, variable information, or variable values.
Variable information includes the number of values, standard
deviation, and mean value. Displayed variable values are
o
expressed according to the reference, which is usually depth.

o
CE
Fl vo cru I cnr
uesll zel r:ær
tlsssi zo:os 12.ff 9æ 21s37
2.191 æ.9r3
2.195 199166
{o18
{Jt4 1
c*u ]GAvu-] #Fm bbeling MEDR
cpslc i oeNs oeca i onno ] rqcrsol I rro
4 2 æ.g ÿo33 B3Gæ
2 nZ2 $56
19a311
&15879 19âr4
^ o
o
1 raesol æ:r rz lær 2.1æ 18 9254 {.m7 1 2 âËt 53113 a2Bæ 18.S25
usszl ætts 12.4933 837 22tz7s 2.1s7 18.0$5 {.017 I 2 25521 52261 815879 177Æ
æ ussl le* r: rs: 2.192 17.3155 {fl2 t 2 ntB ,la314 81.GZ) 169921
2 usel Tcrits 12!9or u9 ti.992 2.191 16.6345 {.061 a 2 nax 43.s æ,ss'r!, 16:gB
uml loaa rz.æzo 2.191 15S33 {frl a 2 24.$5 43r' 800879 155361

I
rnxrl zora.s 12.Æ74 æ7 22îns z1æ
usozl rc:e
rnx:l a6ls
u*l ltls
rz.me
12.4911
rz.rs:s
14 8375 {.&s
2.182 13016 {o23
673 21.&37 2.18s 10.6237 {oog
2:O1 8:643
usosl æess 12.4919 s58 24s9fr 2.235 6.4057 {.m5
0
4
a
a
a
a
2
2
2
2
2
Ar.$7 47.55
3253651t3 79IlS )
æÉ2 52IE 785419
yAs 51.71 7Am
79547'

594t2 5195 7,587!)

L1t7g5
ua7æ
10,&)26
4.7453
6.${
o
usl zor rz.læl
usozl zolos rz.ra:z
usoa I zo:z r:.ære
u*el zcrrs u.&
uerol zoæ r:.lssr
24.6926

ro ls.si 2.a7
2.r3 4.s7
2.266 3.9s86
2fi8 32
{.ol
o,o1
0032
2.6æ1 o.ol4
2.329 2.3156 {O19
r
I
a
I
1
2
2
2
2
2
æ486 52t75 nÉB
!9& 5251 76S8t,
41t,58 52,416
46.1:
76087!)
2 529t5 75587)
53.117 54.339 750879
5,ÿ12
40965
3.1182
2Æ2'
2.1674
o
us:rl zæes

Figure
12.492s

1
i.s rg.719r 2.3æ 2.8s1 0.019

Data editor window

1 2 rOï] 56.111 745879 2ol02 ,
o
o
o
o
o
a
278 Tæhlog Fundarnentals, Version 201 3
o
o Schlumberger Data Editor

Data Editor Window Tabs

o The Data editor window has four main tabs: Edit, Display,
Tools, and Save / load. Each tab displays a unique set of task
o icons.

Edit Tab

o There are many actions you can take using the icons on the Edit
tab (Figure 2).

o I .,
I .
Go to row

Find and rephce values

à
o q
ô
"I
Copy cunenl seledion

Copy cunent equation

Ë:
o o É
Paste

Creation of a new dataset

€ .L Creation of a new variable

o Ë
3
X
r-
Remove the selected column

Add one row before the cunent row

o *
*
Add one row afrer the cunent row
Delete the cunent row
Figure 2 lcons on the Edit tab
o These are the functions of icons on the Edit tab.

o û: Go to a specific line. When this icon is activated, dialog

boxes are displayed according to the index setting.
. When the index is toggled to No in the Properties

o dock window, the values are displayed as reference

values (MD).
. When the index is toggled to Yes, the values appear
o ;
as a row number.
Find and replace variable values. This operation can be
applied to a variable or a previously selected area.
o , Copy values into the Data editor

., Paste the copied value into the Data editor

o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 279
 Schlumberger
a
The keyboard shortcut keys are Ctrl + C (copy) and
Ctrl + V (paste). a
f,"
ü
Copy the current equation

Create a new dataset

o
+
=
i8
Create a new (empty) variable
Add a row before the current row o
*
o
I Add a row after the current row

t Delete the current row or column.

A variable can be removed from the Data editor by

selecting the variable and pressing Delete or by right-
clicking on the variable header and selecting Remove
o
Display Tab
There are many actions you can take using the icons on the
o
Display tab (Figure 3).
o
tul I C Switching between vanable mode and data mode

I lsi
fl =
Reference/lndex
columns selectton
ror identifrcation
o
f ç
Ëi É
Merge vanables into an anay
Aüomaticcotumnresizing o
'i ? Recompute statistics

Figure 3 lcons on the Display tab

o
o
o
o
o
280 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
a
o Schlumberger Data Editor

o These are the functions of icons on the Display tab.

€ Switch between Variables mode and Data mode.

o When changing from one mode to another, the same data

appear for statistics values for each variable inside the Data
editor (min, max, mean, or standard deviation).

o gssf
Embh ràdt hr& Bv& hvel#ddffio] rcprclaoce ramraleru«l $nplngrde .

o
I
- -- --ue:rreaoeptt iffi
l{ü-o fr 153 U3 428 2U7 .145 153 Aæ3 0.5

z]ru NMRTI Dirrôûm N ÿ24 ÿfrU ÿW OWN 7453 8815 05

3 otNs Sull oenrny c/C3 2033 2.M 22$§ 0@32U 625 883 0.s

4 WM GmmRry ffi oEl 19.U 33æ2 9æ 413 8rS 0.5

5 NEf Nê(ron hrorûy ÿ/ÿ o&m 0a78æ5 oëff 0D7æ2Ër 7453 8197.5 0.5

o l+i
u] t* compr.trod 9d- 6/r 91& ü19 81535 2tJ§5

Change the row identification from the index to the

û1 &15 0.5 '

ÿ:
o reference.
Available when you drag the array variable into the Data
editor. To activate the option, click on the header column of

o an array variable.

A window appears that allows you to choose which array

columns to display in the editor.
a ç Merge variables into an array. To merge variables, choose
a variable and click this icon.

o A window appears that allows you to customize the column

order of the newly created array. You choose a name using
the blue arrows.

o Please, sort the columns for the output array

o 1
zl
cotumn nàÀe
PC-RE5l2l
nc-nrs1:1
I ramiy -..
Capillary Pressur€ Reservoir (Array)
Capillary Pressure Reservoir (array)
JGi l

o al
al
ec-nrs1+1
ec-nss1s1
sl nc-nes1o1
Capillary Pressure Reservorr (Arrày)
Capillary Pressure Reservoir (Array)
ET
capillary Pressure Reservoir (Arrây)
g
o Merg€d erray name: CAP_Pressure
Apply Cancel

o
o Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 281
Data Editor Schlumberger
o
Fit the column size to the displayed value
EE

? Recompute statistics
O
Tools Tab
There are many actions you æn take using the icons on the Tools
o
tab (Figure 4).

t-l t* Discætize curent variable

o
\;--l*ûr .xporttledatratoExcel
E

O
Sl U lmport tre data torn Excel

t t
o
ftint Eeviei^,

fl t Launcfr the eqr.ra[on

- I >l Launcfi the equaüon on several tabs

§i
ol^
+
,È !
t
open the Equatirn editor
Create an equation
o
3i 4
o
Editoneequatinn
- X
I

Remove one equation

§ Depth listener

Figure 4 lcons on the Tools tab

The option to discretize transforms a quantitative variable into a

o
qualitative variable.
o
o
o
o
o
o
282 ïechlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
a
o Schlumberger Data Editor

o To discretize a variable (GAMM in this example), select the

variable column and click l{ Discretizing current variable. The
Transformation of a quantitative variable into qualitative

o window opens (Figure 5).

E Tr.nttuütid of . qdihiE y.iôL itu qu.li6iÉ

-l
f rr"*
o I nrr.
Lffibqmdary
cnuu-nalts
0

Uppêr bourdary 2û

o Number of interyâl* 10

Pretrx

Modaliti6

O 1
rli-cl
]1
r-omr oounaa..y I t rp.r bd,dary
o.ooooooo æ.ooooooo
I
Name: 1

Lower boundar)4 21.52700@

2 12 2o.oooo@o
,rc.ooooooo
,ro.ooooooo
Upær boundary:
3 13
a
6o.ooooooo
4 14 m.ooooooo Bo.ooooooo
5 ls Bo.ooooooo loo.ooooooo
6 16 lm.oo@ooo l2o.ooooooo
7 17

o
r2o.ooooooo l4o.ooooooo
s 18 l4o.ooooooo l6o.ooooooo
9 19 r6o.mooooo l8o.ooooooo
roi ro lao.ooooooo 2oo.ooooooo

o Figure 5 Discretize current variable

OK Carcel

o By default, the variable is divided into ten equal intervals from its
minimum to its maximum variable value. You can adjust the
default division and choose any number of intervals between 2
o and 200 for the minimum and maximum values, respectively.

You also can redefine the boundaries of each interval to improve

o accuracy. To edit a boundary, select a boundary and double-click

inside the Lower boundary box.

NOTE: You can modify only the lower boundary; the upper ,o

o boundary of the next interval automatically adjusts to the

new value.

o
o
O Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 283
Data Editor Schlumberger
o
To add a preflx to the existing name, add it in the Prefix box in the
upper right. The prefix is added automatically to the 10 intervals
(Figure 6).
O
Prefix: Fac
o
Modalities

1
Ete!q'-!e-drry.l
Facl oIXDOüX)
o
Fac2 zOInOüm
o
2
3 Fec3 '100000000
4 Fec4 6OIn0000O
5
6
7
Facs æIXX)cxm
Fac6
Facl
10OO00000O
120I)0CPCXX)
a
Figure 6 Automatically adding a prefix to a name O
To validate the changes, click Apply. A new variable appears in
the Data editor with the suffix_RANGE (Figure 74). Optionally,
you can save the *',ï;,:,:e database. o
(L uo
{. cau
o
':ll cxx
'll. cpu-c
{. oerus
o
( oepn
{" onxo
L pacrsoa
o
I rr-o
{, cauu
aauu-
o
'["

Figurc 7
È cmu-nmree

Validating changes with a new variable

o
o
o
284 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Data Editor

Save / Load Tab

O There are only a few actions you can take using the icons on the
Save / load tab (Figure 75).

o Save cunent data set

Save variabb selection

o lnteractive Help (F1)

What is this?

o
O
o Figure 8 lcons on the Save / load tab

o
o
o
O
o
O
o
o
O Iechlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 285
Data Editor Schtumberger O
These are the functions of icons on the Save / load tab.

H Save the current dataset. lf several variables are modified,

o
o
you can save all of the variables simultaneously by saving
the whole set. When saving a variable, you can either
overwrite the previous set or create a new one.

ln the Dataset save window, enter a new dataset name and

save all variables by selecting Yes or save only the
modified variables by selecting No.
o
Detaset 5âvê
o
lvell:
Dataseti
!'r'ell1

MICP
o
o Yes
all varrablesr

Dataset tlpe:
No

pornt datè
o
oK càn(el

This option also allows you to duplicate a set and all the
o
data it contains.
1-r Save only the selected variables. When a variable has been
modified but not saved, it is marked by an asterisk (*).
o
To save the variable, right-click on the variable header and
click Save to overurite the previous variable or click Save
O
as to create a new one.

{, lnteractive help files o

? What is this? (assistance)
o
o
o
o
286 Techlog Fundam€ntals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Data Editor

Exercise Creating a New Dataset in the Data

o 1

Editor 71
o ln this exercise, you use the Data editor to build a dataset with
variables and a discretized curve.

1. ln the Data menu, open the Data editor.

o 2. Choose the DATAFULL dataset from Well1,
3. Choose the variables GAMM, DENS, NEUT, and SONI.

o 4. Drag the variables into the Data editor.

5. Choose the variable GAMM.

6. On the Tools tab, click l{ Discretizing current variable to

o create the discretized curve.
7. Choose 0 for the Lower boundary value, 200 for the Upper
boundary value, and 10 for the number of intervals; click OK.
o A new variable, GAMM_RANGE, appears in the Data editor.

8. ln the Save / load tab, select the new curve in the Data

o editor and click Save the selected variables ({.

Data editor r

o
o 422
82t
824
75É1 2.182 ]6.229 +l Sarc the §clcct€d variablcs
7æ1.5 2.L8 36.773
7æ2 2.179 36.788
€ Save the selected columnS

o 825 762.5 2176 36.778 H Save as,..

826 7663 2.t7 35.436 ({ Save all the s€lected variables as new version
827 7æ3.5 2.169 35,995
€ Save all the s€lected columns as new version
828 7ffi 2.179 18.30t
o 829
830
831
7ffi5 2.\89 47.257 €
7ffi5 2.797
765.5 2.207
43,379
44.934
x
Save all the modified variables as new version

Remove the selected columns...

at2 7ffi 2.246 48,311 i:ùru,rn! tEiÊrliôrr.

O st 833
8:t4
7ffi.5 2.374
7667 2.3æ
54.449
æv2-
l,rat:le vat.ll-1le: if i.t Ltn LlrlLty

835 76ts 23ts oz.ssaf o.297rs 93.769

o 836 zffi 2.362 or.l:rf 018263 s4.034

o
o Techlog Fundâmentals, Version 2013 287
Data Editor Schlumberger

TIP: lf you right-click on the variable name, several

commands are available to save the selected variable,
save it as a new version, or remove the selected column

9. On the Save / load tab, click Ed to change the dataset name

to DATAFULL_Selection.
10. Choose No for the Allvqriables option and click OK.
A new dataset is visible in Welll containing only the variables
present in the Data editor.
o
Lesson 2 New Variable Calculation and
Mathematical Operat:ons
The Data editor allows you to calculate new variables or to apply
mathematical operations to existing variables (Figure 9). You can
run the calculations on the entire depth interval or only in a
restricted interval.

The Data editor also allows you to create new variables by

applying mathematical operations to existing variables. These
equations can be saved and reused in other projects.

Data edtor

vSH r (GAMM-15)/(120-15)

r::
Lll Welll.MICP
=L
DENs ]
6AMM
I

I
NEur -]-soÀtr I
7896 78!15 2.æ3 59,891
78965 78965 2.381 58,027 0296937 89,5æ
7897 7897 2.356 56,39s 02883ÿ 88,522
:: 7897.5 7897.5 2.3æ 54,554 o272tAt $,757
7898 78!B 2,253 51,257 0263214 95252
7898.5 7e8.5 2,218 47,019 0261137 9É287
7899 7899 2.2L4 41,795 0260æ6 100,804
è
7899,5 78!t9.5 2,226 42.392 02658É]1 99,66
û
E
7900 7900 2,239 41.938 0,279924 97.156
7900.5 7900.5 2,2* 41,407 0286æ9 95.æ7
v (

Figure 9 Calculating variables in the Data editor

288 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013

o Schlumberger Data Editor

o To see a list of functions available in the Data editor (Figure 10),

click What is this? ? (on the Save / load tab) or press 56;11 + F1,
then click on a cell containing a defined equation.

o Data editor

lvsH -l =
trl

o MDIDENSIGAMM
æx | 7asr zsBJ 59.891 olsblas
o zeso.s I zeso.s 2.381 58.027 ozs6s3t

Accessing help in the Data editor

o
O
o
o
o
o
o
O
o
o
O Iechlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 289
Data Editor schlumberger O
Figure 11 shows a new variable that was inserted automatically in
the Data editor, but it has not been saved. a
Functions list:
functbns;
o
. aoe(numbcrh reürn lhe ac cæir of the vaLe h ralan.
. asir(nurnbcr) rcùrn thÊ üc §E of tlt valn h radar,
. atan(numbcr} rêürn lh. üc figurt of the v*.r h rada.
. oe(numbcr): reürn the co§É of the vaLe h ralan.
o
o
. si(rumber} retrn the ire of the vaLe h radan.
. tan(numbcr): retrn tlæ targcnt of the valr h radan,
. tanh(numbcr) reùrn lhe hrcerbolc rEmt of the vabe.
. exp(numlrcr) reùrn the vdr.e of c (the base of naùrd bgarittuns) riised b the
ofrunbcr.
a
power
. o«plo(mmbcl} retrn the vaLt of 1o rdsed b the powcr of rurùer.
. ir(numbcrÈ ret ns the arnÊrse of n-nùer.
. abe(numbsl reùnn the absol.re va[.c of nnùer.
. bg(numbcrÈ rcürn thc naüral bgaitlm of n nùer.
. l6glo(numbcr) reùrn the bæ-10 bgtitlm of ruùer.
o grow(numbcrt number2hrcùrn the valr of rumberl r:ised b the povrnr of
number2.
o
. porrl0(numbcr) reùrn thc val.c of 1O niscd b thc pover of nmbcr.
. rcund(numbcr, pttcisirn - O)rcù.rrts thc rarnded runber, with requesEd
preci§on, by defa,It the precisilrn is 0.
. 3qrt(nrmrbcrl reùrns the sq.se root of thc rurùer.
o
. mh(numbcr) reü.rn the bwcr valre.
. max(numberlreürn the higher vaft.re,
o hniWabdnumbcrlreùrn ihc vC.re
bqndà.Ès.
resùicted b thc ri*run or maxinrn a
. resultlfltnrc if conditirn cbc rcsultlFabe retnn üe 'cmdit m'

o
the 'rcsrdüffnre' if
b ùue otherwise reùrn the'resrltlÈke'.

Ooeratons/+-tt'
ConJtaoB
o
o
PI: Pi standrd vaftre.
PIOZPi vabe dvlted by 2.
o PIO*Pi vaLr ôriJed by 4.
o
r SQRT2:sq.rare root of 2.
. SQRTH: sqràre root of 2 dvited by 2.
. E: o@ncntid of 1.
. 1Il2: vaùre of the naürd logritlm of 2.
o
.llllGvdre of tle naùral §ritlm of 10,
. LOG2[: irverse vabe of the naùral logrittm of 2.
. Locloeh'v€rse v*.E of the naürallogüiûm of 10.
O
. Hiss&rgVaheûising vafre (€999).

Figure 11 Functions available in the Data editor o

o
290 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013 O
o Schlumbêrger Data Editor

1
o Procedure

1.
Creating and Saving Equations

On the Tools tab, click Greate an equation * to define a

o new equation.
2. Enter the name of the equation.
3. Choose the unit of the output curve.
o 4. Choose the family of the output curve.
5. Enter comments about the equation.

a 6. Choose the level at which the equation will be saved: Project,

ry
User, or Company.

@ Properties of the new equation

O Mode

() Expert Nlath pa(

o
l.;

Nâme: volum€ of shale

vsH = (GAMM-1s)/(1æ-15)

o
o Unit:

Famiÿ Volume

o
o U5er

qK Eancel

o
o
o
o
a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 291
Data Editor Schlumberger
o
2
r3
Procedure
1. Open the Tools tab.
Editing an Equation
o
2. Choose the equation that you wish to edit from the drop-
down list and click /. The Properties of the new equation
window opens.
a
@
Mode
eroperties of the new equation
o
e

Name:
Expert

Volume of shàle
a
Original equation' VSH = (GAMM-15)/(1æ-15)

vSH = (GAMM-1s)/(120-1s)
a
o
Equetionl

Unit: vN

Family: Shele Volume

use this equatron to compute v'olume of Shale from Gamma

a
a
Ra)'
Comment:

Folder: I-i-i'r

l--§a§--i -sar,9-e!.-,Sâicel
o
3. Edit the properties of the equation and click Save.

Procedure 3 Removing an Equation

o
t3 1.
2.
Open the Tools tab.
Choose the equation that you wish to edit from the drop-
o
3.
down list and click Delete X.
Click Yes to confirm that you wish to delete this equation.
o
o
o
292 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
a
o Schlumberger Data Editor

1
o Exercise Creating an Equation using the
Data Editor

a ln this exercise, you calculate the Shale volume from gamma ray
using the equation editor in the Data editor.

1. ln the upper part of the Data editol create an equation

o named VSH_DE = (GAMM-15)l(120-15) and press Enter.

NOTE: The variable name appears with an asterisk (*), .,
which means it was modified and needs to be saved.

o 2. Save the new curve. Right-click on the VSH-DE* variable

and select Save the selected variable.

o 3. Open the Tools tab.

4. Click * to create a new equation.

o 5. ln the window that opens, set these properties:

. Name: Volume of Shale
. Unit = v/v
o '
.
FamilY = Shale Volume
Level = Project.

o
o
O
O
o
o
o
a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 293
Data Editor Schlumberger
o
ri Procedure 4 Displaying Variable Array Type
Data o
Log array type data and vectors that contain more than one
measurement per depth can be displayed in the Data editor. Log
array type data is identified using Column selection 1I: on the
o
Display tab.
1. Drag the data into the Data editor.
o
2. Choose the variable column header. Column selection
on the Display tab is now active.
=:,
O
3. Click Column selection xi: to display the Columns
selection window.
o
2
3
o
4
5
6
7
o
8
is-...................... ........
t0
o
11

7,t 69 selected columns

o
, ,,, SeteA att OK
o
4. Choose one or more of the columns to display and click OK
to expand the variable array.
o
o
a
a
294 ïechlog Fundârnentals, Version 2013
a
o Schlumberger Data Editor

o For example, when you select two columns, they appear as

multiple highlighted columns in the Data editor, as shown in
the figure.

a = 11 (GAMM-15)/(120-15)

o
w€ll1.rQc
I
oEptr-r cshglol PC-RESr/] PC-F -
738r,.9 7381,9 0
7192 7!92 o 18

unll tnts o

o 14it1 7434
74ô4 : 7464
1419.21 74792
1522.t 75229
0
o
o
o
18
18

18

7594- ') 7s94

o
o

You also can perform computations with an array variable.

o For example, if you multiply an array variable by a constant

value, all columns are multiplied by the same constant value.

o The results are illustrated in the figure.

Data edtor

o 7381.9
v!ell1.LQC

DEPIH Cshgl2l
73819 o
rl
00
cshgt4l .cswl3) .6wt4t PC-REslol
1236
Pc-REslll Pc-REst2l PC-REsl3l p(
^

o 7392 7æ2
lan.zi" tæts
1434 I 7434
7U 7461
o
o
o
0
00
00
002
00
t236
1236
7236
t236
7419.2 71792 t2 36
o
o 0
1522.9 7s229 0 36
,:* 73s4 o 72 36

o NOTE: The equation is defined with the name of the array

and the results are saved as an array variable.
o

o
o
o
o Techlog Fundâmentals, Version 2013 295
Data Editor Schlumberger
o
2
Exercise Gomputing a Variable with an Array
Variable o
ln this exercise, you use log array type data in the Data editor to
compute an array variable from an array variable. o
1. Open a new empty Data editor.
2.
3.
Choose MICP from Well1.
Choose the array CShg.
o
4. Drag the array into the Data editor.
5. Select the CSltg column.
o
6. On the Display tab, click Golumns selection :.
7. Choose several column numbers and click OK. o
8. ln the equation area, compute CSW as 1-CShg.
9. Launch the equation by clicking play > or press F7 in the
Tools tab.
o
Notice that the Data editor displays only the first column of
the computed array. o
10. Select CSW[O] and click ?i to select the columns to appear.
11 . Choose the new variables and click
an aray.
'* Merge variables into o
12. Enter a name for the new array (CSW_2) and click Apply.

13. Right-click in the CSW_2[0J column and select ({ Save the o

selected variable.
14. When a pop-up window appears, click Yes to confirm you
wish to save an array.
o
The new array is now displayed in the Project browser.
o
o
o
a
296 Tæhlog Fundarnentals, Version 20'l 3
o
o Schlumbergel Data Editor

3
o Lesson Excel Connection

Data can be exported directly into Excel with one click on the

o Tools tab. You can perform calculations and import the results
back into the Data editor.

1
o Procedure Connecting with Excel
ln this procedure, you export data from the Data editor to Excel.
TI
o 1. Click Export from Data editor fu.
Excel is automatically launched and the data in the Data
editor window are exported to Excel.
O 2. ln Excel, modify the imported variables, calculate other
variables, or use existing macros.

o 3. After completing all calculations, click lmport from Excel to

Data editor &.

o WARNING: The new calculated variables must have names,

or they cannot be imported into the Data editor. !

o Exercise 1 Exporting and lmporting the

GAMM Curve Â
o ln this exercise, you export and import a variable after applying an
equation in Excel.

o 1.
2.
Open an empty Data editor.
Choose the DATAFULL dataset from Well1.
3. Drag the GAMM curve into the Data editor.

o 4.
5.
Click Export from Data editor &.
ln Excel, use the GAMM values to compute a new variable

o named VSH_Excelas (GAMM-20)/110 when the variable

GAMM is defined.
6. Click lmport from Excel to Data editor *.
o 7. Save the new variable.

o
a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 297
Data Editor
O
Review Questions
. How do you handle the display of array data?
o
. How do you launch an equation on several datasets at the
.
same time? o
What is the best way to export data to Excel contained within
a dataset?
o
Summary
ln this module, you learned about:
o
.
.
accessing and using the functions of the Data editor
calculatingvariables
o
. managing equations
. importing and exporting with Excel. a
o
O
o
o
o
o
O
o
298 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3
a
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
O
o
o
o
o Schlumberger Well Trajectories, Field Map

o Module 9 Well Trajectories, Field

Map
o ln this module, you will learn about several tools available in
Techlog to display well trajectories in 2D and 3D. You also will

o learn about maps and the Well predict application.

Learning Objectives
a After completing this module, you will know how to:
#'-

.
a .
.
display well trajectories in 2D and 3D
display well location and plots on a map
use the well predict module and use the Techlog Application

o Workflow lnterface (AWl).

Lesson 1 2D Well Trajectories

O The 2D well trajectory allows you to view the welltrajectory in

o cross section or top view, with curves or dips along the well.
NOTE: The borehole trajectory of the well is read directly from o
the index dataset with XOFFSET and YOFFSET

o variables. You cannot display a well without these

variables.

O 1
Exercise Displaying the Well9 Trajectory in a
2D Window A
a 1. Select Geology > FieldMap > t= ZO well trajectory.
2. For this exercise, use the GAMM variable from the LQC

a dataset (Well9). Drag the GAMM variable from the Project

browser into the left side of the 2D well trajectory window
on the Well tab.

a TIP: When you drag a well, by default, Techlog displays the

first variable from the first dataset.

a
O Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 301
Well Trajectories, Field Map Schlumberger
o
3. Select the STRATIGRAPHY zonation set to be displayed
from the Zonation dock window to display the zones on the
map.
o
4. From the Properties window, change the display type to top
view in the Trajectory tab. o
TIP: You also can select Map view 1., by right-clicking on

E
the plot. Return to the trajectory by clicking cross
sectiont-- o
Save the Well9 trajectory at the Project level. (Two images
follow.) o
well trajectory Saræ Edit Display Properties O
o
I
2D well
. Âl wetlg
Line of section : 2?0 | '
, i.l t_ec
2D rell iraiectory: Wcllg E
GAMM
'[.

-1000
Cr6r-.Gcti<rn vid - Lin. of rcction (27O' - 9O")

-1000
F
o
MD.

o
0 0
500
1000 1000 1000
1500
.t 2000 2o0o

3000

4000

5000
3000

4000

5000
a
o
ô
6000
t 7000 7000

4000 8000
È
9000

10000

I 1000
9000

10000

1 1000
o
0
offsd in linc of sedion (ft) o
a
0

o
a
302 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
 schtumberser Well Trajectories, Field Map
O
" o
Weii I ZO,rett tra.lectoty Save Edit Dasplay Propettie
, Al wetts Ê
2t) tcll t"tjectory: wcll9
. L.ll LeC
F
{I GAMM
-500 0 500 1000 1500 2000

À
r500

.!
> 1oo0

.500 0 500 1000 1500 2000

x (ft)

150

Lesson 2 3D Well Trajectories

The 3D Field viewer provides a 3-dimensional well display

environment. Continuous variables, wellbore images, and Maps
created in the Krigging module also can be displayed.

To display a well in the 3D field viewer, you must have an index

dataset containing variables with these families: X Offset, Y
Offset, True Vertical Depth Sub Sea, and Measured Depth.

To plot multiple wells within the same 3D viewer, you must define
the X and Y well properties.

Techlog Fundamentals, version 2013 303

O
Well Trajectories, Field i/ap Schlumberger
o
I
Procedure
1.
Creating a 3D We!! Trajectory
Select Utility > 3D Vue > 3D Field Viewer.
a
2. Drag the variable to display into the side-box of the 3D Field
Viewer. o
lf a caliper is associated to an image variable, it is
automatically plotted around the well trajectory and the image
is mapped on the well. lf there is no caliper, the well appears
as a constant diameter tube.
o
Exercise 1 Creating a Well9 3D WellTrajectory
o
ln this exercise, you use the 3D Field Viewer to create a 3D view
of a well trajectory. o
1. Select Utility > 3D Vue > 3D Field Viewer.
2. Drag the Well9 /LQC/GAMM variable into the side-box of the O
3D Field Viewer.
The GAMM variable displays along the 3D trajectory.
a
o
O
t
o
o
o
a
304 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
 schtumberser Well Trajectories, Field Map
O
3 Basemap Tool
a Lesson
Basemap is a visual mapping tool that allows you to create a

o representation of the geographical position of the wells.

Procedure 1 Creating a Base Map

o ln this procedure, you display wells on a geographical map using
the Basemap module.
t3
o 1.
2.
Select Geology > FieldMap > E Basemap.
Drag the wells you wish to display under Wells in the side

o box or onto the Well drop area.

The geographical position of the well displays directly from
the well properties: X and Y locations. A well without these

o properties cannot be displayed. You can view the X and Y

locations in the wells Properties window.
You can read the geographical position of the well path from

a the index dataset where X and Y offsets need to be present.

A well without the X and Y offset properties can be displayed,
but the path is not displayed.

o E unrnomo
Ç,t§,Hi
werls
tilter Charts

o
I

o {ae
a I

o P ots

o Map

X;0.504414 Y:0.926563 (t

o
a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
Well Trajectories, Field l/ap Schlumberger
o
ffi Exercise 1 Creating a Base Map and
Displaying Plots on the Map o
ln this exercise, you create a map with the five wells.

1. Select Geology > FieldMap > Basemap El. An empty map

a
o
is created.
ln the Project browser, select the five wells and drag them
into the empty map.
3. Click zoom '. magnify the display at the geographical
position of the Well9 path. (This is possible because X and Y
offsets are present in the lndex dataset.)
o
TIP: After zooming, double-click on the map to go back to
the originaldisplay. o
4. ln the Basemap properties window, on the Display options
tab, activate lhe ÿl/ell color option. o
I
8.@p Sæ OF Édit Oislry

{@ir -
Poæni6

wûil (rm): tar.9 - s7.orl

a
I ..-
t- O
^
Al
o
o
::l wEr9

ProG I

6rto ôlD
âl

6rs 610 6rs aro

o
''
*6U&049 Y6878s.57 (kn)
...
o
It is possible to display plots on the base map. ln the Project
browser, choose the GAMMA_RAY_HISTOGRAM
previously saved and drag this template into the Plots area
a
on the side box.

o
306 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
a
a Schlumberger Well Trajectories, Field Map

6. You also can display any saved tracks. Repeat Step 5 and
o use the NeutronDensityTrack saved previously.

Dirpleÿ PrFli6

O wcllr
Ar we[1
ll we[2
I

lffGEh' wdhl th): [.r,r' sr.ol]

ll well3

o
ll wena
ll wels

l[:-l *" wdll

o
l--:---------'l

f'_l lLl ..,

o
o oao
Ë.h.1
6110 6120

, i- 1,"

o X 07]91 Yr ffi7225 (!on)

o
o
I i.,. -

ry
I ..

wdr

o Fl -f
u tk,
o H
o dll leur onoerrtylacx
À-
Map

o ln the Save tab in the Basemap menu, save the map as

o My First_Map at the Project level.

o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 307

Well Trajectories, Field Map Schlumberger
O
2
Exercise

1.
Greating a Cross Section

Select Well2, Well3, Well4, and Welll on the map.

o
2.
3.
Select Open > ffi Layout
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box that opens
a
NOTE: lf you select No, the lnput(s) (family, alias or
variable) selection window opens. Select the
variables and families you wish to display on the
o
cross section.

4. Choose the template Well9_SHORï

o
The cross section is created using the Well9_SHORT
template. The distance between the wells on the layout is
proportional to the actual distance between the well heads.
o
You can select to remove the Well distance on the Limits tab
in the Multi-well layout properties window. o
a
o
o
o
Allthe plot options discussed in (such as changing the depth
reference and aligning the zones) are available from this
LogView display.
o
, Wormows
ù.) WellPredict
o
o
o
308 Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
a Well Trajectories, Field Map

Review Questions
O . Do you need an lndex dataset to display the well trajectory?
.
o Can you display several wells in 3D view?

Summary
o ln this module, you learned about:
.
o .
.
displaying the well trajectory in a 2D display
displaying the wells on a geographic map
displaying wells in 3D view.

o
o
o
o
o
o
O
o
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 309
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
O Schlumbêrger Depth Shifring Tool and Variables Spliæ Tool

o le 10 Depth Shifting Tool

and Variables Splice
a Tool
The Depth shifting toolallows you to depth match logs according
o to a reference log. The Variables splice tool splices together
continuous curve sections from different datasets in a well into a
single curve.

o Learning Objectives (-
t---
t5J-
o After completing this module, you will know how to:
. manually and automatically create a depth shifting window
i=;+

a .
.
depth shift a variable and a dataset
use the Variables splice tool
.
a .
make selections in the Properties window
create a dataset.

o Lesson 1 Manual Depth Shifting

a To correct a tool string shift, it might be necessary to depth shift

several curves or an entire dataset. This results in a curve being
shifted up or down. This lesson shows you how to shift a curve or
a dataset manually.
O Procedure 1 Creating a Depth Shifting Window

a Several procedures can be applied to depth shift a curve. This

procedure shows you how to depth shift a variable from a layout
rf
graphically.
o 1. Choose two logs: a reference log and a log to shift.

t NOTE: The order in which you select the variable is

important. First select the variable to shift, then select
the reference variable.
,l

_l

o 2. Drag the two curves into an empty LogView layout.

a Techlog Fundamentals. Version 2013 311

Depth Shifting Tool and Variables Splice Tool Schlumbêrger
o
3.
4.
Select the two curves.
ln the Open drop-down list, select Open a depth shifting
window.
a
A layout is generated automatically, as shown in the figure.
. The first track displays the log{o-depth shift.
O
,N
I
NOTE: ln this track, the curve cannot be modified.

The second track displays the reference log.

a
The third track displays the log to depth shift. lt is only in this
track that the curve can be depth shifted. o
The last track also displays the log to depth curve, along
with the reference log, to help you depth match the curve
accurately. o
l*ll
lG'I
I r!rr. l-iE-l
*."1 o
a
o
o
a
o
o
a
*.f.r*.'
I
6621.155 ft Obr«tRcfureùèd
o
312 Iechlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
 schlumberser Depth Shifting Tool and Variables Splice Tool
O
Procedure 2 Depth Shifting a Log
o The Depth shifting tool allows you to depth match logs according
tll
to a defined reference log. Afier you create the Depth shifting
o window, you will be able to manually shift your log.

1. Hold down the Shift key and click in one of the two first

o tracks.
At each click, a red anchor bar appears.
2. Position the cursor on one of the bars at the Log level.
o 3. Shift the log by moving the cursor up and down while holding
down the left mouse button.

o lmportant Points
You should keep in mind several important points when depth
O shifting a log:
. When only one anchor bar is present, the depth shifting is

o .
equivalent to a block shifr because the curve is displaced in
one block.
When two or more anchor bars are present, the depth

o shifting is equivalent to stretching because one of the bars

locks the curve.
. The depth shifted curve automatically takes the name of the

a .
curve with the sufflx _sfr.
To remove an anchor bar, click on it and press Delete.
.
o lt is possible to zoom in or zoom out at any time during the
operation.

3
a Procedure Saving the Depth Shift

After you are satisfied with a depth shift, you can save the curve
tll
o and the applied depth shifting.

1. Click on the curve.

In the Saue drop-down list, click ({ Variable... or click ({
o 2.
The variable as a new vercion....
3. In the Save drop-down list, click td The depth shift table....

o
O Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 313
Depth Shifting Tool and Variables Splice Tool Schlumberger

4. When a window opens, enter a name for this depth shifting.

The name you enter is applied to a set in which all
characteristics of the depth shifting are saved.
o NOTE: This procedure saves only the selected log. lf you
must shift other logs, apply the depth shift table to the
other variables or datasets.

Procedure 4 Applying a Depth Shifting

This function allows you to apply a saved depth shift table to a
variable or a reference.
o
1. ln the Project browser, choose a curve to shift.
2. Using the contextual menu, apply the depth shift to either a
variable or the reference of the dataset.
o
. lf applied to the variable, only the variable will be depth
shifted according to the applied table.
o
. lf applied to the reference, the entire dataset will be depth
shifted according to the applied table. o
TIP: Depth shifting is applied automatically to all of the
curyes that you have selected. o
o
lrrriàblê m.n.gêm6t
ll a5srgn to famrly

d. add to ahases system

(
o
oefine as referen(e...

Convert...

(. nppry me aepm shÊ table m up rerereme...

(L Appt one depû shlt t3bh m thê yâriâble...

O
o
a
o
314 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
a
O Schlumberger Depth Shifring Tool and Variables Splice Tool

Procedure 5 Block Shifting a Curve (Special

o Feature) rl
a It is possible to vertically shift a log, for example, to match two
curves before splicing them.

1. Select the curve.

o 2. Hold down the Shift key while using the top and bottom
arrows on the keyboard to move the curve.
WARNING: The shifted curve is not automatically saved.
o 3. Right-click on the curve and select Save.
!

o Procedure 6 Applying a Horizontal Shift to

Curve
a
trl
o It is possible to laterally shift, for example, a log to match two
curves before splicing them.

1. Hold down Ctrl + Alt and click on the curve.

O 2. Move the cursor from left to right, or from right to left.

o Lesson 2 Automatic Depth Shifting

o Automatic depth shifting automatically computes the depth shift

between two logs and displays the computed shift bars in a depth-
shift layout. You can adjust or remove the computed shift bars as

I desired.

Procedure I Automatically Depth Shifting a

)
Curye rl
Drag two variables (log curves) into a multi-well layout. The

o variable can be from the same dataset or from different datasets

within the same well.

1. Choose two curves.

o 2. Fromlhe Open drop-down list, select Open the depth shift
window.

O
a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 315
Depth Shifting Tool and Variables Splice Tool
o
3. ln the Depth shifting window, select Edit > Automatic
definition of the depth shift table.
This action calculates and displays the depth bars between
o
the curves.
o
o
All the variables
Ctrl+alt+

Ctrl+ L
P

) o
II I All the track Ctrl+T i
lfl rhe reference tracks
Plus,.,
Ctrl+Alt+ R

)
)
(
l o
l§
f
atnonreic definfion of ütê depù shilt tâble

Remove all the depth shift lines

Con dep{à :hifting

)
(_ o
c
. tt
t!l
t-oaO a recovery intervâl and lithology varaable...

nemove all core depth shift track

(
t
o
t[ upoate link with shifted variable
J=
(
!
')

)
a
-)

o
o
o
o
o
o
316 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 201 3
o
o Schlumberger Depth Shifting Tool and Variables Splice Ïool

Properties Window
o You can adjust depth-shift correlations by modifying parameters
contained in the depth-shift Properties window (Figure 1), located
o on the Automatic shift tab.

i. PrcprrËer

a lE oOjea,

ptions IH
ryr rhiÊ (Depth
oepttr shltt
shifting:1 [well: welBl)

Value

o ,
Automêtic apply
Correlation «rt-off
Smoolh window 1
!e5
0a

o
Window size 81
window shifl 40
/ Window shift 2
window size 13

o J
Window shift
correlalion type
Preprocessing
3

correlation

outliers cLrt-off 3

o l
lt
/ Post-processing
Remove outliers 9hift yes

Shift outhers threshold 4

o Figure 1 Properties window for depth shifting

o
o
o
o
o
O
O Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 11a
Depth Shifting Tool and Variables Splice Tool schtumberger O
Automatic Sh!ft Propertaes
This table describes the properties that you can set in the depth
o
shift ing Properties window.

Automatically Automaticallylaunchesthedepth-shift
o
apply procedure when properties are modified.
Correlation cut-off When the correlation coefficient between
two sequences is below this value, the
o
o
sequences are ignored in the depth shift.
Smooth windows The automatic depth shift makes two

:"i:"- ,"rolution pass using a tarse

window size (Smooth window 1).
o
A high-resolution pass using a small
window size
(Smooth pass 2).
o
size
Window Length of the correlation sequence,
specifically, the number of depth
positions.
o
Shift size Designated shift above and below the
sequence. o
Correlationÿpe Correlation, anti-correlation, or both.
Outliers cut-off lncreases or decreases the number of
shifted depth positions. Smoothes the
a
signal by reducing noise.
Remove
shift
outliers Eliminates noise resulting in a smoother
signal.
o
Shift outliers
threshold
Eliminates noise resulting in a smoother
signal. o
I IIUARNING: The shifted curve is not saved automatically. To
save it, right-click on the curve and select Save. o
o
o
318 ïechlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Depth Shifting Tool and Variâbles Splice Tool

Exercise 1 Depth Shifting a Variable .?\

o Before starting this exercise, import data from the
TECHLOG_2O 1 3\Exercises\03 Depth sh ift , Splice, Vai able
o processlng folder.

ln this exercise, you use the Depth shift tool to shift the core

o porosity variable C_PHl in Well 4, dataset RUN2. As a reference,

use the log porosity PHIT-DK.

1. Drag the C_PHI and PHIT_DK into a new empty layout.

o
Rcfcrcnce

o (FT)
1!48O

o
O
o .-:--F-
.<*-

.. L
o u<
-:-
a'r)

o ar'-_
HT.
TÈ
o ..É

o 2. Compare the two variables

o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 319
Depth Shifring Tool and Variables Splice Tool Schlumberger
o
3. Because the variables have different scales, adjust the
C_PHl scale. o
Propcrtics "4x
'l Object VariablG (C-PHI)
o
o
Property
Tifle
Wells

o
Dataset
Name
{, Variable ma...
t...
o
liÀ Conserve yes
. L( Horizontal ...

limit
o
Lower 0.3

Upperlimit 0
kale linear

o
Select the core porosity variable C_PHl (the variable you
wish to shift), then select the continuous porosity variable
PHIT_DK (your reference variable).
o
o
o
o
o
o
O
320 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Depth Shifring Tool and Variables Splice Tool

5. Right-click and select Open > Depth shift window

o I I ry.rr.-.sr
% l
l.*"r"r,."1'o ol

o I (Fr) l' -------------

I r:æo [03
c-PHl '|
rl

o
o
o
o lllL!3 l3t
I
EIT
o ll| SrrcYiaolc-
I ryrÿ.rEllorûYÊs

o X
Copy

oetete

o
o
o
o
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 321
Depth Shifting Tool and Variables Splice Tool Schlumberger
o
6. Using log porosity as a reference, notice the shift that exists
between these two curves.
C PH,il
o
l. .-r** .l
l--=']
o
o
o
o
o
7. lnsert a depth shifting anchor by pressing Shift + left-click.
8. Adjust the core porosity variable to fit the two curves. o
o
tJIl'..
Ë
li' o
:1. '
'l

t
:,ji .. o
o
o
9. ln the Depth shifting window, right-click and select Save the
depth shift table.
10. Keep the default name <shifr_RUN2> and click Save. A
O
new dataset is created.
o
Iechlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
 Schlumberger Depth Shifting Tool and Variables Splice Tool

Procedure 2 Depth Shifting a Variable from the

Project Browser E
You also can depth shift the variable from the Project browser.

1. Right-click on the variable and select Apply one depth shift

table on the variable....

o . El RUN2
(MD I
Measured
Assign to family
Depth FT

o i:{.i-r",i
(
{. ogtls
oePn
i.
{.
<L
Add to aliases system
Define as reference...
Apply one depth shift table on th€ refererKe...
(.
o {.
or
( cauu
MEDR e
Apply one depth shift table on the variable...
Merqe...

{. xsw Porosity

a
Neutron FRAC

{. pxn-or Forosity %
(. sorvl Compressional S1... US/F

o 2. Select lhe Sove as new version option and click OK.

E, S.v! thc lhiftcd

o Save the variable C_PHI

Save options
o Save as new version of C_PHI

o Save with suffix

Overwrite the exining variable C_PHI

o Save extension:

Apply to all OK Cancel

a
o
O
a
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 20'13 323
Depth Shifting Tool and Variables Splice Tool Schlumberger
o
3. Choose the depth shift table you wish to apply on the variable
and click OK. o
o
o
o
a
a
The shifted variable is now created and appears in your
Project browser.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
324 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
a Schlumberger Depth Shifting Tool and Variables Splice Tool

3 Depth Shifting a Variable from the

o Procedure
Layout r3
1.
o 2.
Select the variable to shift (C_PHl) in the LogView layout.
Select Processing Depth shifting > On the variable.

o tns€rt Processing Open

Smoothing
T Gaussian smooth...
Advanced

Reference

o +
è
Smooth with missing values...

Median smooth...
(FT)
1:48O

a Clcaning
.-l
:i
Outlierscleaning...

Despike...

O '1' Data clipping,..

770,0
Intcrpolltbn

o 2
.,:
Linear interpolation...

Sptin"...

o [!
È
Integration...

Derivativesmoothing...

1.
o
first/t-astreadings...
iI Standardise...
,t+\ Cumulate...

o il.
Compaction

Oepttr snitirE tr{.

7800
On the variable-. N

a 3(
t[
on the reference...
Delete the background variables

o
o
o
a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 325
Depth Shifling Tool and Variables Spliæ Tool
o
3. Choose the depth shift table <Shift_RUN2> and click OK.
A temporary shifted variable is created and designated with O
an asterisk (*) to the right of the name. ln the layout, the
ghost points also are displayed as gray points.
O
o
o
o
'frtr
J*
,'F o
o
a
4. Right-click on the modified variable to save it from the layout. o
o
O
o
o
o
326 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Depth Shifting Tool and Variables Splice Tool

Exercise 2 Depth Shifting a Dataset

a The datasets RUN2 and RUN3 are not correctly adjusted. lf you
71
compare the GAMM from RUN2 and RUN3 in a layout, you will
O notice a small shift, as shown in Figure 2.

ln this exercise, you depth shift the RUN3 dataset to correct this

o shift.

Reference
(FT)
o 1:48O

7900
o
o
o
o 8000

o Figure 2 GAMM dataset from RUN2 and RUN3

1. Drag GAMM data from RUN2 and RUN3 into a LogView

o 2.
layout.
Select the two gamma ray curves in the layout. Select the

o 3.
curve to shift and select the reference curve.
Right-click and select Depth shift window.
4. Press Shift + click to insert a depth shift line.

o
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 327
Depth Shifting Tool and Variables Splice Tool
O
| 5.
I
I
Move the line to fit the two logs.

I
t--_-tr
I ....,,." I
o
o
H

a
O
a
o
o
Save the depth shift table. As in , a depth shifting dataset is
created in your project. lt is named Shift_RUN3 unless you
modify the name.
o
ln the Project browser, select the dataset RUN3, right-click
and select Apply one depth shift table on the reference.
rI Well4
o
B
E
nunr
Ruttz
R{! RUNs
B Datôset checkup

V.rürblc managcmcm
o
E
E iüN;
ffi snit_Ruttz
snitt-nult:
(. Appty one depth shift table on üe reference...

Group manâgcmcnt
o
Group...

o
o
o
328 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Deplh Shifling Tool and Variables Splice Tool

You can choose not to create a new dataset or you can add a
o suffix to the new dataset.

Crcation of a datasct for thc shiftcd data

o
@
Create a new dataset;
o Yes No

o Suffix for the new dataset:

OK Cancel

O 8. Select the correct Depth shift table to be applied. ln this

a exercise, select Shift_RUN3. A new dataset is created in

your Proiect browser.
lf you choose No, the depth shift table is applied on the

o dataset reference. The old dataset reference is retained but it

is renamed MD_original.
, Al wett4
o ,, ElRuttt
" Hl RuN2
, Hl Rung
o . iE ruNii
(uo .. -,.
rL
o (.
(or
oerus
oePn

{. cauu
O (. uo_orueu.tel
( usoR

o r@nunl4
(.
(
New
sotlt

o o E
'' E
strift-Rutt2
snitt-Rultg

o
a
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 329
Depth Shifring Tool and Variables Splice Tool Schlumberger
o
Variables Splice Too!
The Variables splice tool in the Data menu allows you to splice
a
variables from different datasets.

ln the Limits tab, the Variable splice tool creates a table with one
line for each output variable and these four columns for each input
o
curve:

Position Merging priority: From left to right; this

o
column gives the position of the curve in

Dataset.variable
the layout.
Name of the dataset concatenated with the
a
Top
name of the variable.
Depth used as the top of the interval of
interest for this variable. The value entered
o
Bottom
cannot be above the top of the dataset.
Depth used as the bottom of the interval of
o
interest for this variable. The value entered
cannot be below the bottom of the dataset.
o
o
o
O
o
O
a
o
330 Techbg Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
a Schlumberger Depth Shifling Tool and Variâbles Splice Tool

Procedure 4 Splicing Datasets in the Variables

a Splice Tool

1. ln the Data menu, select Variables splice tool.

O
tJ
o Toolbox Resampling tool

2.
o Drag the datasets into the Graphic variable splice table
window, as shown in the figure.
PGraphical variablesplicetable DatasetoutputMerged-Set [UnitFT] lsamplingrate: 0.5]

o Use Grouo
Lr m its

!!e, Dataset
_ . Ét Well4 RUN1

O : e:
Well4
Well4
RUN2
RUN3_2
Well4 RUN4

o r(

o The splice table automatically fills with default values. Each

line provides one output per variable with the same name,
family, and alias, according to the group type.

o 3. Modify the group type in the Variable splice tool Properties

window.

a Properties
+ Object: Graphical yariable splice table
Properÿ _*
o , Groups

i:ra: .
lvatue

variables
t
t^

--
lrrEtrrq
o ' Splice
Color coded table

Overlap
famrlres
aliases
Pu)ruurr
r^§

a
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 JJI
Depth Shifting Tool and Variables Splice Ïool Schlumberger
o
| 4.
I
I
Set the Type property under Groups to variables. The
Variable splice tool table displays with data in all cells. a
o
@§.
befuâfu tl{4.e &Ùhkidt'& b:h &fulh|]& ùÈd'
-lb æ iw* '7ue mÆ.mmr
mÆ -.umr
metr
uÆ
N.]u. ME!
eBf»],m',Ù.aû
,ra E
&rls .m &
Mq -É&
.14 B

o
5. Check these settings in the Properties window and click
Applv.
.
O
The Apply mode can be set to Display, Save, or Save and

.
display.
Variables can be grouped by variables, family, or alias
name.
o
. Splice overlap controls the method that combines the
curves: either position or mean. lf gaps exist, they are filled
a
by linear interpolation, missing values, a constant, or a top
or bottom value.
You can output results to a new dataset with a specified
o
name or overwrite an existing dataset. You also can assign a
suffix and set controls on the sampling rate and reference
unit in the Properties window.
o
Refer to the figure that follows.
o
O
o
o
O
o
1aa
ïechlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
a Schlumberger Depth Shifring Tool and Variables Splice Iool

a =x

a Color-coded table

o |
I
. Solice

r
Overlap
Gap

O Fill with
{ l 11;'i;|]t
. Result

O yes

Merged_Set

a Action if output variables already exist neÿv version

_Merged
0.5

o ft
Measured Depth

o
o
a
o
o
o
a
o Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 333
Depth Shifring Tool and Variables Splice Ïool Schlumbêrger
o
6. Click ) in the lower right corner of the workflow r.. By
activating Automatic launch ,r-1, you can modify the limits of
each log and control the output in the resulting log
o
graphically, as shown in the figure.
The group of tracks on the left corresponds to a line in the
table; one track is created per variable to be spliced. The last
o
track on the right shows the result of the splice.
o
o
a
o
o
a
a
1 Top limit
o
2

3
Bottom limit
Resulting log o
o
o
o
334 Tæhlog Fundamefltals, Version 2013
o
a Schlumberger Depth Shifting Tool and Variables Splice Tool

a Exercise 1 Creating a Dataset

ln this exercise, you use the Variable splice tool to create a
n
dataset containing all the data coming from RUN1, RUN2, RUN3,
a and RUN4 in Well4.

r, Variable splice tool.

From the Data menu, select

o Drag the RUN1, RUN2, RUN3, and RUN4 datasets from

Wel14 into the Graphic variable splice table window.
3. ln the Properties window, set Type to variables. This groups
o 4.
variables by variable name.
ln the drop-down menu on the bottom right, select Display
and click Automatic Iaunch {S.
O 5. Click ). A layout appears for each variable with four input
tracks and one output track.

o Notice that, between RUNI and RUN2, there is no gap or

overlap but, between RUN2 and RUN3, there is a gap. The
priority is given to RUN2.

o 6. Because the splicing priority goes from the left to the right,
you may need to switch some input curves.

o Select one track and use the arrow keys to move the track
lefr or right. 'lhe Position column is updated automatically in
the table.

a 7. Edit splicing intervals graphically by hovering the mouse over

a limit and dragging it to the required depth.
The splice table is updated on the fly.

o 8. Remove inputs and intervals. Select them and press Delete.

TIP: You can select multiple intervals on the same track on
the layout by clicking the o icon and drawing the
a intervals on the track.
U

9. When you are satisfied with the merge, set the Display mode

a to Save and click ).

A new merged dataset is created. Notice that the point data
variable cannot be spliced.
O
o
o Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 335
Depth Shifting Tool and Variables Splice Tool schlumberger O
10. Keep core porosity in the finaldataset. ln the Project
browser, drag C_PHl data from RUN2 into Merged_Set.
The Resampling tool opens automatically because each
o
dataset is defined by the reference depth, top and bottom
depths, and sample rate. When moving a variable from one
dataset to another, all data must conform to the new dataset.
o
11 . Click Apply to place the point variable into the final dataset.
o
Review Questions
. What is the purpose of the depth shifting table?
o
. What are the two options to shift data?
.
.
What is the purpose of the Variable splice tool?
What is the correct order for selecting the depth shifting
o
.
variables?
When you are satisfied with your depth shifting and you save
it, what do you do next?
o
. When performing a splice, how can you change the variables
grouping type to work with families instead of variables? o
Summary a
ln this module, you learned about:
. creating a depth shifting window both manually and
o
automatically
.
.
depth shifting a variable and a dataset
using the Variable splice tool
o
.
.
using a splice table
creating a dataset. o
o
o
O
336 Techlog Fundan€ntals, Version 2013
a
o
o
O
o
o
o
a
o 11

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o Schlumberger Prolect Data Management

a Module 11 Project Data

Management
a Project data management is a collection of tools that help you
manage and perform quality control on data.

o Prerequisites w
t To successfully complete the lessons and exercises in the
module, you must import these XML files into the project from
lTechlog_20 l3lExerclses\02 Data H a rmon iz ation Exercisel;
S-

a .
.
Welll _Harmonization_Exercise.xml
Well2_Harmonization_Exercise.xml
.
o .
Well3_Harmonization_Exercise.xml
Well4_Harmonization_Exercise.xml.

o Learning Objectives
After completing this module, you will know how to:
o . identify inconsistent units and families in data using the quick
data mining tools in Techlog

a . use the Data harmonization tools to rename variables and

families and assign and convert units.

o
o
a
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 339
Poect Data Management Schlumbergêr
a
1
Lesson Proiect Browser Optimization
The lnventory tools list all the variables present in the Project
o
browser. To refine the inventory and focus on only the data
corresponding to this exercise, create a filter on the dataset
named Harmonization_Exercise.
a
Exercise 1 Greating a Filter o
ln this exercise, you create a filter on a dataset named
Harmon ization_Exercise. a
Choose the dataset Harmonization_Exercise in Well1.
Take one of these actions to creale the filter:
.
o
Right-click and select Create a filter ?.
. Press Ctrl + J.
The Project browser opens.
o
Lesson 2 lssues in the Datasets o
Several tools are available that help you identify and correct
problems in the data.
I
P§ect Browser o
You can use the Project browser to identify variables with
missing units and families quickly.
.
O
Variables displayed in black have a unit and a family

.
.
assigned to them.
Variables displayed in gray are missing a unit ora family. o
Variables displayed in red are missing a unit and a family

.
(Figure 1).
Families displayed in red are not defined in lhe family
o
database.
The Project browser, however, will not allow you to identify
inconsistent units or families. Also, it is not effective when working
o
on a large number of wells or datasets.
o
340 ïechlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
a
o Schlumberger Prolect Data i/anagement

e / , :l Qc-Dataset-Exerci5e
rl MD
Measured Depth
Measurecl Depth
ft
ft
I calipe,

o :1. crrx
{. oar.rsrrv
Depth Match Core Permeabili§ MD

I oErus-ooc Densi§, Gicl

o
Êulk
1 oerusrn' Eulk Densi§, gicmi

I
a Figure

lnventory Tools
Variables list in the Project browser

o Open the lnventory tools (Figure 2) by selecting Data >

Techdata+ > Quick data mining.

o t-1
trl
Quick data
t#. I
r.

Data
+.
Queryrename
I

First,rla:t
mining - - tool
a harmonisation

Vanables inventory
readings

O tl Families inventory

Well properties in,r,entory

o v'ariables without family rnventory

\rariebles without unit inventory

o Familes not present in the families database inventorl,

-i
o t. l
wells in\.entor)'

Datasets inventory

Sampling rates inventory

C I
! lone9 rnvenlor),

a Variables list

Variables history list

o Figure 2 lnventory tools

o Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 341

Project Data Management Schlumberger O

ï,'i:,'Jiï:i,:i,." ro dispray an inventory rhere is one a

line for each variable name.

The first variable name, CALI, has these properties: O

. lt is present in the four datasets (Count into the datasets = 4).
. lt is present in the four wells (Count into the wells = 4 and O
Wells were present = All).
. The minimum value for CALI (within all the wells) is 8.163 in.
. The maximum value for CALI (within allthe wells) is 15.651 a
in.
. All the CALI variables have the same unit (Count unit = 1).
. All the CALI variables have the same family, Caliper (Count
O
familY = 1 and FamilY = Caliper).

The Variables inventory is an efficient tool for identifying O

non-homogenous names and inconsistent units.

The goal is to make sure that each variable,

O
. is present with the same name in 100% of the wells
itsunit
: H:Jliilill[TÏi,l1i;""""''tentwith O
. has one family assigned (Count Family = 1;.
Other inventories allow you to focus directly on the items O
mentioned.

Other Lists and lnventories a

Other lists and inventories are available that allow you to quickly
identiÿ issues such as:
. missing units: variables without unit inventory O
. missing families: variables without families inventory
. inconsistent families: families not present in the families O
database inventory.

a
o
u2 TæhlogFundarnentals,Version2013
O
o Schlumberger Project Data Management

To add lists and inventories as tabs in the Quick data mining

o window, go to the Properties window (Figure 3) and select yes to
activate the relevant lists and inventories.

o t''..' Propcrticl
ObjecL Quidt data mining
=

o Property
/ Inventories to display
Display Aliases inventory
lvatue

no
I

o Display !?riables inventory

Display Families inventory
no
ye5

Drsplay Properties inÿentor)' no

o Display Variables without family inventory

Display variables without unit inventory
no
no

o Display Families not present in the families database inventory

Display Wells inventory
Display Datasets inventory
no
no

o Display Sampling rates inventory

Display zones inventory no
Display Variables list no

o Display !'ariables history

Figure 3 Properties window

o For example, Variables without unit inventory (Figure 4) can

show a unit issue that you could not see easily in the variable

o inventory display in variable CKH.

Qurl dn. m,.,n9

a ? rlfl
.lM 1
!os
1m0
w**e*lr**-rt] x."u
lÀt
1W
æ
ùg 1
{3At I
z51t I

a 064 0s6 I
rX 5lrMH,ÆN_Rr a a 1æ Al

,e
Figure 4 Variables without unit inventory display -
a Variable CKH in Wel12 has no unit (Count Unknown unit =1 and
Wells where present = Well2).

o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 343
Project Data i/anagement Schlumberger
o
2
Exercise ldentifying lssues in a Dataset
ln this exercise, you use the various lists and variables available in
o
Techlog to identify the units, families, and erroneous values
present in the dataset named Harmonization_Exercise. o
.,' NOTE: These issues will be fixed in the next lesson.

1. Create a filter on the dataset Harmonization Exercise in the

o
Project browser.
2.
3.
Open the variables inventories from the Techdata+ menu.
Open the Variables without unit inventory as a tab in the
a
4.
Quick data mining window.
Open the Variables without families inventory as a tab in the
Quick data mining window.
o
5. ln the Variables without unit inventory tab, notice these
issues:
.
o
The variable CKH in Well2 is missing a unit. The unit should

.
be mD.
The variable RHOB_DH_ADN_RT is missing a unit. The
o
unit should be g/cc.
. The variables RT and RW have an unknown unit. The unit
should be ohm.m.
a
. The variable TNPH_ADN_RT is missing a unit. The unit
should be v/v. o
6. ln the Variables without families inventory tab, notice
these issues:
. MDepth is missing a family. The family should be Measured
a
Depth.
. RHOB_DH_ADN_RT has an unknown family. The family
should be Bulk Density.
o
7. ln the Variables inventory tab, notice these issues:
. The name for the gamma ray variables is not harmonized.
o
ln Well1, the gamma ray is named
GR_CDR_RAW_RT_backup, while the gamma ray
variables are named GR_CDR_RAW_RT in the other wells. o
. The gamma ray variables have two units: gAPl and pR/h.
o
u4 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Poect Data Management

. The variables in CPOR do not all have the same family.

o Some have the family Core Porosity, while others are
assigned the family Fast Shear Uncertainty. The second
family has not been assigned correctly and should be set to

o .
Core Porosity.
The variable HAFWL has two units: m and ft. All units
should be harmonized to ft.
a . According to naming conventions, the variable MDepth
should be renamed MD.

o .
.
The family should be Measured Depth.
The unit of the variable MDepth is not consistent with the
values of the variable (> 8,000 m, while the ïVDSS is below
o .
8,200 ft). The unit should be set to ft.
The variable VSH has values inconsistent with its unit. The

o unit is v/v, meaning that the values should range between 0

and 1. The erroneous values must be clipped.

3
o Lesson Data Harmonization

You can perform the harmonization of data (renaming, assigning

o and converting units, and assigning families) in three ways:

. Sequentially solving one problem afrer the other using the

o .
.
Project browser
Automatically using the lnventory tools
Using Data harmonization tools.

O
o
a
o
o
Techlog Fundamentals, Version 20'13 345
)
Prolect Data Management Schlumberger
o
Data Harmonization using the Project Browser
ln the Properties window (Figure 3), you can manually change
O
properties such as the unit or the family of a variable. Many of the
properties have drop-down menus from which to choose, while
others require that you enter a value or term.
o
(L o
Properties
U.i..t, Verieble (wc-o 1.Hârm on isatio n-Exercise. MD)
o
pàràmeters
zl Secondary
Value
MD
Pr(
o
Version number
Version Etetus
1

raw and latest

o
Dataset Harmo nisatio n_Exe rcise
Sampling rate
Main family
0.5 M
Reference
o
_t
Family
Unit
Compatible list
lcore Depth
1-oog
I
t-eq sererity
rauft elock
o
ll-tydraulic zone
Long list
Family unit
lLâtitude
Longitude
O
LWD
Description

r
Palette
Last modification
Measured Depth
One-Way Time
o
o
Date Reference

Time 15:37:59

5
o
Figure Properties window

a
O
o
346 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 201 3
o
O Schlumberger Project Data Management

Procedure 1 Performing Data Harmonization

a using the lnventory Tool

o With the lnventory tool, you can do basic data manipulation, such
as renaming a variable or assigning a family.

1 . Open the Variable inventory table from lhe Quick data mining

o 2.
drop-down menu.
Select a variable name and click Rename { .(or press F2).

o 3. Enter a new name for the variable in the Quick rename

dialog box and click OK.

o The new replacement name of the GR-CDR-RAW-RT-b.ckup:

cn-con-nnw-nrl

o 4. Similarly, to assign a family, selecl a variable name and click

o Assign to Family ü.

Data Harmonization using Data Harmonization

o Tools
The Data harmonization tools (Figure 6) are accessed from the

o Data >Techdata+ menu.

ti. .i
l-_
f§'{
o Data
harmonization
Query
tc

o -r
-
Query rename tool

Query convert tool

a X QuerY delete tool

Query duplicate tool

''
o q,
Query list tool

Query data tool

o Figure 6 Data harmonization menu

a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 u7

Proiect Data Manæement Schlumbergêr
o
The harmonization tools offer these capabilities:

Query rename tool Rename any object or property within

a
your project (Figure 7).

Example: A wrong unit is assigned to a

variable. The values are supposed to be
o
displayed in percentage but, instead,
are displayed in a v/v unit. Rename the
unit v/v to %.
o
I
WARNING: Be careful by using the Rename tool to change the
name of units. To convert units, you must use the
o
Query convert tool. Otherwise, the values will
remain the same even if the unit has been renamed
o
Query convert tool Convert any unit (Figure 9).

Example: CALI variables are supposed o

to be displayed as inches (in) but,
instead, are displayed as centimeters
(cm). You can convert the CALI variables
from cm to in to have harmonized units.
o
Query delete tool Delete any object or property.

Example: Some variables must be

o
Query
tool
duplicate
deleted from all the wells.
Duplicate any object or property. o
Query list too!
Example: Create a backup of your
variables before processing them.
List any object or property.
a
Example: Create a list of all the variables
in the project named DT.
o
too!
Query data Replace or remove numeric values for
any curve (Figure 10). a
Example: Some values of the variables
are erroneous (negative porosity, for
example) and must be removed. O
o
348 ïechlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
a
 schtumberger Project Data l\,lanagement
O
Data Harmonization Tools Scenarios
o This section contains a series of short scenarios that show you the
primary ways in which Data harmonization tools can be used.

o Query Rename Tool

Scenario: Rename the variable MDepth to MD.
o Allvariables named MDepth in the dataset
Harmonization_Exercise will be renamed to MD.

o WARNING: Always click Preview before renaming objects.

There is no undo function in Techlog.

o fild
Obi.d
Query Remme Tool

( vrieote'ræ Type of the object

a ,l,që
After:
Fiher
Moepth

MD
to be renamed

Previous name
(acts as a filter)

o well:

Oatâiat
fômitla
Hâamonr5ilron_Exerose New name

Filters to apply the

o
Va.table:

T.*-* -l .t query rename on

r---:-:j-:jj-,*"n.."( specific objects
Object naô€ Eefore Àtler
I lvG_Ol.Harmonrsaton-Erer05e.MD€plh MD€pth MD

o I
{
2 YJ6_02.Harmonrsaton-Elerose MO€plh Moepth MD
YJ6_0l.Harmonrsàlron-Erercrse.MOepth Mo€plh MD
t6_04 Hèrmonr5eton-ÊrÊroge.MOeplh Moepth MD
5 ?6_05 Harmonrsaùon-Erercrs€.MOeplh Moeplh MD

o Figure 7 Options in the Query Rename Tool dialog box

o
a
a
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 349
Prolect Data l\,lanagement Schlumberger
a
Scenario: Rename the unit of the variable MD from M to ft.
The object type is now Variable unit. You must apply a filter on the
a
variable named MD to avoid renaming the unit of other variables
(Figure 8).

All variable units M in the variable MD in the dataset

o
Harmonization_Exercise will be renamed to ft.
-'r Query Rename Tool
o
o
Find

Object ÿpe: Variable unit

Before:
After:
M

ft o
Filter
o
Family o
o
i/:r:'r o, '.'-

1l
Object name I eàràiÀJanàil
Mft o
Mft
Mft
Mft
o
o
Figure 8 Query Rename Tool window
o
O
o
350 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
a Schlumberger Project Data Management

Query Convert Tool

o Scenario: The units of the variable GR CDR RAW need to be
converted to gAPl.

o All variables named GR RAW CDR RT will be converted to

gAPl.

o Query Convert
Find
Tool x

o Object typ€: Variable unit

Beforq i

o -
Well:

o
o
o Before After
gapi gAPI

o Figure 9 Query Convert Tool window

uR/h gAPI

o
a
a
a
o
a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 351
a Project Data Management

Query Convert Tool

o Scenario: The units of the variable GR CDR RAW need to be
converted to gAPl.

o All variables named GR RAW CDR RT will be converted to

gAPl.

o _Query Convert Tool '

Object typ€: Variable unit -t

,
After: gAPl

o Filter
Well:

O Dataset
Family

o Variable: GR_C DR_MW_RT

Preÿiew Convert

o Object name I
l.Harmonization-Exercise.GR-CDR-MW-Rï gapi
eetore I Rttet
gAPI

o Figure 9
.GR-CDR-RAW-RI uR/h

Query Convert Tool window

gAPI

o
a
a
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 JCt
 schtumberger Poect Data Management
O
Data Harmonization Exercises
o ln these exercises, you use the Data harmonization query tools
to repair data harmonization issues based on the scenarios
o defined in each exercise.

Exercise 3 Correcting a Missing Unit for a

o Variable in a Well

o Scenario: The variable CKH in Well2 is missing a unit. The unit

should be mD.

1. Open the Query rename tool by clicking Data > Techdata +

o > Query rcname tool.

2. Set the Object type to Variable unit.

3. Set the After field to mD.
o 4. Set a Well filter to Well2.
5. Set a variable filter to CKH.
o 6. Click Preview and click Rename.
7. Click Yes to edit the variable.

o Exercise 4 Correcting a Missing Unit for

Variable RHOB_DH_ADN_RT
o Scenario: The variable RHOB_DH_ADN_RT is missing a unit.
The unit should be g/cc.

o 1.
2.
Open the Query rename tool.
Set the Object type to Variable unit.

a 3.
4.
Set the After fleld to g/cc.
Set a variable fllter to RHOB_DH_ADN_RT.
5. Click Preview and click Rename.
a 6. Click Yes to edit the variable.

O
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 353
Project Data Management Schlumbêrger
o
tâ Exercise 5 Correcting an Unknown Unit
o
Scenario: The variables RT and RW have an unknown unit. The
unit should be ohm.m.

1. Open the Query rename tool.

C
2. Set the Object type to Variable unit.
3.
4.
Set the Before field to OHM_PER_M.
Set the After field to ohm.m.
o
5.
6.
Set a variable filter to RT.
Click Preview and click Rename.
o
7.
8.
Click Yes to edit the objects.
Repeat the same operation for the variables RW.
TIP: A quicker way to correct an unknown is to create a
o
conditional selection in your Project browser on RT
and RW, then apply a filter. Then you can use the
Query rename tool to change the unit.
o
An alternate method is to write a filter in the Properties
window of the Query rename tool. ln the Properties
o
window, you can select two types of expression: basic (DOS)
and complex (UNIX/Perl). o
'' . Properties =x
1 OOleo: Variablc Mel
Properÿ
I 1. H armonization-Exerc ise.RT
lvatue F
o
I.
ik-s_yli.l.SIPIg::lg.l.:.-v--p-9"...-complex(uNDVFer-
DisOlay the filter
tind
o
|
I
I e"ro,"
ouject type
o
I' Fitt"'att", o
|
I w.l
o
I

Dataset
I Familv
Ii Variable

o
354 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 201 3
o
a Schlumberger Project Data Management

For this example you can select complex and insert RITIW
o in the F/ter section in the Variable field. All syntax
expressions are available in the Techlog Help file. RT and
RW variables will be selected automatically.

o
o
Exercise 6 Correcting a Missing Unit for
Variable TNPH ADN RT a
Scenario: The variable TNPH_ADN_RT is missing a unit. The

o unit should be per fraction.

1. Open the Query rename tool.

2. Set the Object type to Variable unit.
o 3.
4.
Set the Afrer field to v/v.
Set a variable filter to TNPH_ADN_RT.

a 5.
6.
Click Preview and click Rename.
Click Yes to edit the objects.

o Exercise 7 Correcting a Missing Family

Scenario: MDepth is missing a family. The family should be
o Measured Depth. Additionally, to be consistent with other
datasets, this variable should be renamed MD.

o 1. Open the Query rename tool.

2. Set the Object type to Variable family.
3. Set the After field to Measured Depth.
a 4. Set a variable filter to MDepth.
5. Click Preview and click Rename.
a 6. Set the Object type to Variable name.
7. Set the Before field to MDepth and the After field to MD.
L
a 9.
Click Preview and click Rename.
Click Yes to edit the families

a
O
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 355
Project Data Management Schlumberger
o
8
Exercise Correcting an Unknown Family
Scenario: RHOB_DH_ADN_RT has an unknown family. The
o
family should be Bulk Density.

1. Open the Query rename tool. o

2. Set the Object type to Variable family.
3. Set the Before field to Bulk Density LWD. O
4. Set the After field to Bulk Density.
5. Click Preview and click Rename.
6. Click Yes to edit the families.
o
Exercise 9 Correcting a Variable Assigned to
Multiple Families
o
Scenario: The variables CPOR are assigned to various families. O
1. Open the Query rename tool.
2. Set the Object type to Variable family.
3. Set the Before field to Fast Shear Uncertainty.
o
4. Set the After field to Core Porosity.
5. Click Preview and click Rename. o
6. Click Yes to edit the family.

Exercise 10 Correcting a Variable that is not

o
Harmonized

Scenario: The name for the gamma ray variable is not

o
harmonized.
't. Open the Query rename tool. o
2. Set the Object type to Variable name.
3. Set the Before field to GR_CDR_RAW_RT_backup.
4. Set the After field to GR_CDR_RAW_RT.
o
5. Click Preview and click Rename.
6. Click Yes to edit the variable. O
o
356 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Proiect Data l\,lanagement

Exercise 11 Correcting a Variable that has Two

o Units

o Scenario: The variable HAFWL has two units, m and ft.

1. Open the Query convert tool.
2. Set the Object type to Variable unit.
o 3. Set the Before field to m.
4. Set the After field to ft.
o 5. Set a variable filter to HAFWL.
6. Click Preview and click Convert.
7. Click Yes to convert the variables.
o Exercise 12 Correcting a Variable that has an
a lncorrect Unit
Scenario: The variable MD is in M, but it should be ft.

o 1.
2.
Open the Query convert tool.
Set the Object type to Variable unit.

o 3.
4.
Set the Before field to M.
Set the After field to ft.
5. Set the variable filter to MD.

o 6.
7.
Click Preview and click Convert.
Click Yes to convert the variables.

a Exercise 13 Adding a Suffix to Variables

o Scenario: The variables DENC, GR_CDR_RAW_RT,

RHOB_DH_ADN_RT, and RT should be followed by _up.

1. ln the P§ect browser, select these four variables in Well4.

a 2. Create a conditional selection and create a filter.
3. Open the Query rcname tool.
4. Set the Object type to Variable name.
O 5. Ensure that the regular expression type in the Properties
window is set to simple (DOS).
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 357
Project Data Manæement schlumberser O
6. Set the Before field to *.
7. Set the After field to %VariableName%_up. O
8. Click Preview and click Rename. The selected variables

9.
now have the _up suffix.
Click Yes to edit the variables.
o
a Exercise 14 Gorrecting a Value that is
!nconsistent with its Unit
o
Scenario: The variable VSH has values inconsistent with its unit.
Several values lower than 0 and higher than 1 are present. These
o
values should be replaced by the absent value.

1. Remove the filter applied in the previous exercise and create

a filter on Harmonization_Exercise.
o
2. Open the Query data tool.
3. Set the Object type to Variable.
o
4. Set the Before field to Data < 0.
5. Set the After field to -9999. o
6. Set a variable filter to VSH.
7. Click Preview and click Edit.
8. Set the Before field to Data > 1.
o
9. Click Preview and click Edit.
10. Remove the current filter. o
Review Questions o
. Which tool would you use to change all -999.25 to -9999?
. What can you do if one of the units is degrees and is not
recognized by Techlog?
o
.
.
How can you see the list of variables present in a project?
To make a change in the family name at the project level,
which harmonization tool would you use?
o
. Which harmonization tool would you use to convert the
temperature of several wells from Celsius to Fahrenheit? o
. Can you add a suffix to all variables in a dataset?

o
358 Techbg Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
o Project Data l\,lanagement

o Summary
ln this module, you learned about:
.
o .
identifying inconsistent units and families in the data using
the Quick data mining tools in Techlog
using the Data harmonization tools to rename variables and

o families and assign and convert units.

a
O
o
o
o
o
O
o
a
o
o
a Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 359
o
o
a
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
O
o
a
a
o
o Application Workflow Interface (AWl) Basic Concepts

O Module 12 Application Workflow

lnterface (AWl) Basic
Goncepts
,
ln Techlog, interpretation workflows are usually composed of

o several computational methods. The Application Workflow

lnterface (AWl) is the Techlog generic tool that allows you to work
in a multi-well and multi-zone environment, while efficiently

o controlling interpretation parameters. This module introduces you

to basic AWI concepts.

o Learning Objective
After completing this module, you will know how to use the AW
o interface:

Lesson 1 Basic Concepts of the

o Interface

o As an example, we will be using the Quanti interface and some of

its interpretation tools. The Quanti module, shown in Figure 1, is
located under the Petrophysics menu.

o @
-Ë G
Ccology ùilng Rcrcrvolr Gcophll3Ls

Ë- ô
o .K
t-
Summari€6

o Figure I Quick look method under the Quanti menu

o
O
O
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 361
Application Workflow lnterface (AWl) Basic Conæpts Schlumberger
O
When you select a method, a Data source selection window
(Figure 2) and allows you to select the mnemonic/input data
(family name, alias, or variable name) to be used within the
O
method.

lf you apply a filter in the Project browser, only the selected

wells or dataset will be displayed as well as the families,
o
variables present in the filtered wells or dataset.
o
wells - all
o
â wettt
A weil2
g
U!
f I
f, amot,tuoe

:.n1:","
o.e
gotto,i not. t"rp",.l
' !eqtrg!,
,B!tk

'
Ettttry.,
RÊs'süYlty > |
t
!
Neutron Porosrtv
Burk Density

Resiniütv - Deep
o
q. I
I
I!
I
Surk Density
Bulk Density Côrrection
Bulk tluid volume
cabte soeed
o
O
Figure 2 Data type selection window for the Quanti Quick
look method

The left pane contains a list of all the wells and datasets present in
o
the Project browser (or the ones selected with a filter). The
center pane lists all the families Ë, aliases tL, or variable tl.
names by clicking on the corresponding icons. You also can
o
choose to display all the families or families in common for the
selected wells. The Main Family box Elallows you to organize
the list by main family.
o
For the Quanti Quick look method, Neutron and Bulk density are
mandatory inputs (white background). Without these inputs, the
computation cannot be launched. The other equation parameter,
o
Resistivity, is optional. lf a continuous measurement (curve)
exists, it is introduced in this step. o
A white box indicates a field that is required (mandatory)
to run the method; a gray box indicates optional input.
o
o
362 Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3
o
I Schlumberger

When you click the Create button, the Techlog Workflow

Application Workflow lnterface (AWl) Basic Concepts

o manager opens (Figure 3). The Workflow manager handles the

various methods supported by the Application Workflow lnterface
(AWl) and it allows you to build complex workflows.

o The Workflow manager window has two main sections:

. Workflow overview, where all of the methods are displayed

a . Methods seffrngs, where you willfind the details and

parameters for each method.

o f.i. JUQ@ntrqurctt@k. û Ë aisplay - > ll O

'rôaa
o wo,row /
. ..| WorKlow
lnpul dab tôvonrc

Merhodi ,-r"o yj1 *"*

/
I
parafters Oulpt

disp...
| ]
âflî".
!É I{EÉl
m uc
il ;;:i
ZoBùon Endpornù s.turatron tlàg pararctec
'Please drop yorrr
tdaràsei' he,c
læk t I Data*t

o &4 Quanti quick disp-. ll

d? Neutro
s! Eulk D6itY
R.s,livity
B

a JC

ti

o Figure 3 Workflow manager window

o WorkflowOverview
fhe Workflow overuiew seclion has several icons to manage the

o workflows and methods.

+.) Create a new workflow

o § Delete the workflow (or the method)

Move the method down

*
o 1r Move the method up

o f+ Filldown

FilluP
1t
O
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 363
Application Workflow Interface (AWl) Basic Concepts Schlumberger
o
The Workflow overview section (Figure 4) consists of four tabs:
Controller, lnput data, Favorite parameters, and Outputs. o
r.o WnrHlnw mâMdêr
Load Save View
Workflow overview
O
O+1bÀr
Automatic
o
WorHlow / Methods Enabled Pause

, r'r Workflow
li4 Quanti quick look
Mode
disp...
disp... Il
launch
o
Figure 4 Workflow overview window
o
Controller Tab
This tab contains workflows and methods (Figure 5) you can
o
check the status of your workflows and methods, and enable or
disable them.
O
Workflow ôvervi€w

"Q*t
@|
lete
hputdata tavo.itepa(ameters outputs
i- lAutomatic
o
Itàuse
/
o
WorHlow Methods
1',""*]f"il
I

I [aunch
. ,.. worHtow EI display
E ll l
Quanti quick look AJ sare and display

Figure 5 Workflow and methods display o

Name of the workflow: When the workflow is selected, you
can view or change some properties from the Properties
window as shown in Figure 6. You can double click to
o
rename it.
Name of the method: Click on it to view or change the
selected method properties from the Properties window.
o
o
o
364 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
 schlumberger Application Workflow lnterface (AWl) Basic Concepts
O
'' Propcrties =x
) Object V[brkfrow managcr
'
Property ]vatue
!Apply mode 9i-:P13v- ". "
I Automatic launch no

I Automatic parameter propagation no

I Use Ûre parameters limits yes

Cascade launch no
Real-time updated yes

Multi well layout ye§

Column unit hide yes

Transpose all the tabs yes

. Display
Layout template Current
Template type Well template
, Outputs
Workflow Group
Prefix
Suffix
Group

O Figure 6 Workflow manager Properties window

From the Controller tab, you can manage several workflows in

the same pane. You can navigate between workflows and
methods in a tree view system. You also can load a workflow or
create new workflows in this window. A new group will appear as
a new branch of a tree.

NOTE: Each workflow is independent and has its own dataset, o

zonation, and parameters.

When you open a method, a workflow containing the method is

created automatically. The column on the right (Method seffings
area) is updated according to the selected method inlhe Workflow
overview section.

Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 365

a
Application Workflow lnterface (AW) Basic Concepts Schlumberger
o
This table describes the actions that you can take on the
Controller tab. a
Workflod
Methods
Enable
Shows the workflow/methods name.

Activates or deactivates the methods and

o
Apply mode
workflows.
Runs the workflow or method in display, save, or
save and display mode.
t
Pause Stops the workflow at a specific method when
auto launch and Cascade modes are enabled.
a
Automatic
launch
Activates or deactivates Automatic launch
o
),
By right-clicking on a method, you can Run the computation
select a family, or delete a workflow or method. You also can
create a new workflow with a right-click, or by clicking the ) o icon
o
in the top left corner. When you add a new method, it is inserted
inside the selected workflow automatically. o
Access the workflow and method Properties window by selecting
the workflow/method and going to the Properties window. lf the
Properties window is closed, press F4 to open it. o
U
TIP: Each tool, method, workflow, and plot has its own
properties. o
o
o
o
o
o
366 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
 schtumberger Application Workflow lnterface (AWl) Basic Concepts
O
lnput Data Tab
This tab is a summary of all inputs for the displayed workflow
(Figure 7). This is a table view, with the option to filter on each
column, fill up it, fitl down 1o, and transpose (using the
Transpose table icon G).
When setting an input in this view, the selected variable is used
for the corresponding family in all methods of the workflow
containing this family as input.
Workflow overviw
rrQlÔ fui.
ig"*f*@,
well I
uselcroupl Dabset ] wortctow j xeutronl art
_
ocrutty I ncsistivityl
IIII
I-

orr.r_v
il
I

DENS SFT I

Ë'J^?' I

Figure 7 lnput data tab display

Favorite Parameters Tab

A favorite parameter is a parameter that is applied to the entire
workflow, regardless of the zone or the input dataset. By default,
this tab is empty (Figure 8).
WorHlowoveMew
Ȥl'i bi.
r..onuor€r , @i
rry*- unitl *
Parameter æmel vatuel oescriptionl wortspacel
You can add your
favorite parameters
here from right side

Figure 8 Favorite parametes tab display

To create a favorite parameter, open the Parameters tab in the

Method seffings section, then choose the parameter name and
select Add parameter to Favorites.

Techlog Fundamentals, version 20'13 Jb/

O
Application WorkfloRr lnterface (AWl) Basic Concepts Schlumberger
o
o
The column corresponding to the chosen parameter is grayed out.

NOTE: The first value in the column is used as the favorite

o
parameter.

lnlhe Workflow overview, the Favorite parameters tab now o

displays the parameter. You can set a unique value for the entire
workflow. This is particularly useful for mud properties and other
pa ra meters used for envi ronmenta I correction. o
Outputs Tab
This tab shows a summary table of all outputs for the selected
o
workflow (Figure 9).You can enable or disable the outputs,
rename or change families, and edit the output name.
WorHlow overview
o
rrSSô 1+re
Controller
ur"l Nâme
Input data

I
favonteparamete"
Famity
@
I un* leatette worirto* |
o
rjyes rrsn Shale Volume -v/v . -woftflow
2lyes nocrfrag
3lyes PHIE
4lr3 PHn
Net Rock Flag
Porosly
tnectrve porosity
Effective
porosity
Total porosity
- unitless -
, vlv
- ÿlv
- Workflow
'WorHlow
- WorKlow
o
Net Reservoir Flâg . .
o
s]yes nesflag unitless - WorHlow
6l1m swE Effective Water Sâturation 'vlv - Workflow
7]yes Paynag Net Pay Flag
PaY Flag 'unitless - 'WorHlow

9
Figure Outputs tab display
o
o
o
O
o
o
368 Techlog Fundarn€ntals, Version 201 3
o
o Schlumberger Application Workflow lnterface (AWl) Basic Concepts

Method Seffings Secfion

O To the right of lhe Workflow overview is lhe Method setflngs
section. The tabs allow you to control the different processing

a parameters. The first two tabs (lnputs and Zonation) are common
for all the Techlog methods.

The other tabs are method-specific and allow you to control the

o parameters related to the processing method. Figure 10 shows

the options and icons along the top of the Method sefflngs section.

a 1

Quanti qurck took.Ù

/4
2 3 MethodÉnings
tatsptay/
567
>llo
o tÊi
m li2i

o
o
il
-ôA

É
s
**:
Bulk Density
lo Resistivity jDEPR -
ffiI
Neûron iruguf . NEUT
,DENS . DENS
DEPR
Jt
o E

a .:l:
'c
10/
o Figure '10 Method settings section

o I Name of the method: You can include or exclude a

calculation method by checking the box. This is useful
when launching Cascade mode, in which the method

o 2 ü
remains a part of the workflow but the computation is not
performed for the method.
Family/alias selection: Reopen the Data ÿpe
o selection window to change a family, alias, or
variable. Family and alias selection window.

o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 369
Application Workflow Interface (AWl) Basic Concepts Schlumberger
o
3 .fr1 Activate Automatic launch: An additional computation
is run any time a modiflcation is made in the tables (for
example, new input or modilication of parameters).
o
4 Apply mode:
. Display: Display the input and output curves in a layout.
o
.
.
Save: Save the resulting output curves.
Save and display:A combination of both the display and
o
save options.
5 > Run the computation. Optionally, press shortcut F7. o
6 ll Pause the process.

o1 Run the Monte Carlo algorithm for the method. (This

method is not available in the Quick took method, but is
o
available for other methods).
7 o Delete the selected method. O
8 Horizontal tabs
. lnputs: Wells, datasets and variables are displayed.
Variables can be modified.
o
. Zonation dataset: Defines the zones for the
calculation o
. Parameters: Additional equation parameters
9 Vertical tool bar: This vertical bar may be slightly different
with some additional options that are related to the
o
individual method.

m Open a layout with the inputs o

il lnsert zones from the Zonation dock window

_o.a Fill left o

a? Fill right
r3r Switch between variable or constant parameter o
}
§|
Extend to the zones

Save all parameters in the zonation dataset

o
E Load the parameters from the zonation dataset
o
370 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Application Workflow lnterface (AWl) Bâsic Concepts

o /'
Copy a table

Restore default parameters

o ;li
10 C
Open the Parameters manager

Transpose the table view: Reverse rows and columns.

This is very useful when working with many
a parameters.

a Exercise 1 Applying Basic Concepts of the

lnterface for a Quick look
Petrophysical Analysis
Z
a ln this exercise, you will open and set up a Quick look analysis.
This method provides a simple petrophysical interpretation, based

o on endpoints that can be graphically adjusted. Quick look is

developed to compute Shale volume, Porosity and Water
Saturation, based on a Neutron-Density crossplot and using the

o following end-points:
. Matrix
. Fluid
a .
.
Wet shale
Dry shale (automatically derived from shale porosity)

a 1. Before startingthe exercise, create a filter to select the

o 2.
datasets DATAFULL for Welll and Well2.
Select the E Quick look method from the Quanti menu.
3. ln the Quanti Quick look data source selection window that

o opens, enter the Neutron Porosity, Bulk Density (mandatory

inputs), and the Deep Resistivity (optional input) families
under the Data type assignment section.

O
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 371
Application Workflow Interface (AW) Basic Concepts Schlumberger
o
o
o
o
o
4. Click Create. The Workflow manager window opens.
Drag the DATAFULL dataset from Welll and Well2 into the
o
Method settrngs area. The interface displays one line per
dataset, with all the available variables to be used in this
method.
o
Wormdovwiew
o
'.ô.l' ti.

J disptay
' aùlk Ocniriy
o
o
E qEmi quad læ& / disptay ll ir
D€N.MJ
fr D€N-O1R
D€N.8R

l DEN.RlR

tl
E
o
TIP: lf you must use a variable that is not present in the
'G
o
input dataset but it is present in the other datasets in

5.
the same well, complete these steps:

ln the Project browser, click on the word Datasets.

o
o
o
Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Applicâtion Workflow lnterface (AWl) Basic Concepts

6.
o ln the Properties dock window, under the Options tab,
toggle Resampling > Quick resampling to yes.
. Set Quick resampling to yes when you want the program to

o search all datasets in the well for the variables needed for
the method, when the dataset you dragged into the method
does not contain a required variable.
.
a lf Quick resampling is set to no and a dataset that does not
contain all the curves is required by the method, the dataset
will not be added to the method. An error message will be

o 7.
displayed in the Output window indicating that the dataset
is missing required variables.
ln the lnputs tab, select the correct inputs: NEUT, DENS and

o 8.
DEPR.
Click the Zonation tab. Here, you define specific intervals to
launch the computations. By default, the computations are

o performed from the top of the dataset to the bottom of the

dataset. For the exercise, we won't change the zonation.
9. From the Endpoints tab, you will set the endpoint

o parameters. Launch the neutron-density crossplot (L::) from

the action menu icons on the right to assist you in selecting
endpoints.

o Refer to the figure that follows.

a
a
o
a
o
o
a Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 373
Application Worknow Interface (AW) Basic Concepts Schlumberger
a
o
,9
E
LrI_i .

o
ûr
E;I
E!
& r -l
l

I
a
E
>èl
È!
ÈE
6. t ü .l
I

I
o
o ttü6

* fi
iJ
|

I
I
a
&E
a
I
o Ë ol
-;l
ËË |

-t
6.
I

o
o
:Ë
-§
r$
o
aa§
6

'I*E ctact
o
ÈË.o

Ë;lI
s
?lË
;lllffixÊ
8<
a
P,E
vP
SÔg
?-a9
àç;
r >-
5à:
dàô
o,a:
a
Éq
§s§ss§
§-
'l_sl E |l rf.lfll
: U
ôq
8:T
G62-

o
a
i ,i sr
r*
3.., E
ü Ë."
>i2 ! EE
I 9r
9= ;§. t EÈ ÈE
5g
s-

o
o
= E:T =.à.
o
374 ïechlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
 Schlumberger Application Workflow Interfæe (AWl) Basic Concepts

From on the Neutron-Density crossplot you can adjust the

following end-points: Matrix, Fluid, and Wet shale. Dry shale
end point is automatically derived from shale porosity using
these equations:

o RHO4., =
(RHO"hot.-
(1 - PHlshof)
PHlrprr*l)

(N PHlshsle - PH 1"61" * l)
PHI47y =
(7 - PHIsha]æ)

fhe PHl1611" value can be modified in the Endpoints tab

(Sha/e porosity parameter). The dry shale endpoint of the
crossplot is defined by the Shale Porosity parameter and is
adjusted automatically when adjusting the Density shale and
Neutron shale endpoints using these formulae.
Matrix - Fluid - Wet Shale endpoints can be adjusted
graphically. When you move them, the values are
automatically updated in the table of the Endpoints tab.
Similarly, when you modify the endpoint value, the crossplot
is automatically updated.

Otud*hBnMtg@9dûô

;)ôaa ^..i ,l4qrû*d.ar']d@ .Illô

1aiifll i** t.p.ir ur,rya .æ §frfl' Im. nar-6
**r*r ,*E "

I **
h
-
)Æa 7)9

d mq.mrg-rr
E Mi@(r&
=-
2524.31I
26,
o
Bgæl
26t
o

- kte@o3) I I
- @[d(t]
.-lhry*{ÿ6!)
alw*tm
l
?!e8
l
2!s I
é*
o.lurt orutt I
*F@t ) 02, 025
kÿt*(rdJ 27s731
tu-rù(r/t) 02{3111 02Æ211
,G

TIP: The figure shows that you can activate lhe Data densiÿ
option to guide you in proper wet clay endpoint
selection.

10. On the Saturation tab, choose the method to be used for

saturation computation.

Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 375

Application Workflow lnterface (AW) Basic Concepts Schlumberger
a
11 . lnput these values.
.
.
a, m, and n values o
Shale resistivity (for non -Archie method)
.
.
Formation water Resistivity
Rw at formation temperature.
o
!û
For this exercise, you will use the Archie saturation equation.
Enter 0 . 03 ohm. m as RW at formation temperature. o
WorKlow matùaoer

Wormow @ervierY
frir
€
a
-ô11
Wormow / Methods
lir lnpus zonation
m1r2
Endpoints ffil ttôg,parâmeters
a
r rr WOTKIOW t il
lé1 Quanti quick look r l^

^?
a
s
B
,lc
22§.8 72ÿ
2524411 8:t84.æ1
Arciie - Archie
o
li 1l
I
22
22 O
5
:t!

o
a
o
o
o
o
376 Tæhlog Fundarnentals, Verslon 2013
a
a Schlumberger Application Workflow lnterface (AWl) Basic Concepts

12.In the FIag parameters tab:

a a. Set the Shale Volume cutoff to define the rock type.
b. Set the Porosity cutoff to define reservoir.

o c. Set the Water Saturation to define the

The flags are defined as:
pay.

o ROCK: Shale Volume < Shale Volume_Max

RES: Shale Volume < Shale Volume_Max and Porosity
> Porosity_Min

o PAY: Shale Volume < Shale Volume_Max and Porosity

> Porosity_Min and Water Saturation < Water
Saturation_Max

o 'o
toad
Workflow manaqer
Save vierY
Workflow overview Method settings

o r'rgll î+ir r l4 Quànti quicklook

ls:I,li{t[HrInputdataravo)Etnpuszonation.!ndpoi|t'saturation@
|iEnabtec *
m z
- ü gi oisplay

1 lr
>tto
WorKlow/Methods ,".ffi , ]

o . ll Wor6low
lÉ: Quanti quick look
,
v
ü
Ü Orou,
!r Well
:^
i
lwefff I
I

l- uaroxr ,- ,*.*f -
o 5i
b
zone
^1 zone
S' Too
Too
m
lau
lo*
)zzos.a
)zzos.a
ALL
7250

iz524.Btt B38/,w7
(v/v) lo.f s
o
JC Volume-Max 0.15
ta ity-Min (v/v) lO.z 0.2
(v/Y)10.s 0.5

O
o
a
a
o
a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 377
Application Workflow lnterface (AWl) Basic Concepts Schlumberger
o
13. You can now launch the computation. Click Run the
computation ) or press F7 in display mode. A layout
automatically opens.
O
-i o
O
o
a
14. ln the Workflow manager window, activate lJ Automatic
O
launch.
When activated, any modification made in the table (new
input, modification of parameters) is reflected in real time on
o
the layout. lt means that you can now modify any parameter
in the Workflow manager and the changes will be updated
on the fly in the LogView layout.
o
a. Observe the changes with RW = 0.01 Ohm.m and
RW = 0.1 Ohm.m.
b. You can also modiÿ the endpoint values on the crossplot
o
and observe the changes in the layout.
c. (Optional) lnsert these values and observe the changes
the LogView plot:
in o
. Schlumberger CP-1c & CP-1d Neutron Porosity vs
Bulk Density NPHlchart o
. Overlap the Matrix endpoint with the 0 porosity
sandstone line.
O
o
O
378 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
a
o Schlumbergêr Application Workflow lnterface (AWl) Basic Concepts

When you are satisfied with the result, save the Quick look
a 15.
result.
a. Select the method Quanti Quick look.

o b.

c. On
Open the Properties window.
the Output variables tab, insert a suffix, create a
Group, or select both.

o By default, the suffix and Group are named _ql and

Quicklook, respectively, and can be modified by the user.

o Quicklook
I Payftag-qt
f pun_qt
Net Pay
General
Flag
Flag
unitless
vlv

o {. pnn_qt
] Res flag-qt
Total Forosiÿ
Net Reservoir Flag
vlv
unitless

I Roctttag-qt Net Rock Flag unitless

o L swE-qt
1. vstt_qt
Effective Water
Shale Volume
Saturation vlv
v/v

o § ,'!!ritr
U4ooiG(tqdraabor
r@
o Property ,valæ

o
Enable all otpft deraull
Save empty oulpÈ rc
Display advamed outputs rc
. q. oüpd-l vsH

o
Name vsH
U* ye5

Deription volurc ot rhale

Family Shale Volume
Unit

o Pôlere
Monte Carlo dirtribution
Format
( ortputj
ys
auto
Ro<kllô9

o { output-3
( output-l
{. output-s
{. output-6
PHIE
PHTT

Res

swE
flag

o
{- output-z Pày flag

d. Change the display mode to save or save and display.

). There is now a group named Quick look in

o e. Click Run
the DATAFULL dataset.

o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 379

Application Workflow lnterface (AWl) Basic Concepts Schlumberger
o
16. To save the Quick look workflow and the associated
parameters, go to the Workflow manager and select the
Save menu, then select Save the workflow.
O

Ll Sæthemamgec. CM+S,M Method settings

o
" Ô ubûtto* For' sI td displav - > ll O
gr,,U,,
t. Sâ\re the wormil as lemplat€- Cùl +S, T
on Endpoints gturaùon ]!8,ti!ai[{Ilaff
l!z
O
WorHl<
II
k
R Or.rpticatcürcworKtow. Shift+A
P.r.mctcr.
JC Sàve the workflow paramet6... Ctrl+S. P
I
IAll
o
!s
JC
6ne-
bp
Borlom
(v/v) lO.rS
]zsza.err
1250
8384.001
o
Shale Volume-Max 0.15
E Forosity-Min(v/v) lO:

/
UJfü Srturni.n-t .I (v/Y) 5 i
O.
0.2
0.5 o
17. ln the Workflow window, name the workflow (Quj-cr loox)
o
and check the box to save the Workflow parameters. You can
save files in the Userfolder, the Company folder, or the
Project lolder.
o
o
F
Ll wûtn@

ProJect

/
r
Workflow

Wormow
nàme
parameteB
Quick look

Qurck look_Wo
a
Projectparameters
Wells pârâmeteB
Quick look_PR

Quick look_WE
o
Zones parameters Qurck look_ZO

tL__
Keep input table selection
Save Close
o
O
O
380 ïechlog Fundârnentals, Version 2013
a
 schtumberger Application Workflow lnterface (AWl) Basic Concepts
O
Parameters and the associated workflow are saved in
o separate files.
. Workflow file: Contains the methods, their order, and their

a .
input families (variables)
Project parameters file: Contains the parameters defined as
project parameters
.
o .
Wells parameters file: Contains the parameters defined as
wells parameters
Zones parameters file: Contains the parameters defined as

o zones parameters
TIP: The name you assign to a workflow is the same name
given to the associated parameter files. The associated

a files are appended with suffixes, depending on file type

(for example, _PR, _WE, and _ZO).

o 18. Click Save. The workflow is now saved in your Project

browser. The workflow and the parameter file are saved in
the project and can be launched in another workspace or in a

a new Techlog t"tt'.oïoro,o*,

r.r Quick look

o Workflow manager
Project parameters

o Wells parameters
Zone parameters
WorHlow parameters

o 3t3 Quict< look-wo

o 19. Close the LogView display without saving it.

o
o
o
O Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 381
Application Workflow lnterface (AWl) Basic Concepts schlumberger O
Lesson 2 Shale Volume from Gamma
Ray

ln this second lesson, more AWI options (interactivity, zonation,

parameters management) explored through several exercises
using the VShale gamma ray method.

n Exercise 1 Creating a New Workflow

Before starting the volume of shale computation, you must create
a new workflow. The purpose of creating a shale volume workflow
is to have a workflow different from the workflow you set up
previously that was run for the entire session of the well.

You will use different sets of zones and input datasets.

,' NOTE: Each workflow is independent and has its own dataset,
zonation, and parameters.

1. ln the Workflow manager, click the Controller tab.

2. Click )) Create a new workflow.
3. Enter the name of the new workflow (vsh Gamma Ray).
. WordLow màr9er

*-Y'Y* i',A*1ffi;:
rlr2

-E I
..)'qr.d&t
)' Qlacl &t r riG.W
dÉp...
disp II
tsQr.iiqukkr@r , o,r,
] §l*
Zone
tArL ALL

h(ùr..Èffi ? 72ÿ 72:o

;--'-__--ii_.:::i:l.'' 8283.501 8384.æ1
Wortnæmm,@ o15 or5
o.2 02
(v/v) o5
J ox I cemr
05

NOTE: You can launch only one Workflow manager in any

given work space. ln any workflow, you can use only
one set of zones. This means that the zonation
selection will be shared by all methods in a given
workflow.

104
Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 O
o Schlumberger Application Workflow Interface (AWl) Basic Concepts

Computing the Shale Volume from

o Exercise 2
a Gamma Ray Curve

o This method computes the volume of shale with a GR curve as

input. During a computation performed on one or more zones, the
VSH_GR is automatically computed and displayed in a specific
layout. You will use this simple method to explore several options
O available in the AWl.

1. From the Quanti menu, select Shale volume > Gamma ray.
o 2. When the Data §pe selection window opens, select the
Gamma Ray family in the Dafa assignment section.
NOTE: You must have a gamma ray to launch this method. .Or

O
Petrophysics

o ,,j
:t IE
Shale
volume,
Porosrty and
gturation
i
K

t-
0
grlrmi{s

o ComHnGd
I
m€thodt
shatevolume...

trdh,ldud mcrhod,
Ctrl+shift+Q V V

o I
:
E
Gamma ray-

Neulron - Dens,ty...
Fotass,um...
Ctrl+$ifr+QVG
Ctrl+Shift+Q V T
Ctd+Shift+q V U

o
Ttpnum... Ctrl+Shift+Q V H

I Spontam6potential... CM+Shift+Q V P

I Sonic - Oenrity... Ctrl+Shift+q V S

I Neuùon - sonic... Ctrl+Shift+q V O

o I
I
I
Resistivity...

Themal neutron...
EbdromagrEticpropagation...
cril+shift+Q v
Ctrl+Shift+Q V N
Ctn+Shift+Q Y C
R

o I rtmt...

TIP: Optionally, GR_matrix and GR_shalez can be used as

Ctd+Shift+q V F

inputs but they must be inserted as continuous curves.

o lf GR_matrix and GR_shale are not inserted as

continuous curves, they are applied as constants in the
method.

o
O
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 383
Application Workllow lnterface (AW) Basic Conæpts Schlumberger
O

Data typ€ ,ihs Data type assignment

o
cqnqpî

O
rin

A wettt jll ll Core Forosity Gamma Ray > ll Gamnla Ray

A wettz
rÀ Ia Efl«trve ForosrtY Gèmmà Rây Maùrx >
 wett3 Etfætrve wôler Saturatr
a î--a:ls*ay___- 6amma Ray Shâle >
 wettl
A wetlg ( I
a
I
GeBal Flag
Height Abow fre wat
Hydrtrarbon Saturatior
o
a
Click Create. The VSH gamma ray method is automatically
added in the Vsh Gamma Ray workflow. O
Wormow overview
rrO+t
silllftltfl
lrio
Inputdatâ , tavo.iteparameters ,
Outputs
o
-
o
lautomatic
worHtow Methods E^.b,"d
,/
| l

,î,'"'d':
I lhE lrurr*n ]

. rr Quick look ", displày

lA Quanti quick look r display

o
Drag the dataset DATAFULL from Welll and Well2 into the
Method seff,ngs area. o
On the lnputs tab, verify that the Gamma Ray variable is
GAMM for Welll and Well2.
TIP: Keep the default zonation and the default values for
o
GR_matrix and GR_shale in the Zonation tab and
Parameters tab, respectively.

Open the Vsh gamma ray histogram by clicking Histogram [.

o
This opens a multi-well histogram that contains data from the
corresponding wells. All the options discussed previously in
the training are available (e.9., display the cumulate view).
o
Click 31: Display current Iayout parameters to display on
the layout the GR_shale (green vertical line) and GR_Matrix
(yellow vertical line) baselines.
o
O
384 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Application Worldlow Interface (AWl) Basic Conæpts

o When you move them, the GR_matrix and GR_shale values

are automatically updated in the table of the Parameters tab.
lf you hover the cursor over a line in the chart, the well

o and dataset name associated with the parameter line

appear.

8. Click rr.i Automatic launch. The VSH_GR calculation is run

a on the fly after the parameters are modified.
9. Launch the Vsh gamma ray method by clicking Run the
)
o computation in Display mode.

r.Oat r.r /Isq.m.ùr@ÿ -»[ôô

o
o
lBenmi'ry , t:*

o
t-*----. -

o
o ïmii i

o BEST PRACTICE: At this point, it is highly recommended

that you use Dashboard mode so that all
windows are visible by default. Every time
Ü(

o you modify a parameter at one location

(layout, histogram, or parameters), values
in other locations change automatically. lf
Automatic launch is activated, the result
o of the method updates as well.

The star in VSH_GR" indicates that the output is present in

o memory only and has not been saved in the database, because
the method has been launched in display mode.

o
a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 385
Application Workflow lnterface (AWl) Basic Concepts schlumberger O
On the Parameters tab in the Method seft/ngs crrEd'
area, several ùY,EIçrr
methods are available to compute the VSH:9 O
. Linear' . Stieber variation I

. Clavier . Stieber variation

O
. Larionov (Tertiary . Stieber Miocene and
"
rocks) Pliocene.
. Larionov (older rocks) O

a::i§ii;ii':i::i"i:iff.',i,iT3[xi;,lJl,i§ï,{,3''0"
equation:
o
GII - ;R^n1ri*
()Rindsy:ffi o
VSH : }Rin4"y
O
10. Move the shale and matrix baselines on one of the plots (or
other
5ff?#iiiff"iïi:?Tii,ll'n"
paramerers in the
o
11 . Hover over the baselines and move the vertical lines to
visualize the changes in the Parameters tab.
o NOTE:Table
O
value at one location automatically modifies the
value in other locations, including the table, O
histogram, and layout.

,, results, launch the method save and display or

]n iiff O
Lesson 3 Zonations in AWI O
There are three ways to create zonations in the Workflow
manager and using existing zonations. O
. Method 1: Create zones in the Zonation window
. Method 2: lnsert a zone using the lnteractive Selection tool
. Method 3: lnsert the existing set of zones from the Zonation
O
dock window.

O
386 TechlogFundarnentah,Version20'13
O
o Schlumberger Application Workflow lnterface (AWl) Basic Concepts

When creating a zonation, you must bear in mind these zonation

o rules:
. Manually creating a table of zones means that these zones

o exist only in the workflow, which is a temporary zone set. You

must save the workflow before you close it, otherwise, the
zone set will not be saved in the database.
.
a .
When saving a zonation, the Zonation name is the name of
the dataset.
lf a zone repeats in several wells (lithostratigraphy,

o chronostratigraphy, hydraulic unit), you must enter the exact

name of the zone when retrieving the table. A spelling error
will create a new zone.

O
O
Exercise 1 Creating Zones in the Zonation
Window a
This procedure explains how to manually create zones on the
Zonation tab in the Workflow manager.

o 1.

2.
ln the Method seffrngs section, click the Zonation tab.
Right-click on any line and select f- Add one row after the

o current position for Welll and Well2.

Method *ttrngs
,Ivshgammaray 'Ù È oisplay >llüÈô
o l-ü
m
Inputs
@l Parareters
Zonataon name: ZONATION-ALI
rlzl
Tffi
:i!
Gmp

o *
9r
a
w",,
Dataset
Zone
I !.
lf a
ritt t"tt

ooo o*,o* before the cutrem posrlon

Cûl+D
Ctrl+ U

Ctrl+l B

o
Too
b' Bonoa 8.1+ Add æ ril ü$t position
alts thc ilsrt
rilaftd posÙon Ctrl .l A
En un,, lril fært zoË from tJE zffition d«kwindffi Ctrl+G
JC Topzoredelta ü
-! t sl zffi 6i,t9 tE intdætivity tæl Ctrl+G, I
E Bottomzoredelta '{,E Cr€ateHzoBtromaninput

o
Shift+O

* Delete th€ curent row Shift+'

D( Delete all rows Ctrl +Oel

a,a

o Ë
Ü
H
Create *lection lrom the table
Cr€ate a temporary zonation

Save th€ table as zonation

datitæt
datart
Ctrl+C,

Cri+C, G
Shift+q Z
I

o Copy ttE zomtion table to tlE clipboard Cttl+C,Z

§'

o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 387

Application Worknow lnterface (AW) Basic Concepts Schlumberger
o
There are several icons and shortcut key combinations
available to you when working with zones. o
r Ctrl + l, B Add one row before the current position
---{&

=
* Ctrl + l, A Add one row after the current position o
*
3
Shaft + '

Ctrl + Del
Delete the current row

Delete all rows

o
3. Manually enter values for the Top and Bottom for the zones
you created, as displayed in the figure in Step 4.
o
.,' NOTE: The top zone delta and bottom zone delta extend the
calculation outside the zones. This is useful to show
the results beyond the zone boundary.
o
4.
5.
Change the zone names to A and
Enter a new zonation name: Zones
B.

A B.
o
Method settings
- Ù r+ clisPlaY ->llüo o
l-ü hputs
ffi Zonation
Parameters
o
:l:
*
Group
w"tt
_ê-^ Dataset
o
at
:3r
o
te
JC

It
Top zonedelta -gggs -9999
l

Bottom zone detta -9999 -9999

l
-9999
-9999
FT

-9999
-9999
o
r(
o
6. lf the display does not update, click Run the computation )
(F7) or enable Automatic launch. The two newly created
zones are displayed on the VSH layout. o
o
388 Techlog Fundarn€ntais, Version 2013
O
o Schlumberger Application Workflow lnterface (AWl) Basic Concepts

7. Adjust the baselines for GR_ shale and GR Matrix in the

o newly created zones.

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
8. Click the Zonation tab.
O 9. RighÈclick on a Zone name and select Save the table as
zonation dataset. A new zonation dataset is created.

o WARNING: Saving a zone in an existing zonation ovenvrites

previously saved values (such as parameters,
hydraulic zones, and faults blocks).

o
a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 389
Application Workflow lnterface (AW) Basic Concepts Schlumberger
o
10. Save the output VSH_GR with a different name.
11 . Select the Vsh gamma ray method in the Controller tab and
open the Properties window.
a
12. On the Output variables tab, change the name to
VSH_GR_Z one_A_B. o
13. Change the display mode to save or save and display and
click Run the computation ) ( F7).
a
Exercise 2 lnserting aZone using the
lnteractive Selection Tool o
ln this exercise, you use the lnteractive Selection tool to select
an interval and create a zonation set. o
'1. Open a LogView layout from the Workflow manager ffi.
A layout opens, displaying the inputs used in this method
(GAMM). o
2. Click the !nteractive Selection tool O.
3. Color the intervals of interest using different colors for each
zone.
o
l:3(XXl o
o
o
o
o
o
4. After choosing the intervals over the layout, click the
Zonation tab in the Workflow manager. o
390 Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Application Workflow lnterfæe (AWl) Basic Concepts

5. ü lnsert
o Right-click on a zone row and select
the interactiviÿ tool.
zones using

The zones populate the table with the corresponding depths

o ,I
and zone colors. The dataset name changes to
ZONATION-FROM_I NTERACTI ON.

o
o :
à
è
tttr
o ü
U

o
o
!!
o
a
o
O
û
-l
t_

I I tr,
IËE
TI
;Ë

c!
§r
gt

o -!
;Ë[
\a.',r,

o Ë: Ël I
:.isrtr
;:
o I

a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 391

Application Workflow lnterface (AWl) Basic Concepts Schlumberger
o
6. (Optional) Save this set of temporary zones if you wish to
use it later.
TIP: To delete the selection from the layout and remove the
o
selection shading, press the spacebar when the layout
is the active window. O
7.
a
Cancel the selection

ta Exercise 3 lnserting the Existing Set of Zones

from the Zonation Dock Window
ln this exercise, you insert ZoneC and ZoneD using the
o
STRATIGRAPHY dataset. Before starting the exercise, close the
histogram and the layout. o
1. ln the Zonation dock window, choose the zonation set
STRATIGRAPHY.
lnside the set, select the zones to be used: ZoneC and
O
ZoneD.
From the Vsh gamma ray method under the Method seffrngs
area, click the Zonation tab.
o
4. Click * lnsert zones from zonation dock window to insert
the zones in the workflow. o
lâd

-ôlt
Sæ Vld
wormdffid
lo,it J
Vethod sen ngs
ll \6h gammô rày - rl a' drsprây
l-L no,o@
>ilaô o
bribn l@ltryr.i.,j, c","*,",,
f, Zonalonname STRATIGRAPtsv

o
=
Zonâtio( Wdulff/iriffi3 34
l!12
. x Quicltæk 6rouo II
.n lE Qonr quid tær

I vsn gmm rry

- *",,
[!l
r:-
w.rl wcu.

Ins.rl !on.i lrom lh. zon.tion D

II
IIZdrr. zoæD

't
D
do(k wrndôw
cr.r -G
758:
7614
76,14

8222 O
u bp zom dellâ 9949 -Erg -9930 -99!X)

5 8orcm rorc delta 99!19 ,99t !) -w ,9999

o
5. For this exercise, change the GR method to Clavier equation
from the Parameterc tab.
o
o
20, Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Application Workflow lnterlæe (AWl) Basic Concepts

6. Before launching the method, change the layout used to

O display the results.
a. Select the Vsh gamma ray method.

o b. Navigate to the method Properties window.

c. ln the Main parameters tab, select to display the current
and the default layout template.

o d. (Optional) Choose the layout template stored in projecU

u se r/c o m pa n y[Te ch I og lolder.
For this exercise, select Welll_SHORT as a Layout
o template.

PropcrticÊ =x

o I ouject Vsh gamma ray

Output variables Dl Monte Carlo

o
Prop€rty Value
. Application
Keep the prwiously comp. yes
I

o Real-time updated yes

Use last created variables no I
, ! Displaln models

o Multi well layout

Input display
Advance input display
ye5
yes

Ilo

o Output display

Template type .
yes

None

o Force template mode

@
lCurrent
, Default

Company\BruggemanM

o Company\FLARE-AIT
Com pa nAFLAR...-Preparation
Company\FLARE_HRLA

o Com pa ny\HILT_AII_2012_8i n2 5

NOTE: When launching the workflow, you can save the o

o layout output as a template to be applied lately to a
same method but with a different dataset. After
saving the layout as a template, the option Refresh the

o layout template /rsl updates the template.

o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 393

Application Workflow Interface (AW) Basic Concepts Schlumberger
o
7. Open
TIP:
the Histogram.
To display only GR_matrix and GR_shale in the
histogram for a given zone, set the interval in the
o
Zonation dock window.

Veriÿ that the $ Automatic launch and il! Display layout

o
parameters options are activated.
Click Run the computation) (F7). o
o
o
o
o
I
l.rtr o
l

o
I
a
*i
U.
T: o
ii
1..

ii
ss
o
ll -. \r

O
o
394 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 201 3
o
 schtumberger Application Workflow lnterface (AW) Basic Concepts
O
Adjust the baselines for GR_shale and GR-Matrix for each
o
10.
zone.
11. Save the results as VSH GR STRATIGRAPHY.

a 12. Save the workflow.

Lesson 4 Tools to Adjust Parameters

o and Prepare Reports

o This lesson introduces additional tools available in the AWI that

you can use to adjust and fine tune parameters:
. Statistical Tools

o .
.
Wheeltool
Values outside the predefined parameters
.
o Generate a pdf report.

Procedure 1 Statistical Tools

o For each zone, it is possible to choose the Sth or 95th percentile,
rt
the mean value or the median value.

o 1. Right-click on the cell where you wish to apply

and click one of these icons:
the statistics

o .
.
9* Compute using method: percentile
S* Compute using method: percentile 95.
5

o
o
o
o
o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 395
Application Workflow lnterface (AW) Basic C,oncepts Schlumberger
o
/ Ilvshgammaray
Method settings
- ü p, drspray - > l! iÈ ô O
!r:

*
Group
w",,
o
c- Oatart

^o
Zone
Too 7432 7494 7582
ZoneD
7674
o
Bottom iqu Dol 7674
o
822?
I. cn_,r,.o- Eln '.^.,,- m slq2 1q7æ?
Fill left CM+U
JC GLsrrale 1102.:'r
E 6Rrnethod lcta, *' ritt ngttt Cùl+D
S Switctr Oetrreen yariable or constant parametel Ctrl+Shifr+M
D Ertmd toürezom CM+Shiff+Z O
:r! Dl Variable crcaion- Cùl+I C

@ Detine as project paramte[-

I
AT
Defin€ as zone pâram€ter-
D€fine as w€ll parameter..
CM+E.l
Cùl+E Z
CM+EW
o
I

l
Parameter managef-

Copy table.-
Ctrl+E P

Cùl+Ç P
o
Cfferate a *orHlow report Cùl+C R

L Computcusing m€thod:p€rcentile5.-
9* Computeusingmethod:percentile95...
Ctrl+Q
Ctrl+Q9
5
o
t Computalion by mean method...
o
Ctil+q A
i Computation by median method... Ctrl+Q M

S Compute for all the wells usinq: percentile 5... Ctrl +Q 5, W

o
$Q Computeforallth€wellsusing:percentile95... Ctrl+Q9.W
ia Compute for all the wells using mean method... Ctrl+Q A, W
ïl Compule for all the wells using median method... Ctrl+Q M, W

, NOTE: lcons without a rig symbol designate single wells;

icons with a rig represent multiple wells.
o
2. Choose one of these options for the column you select.
. Compute using method: percentile 5... o
The quantile 5 of the interval is assigned to the GR_matrix

.
parameters.
Compute using method: percentile 95...
o
The quantile 95 of the interval is assigned to the
GR_shale parameters. o
396 Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Application Workflow lnterface (AWl) Basic Concepts

o Computation by mean method...

The mean of the interval is assigned to the selected
column (GR_matrix or GR_shale).

o Computation by median method

The median of the interval is assigned to the selected
column (GR_matrix or GR_shale).

o lf there are several wells involved in the computation, the

minimum value of all the wells is kept in the minimal method,

o a mean value is computed in the mean method, and a

median value is computed in the median method.
After changing the values, the baselines appear over the plots.

o 3. Click Run the computation > (F7) in display mode to view

the layout of the input curve(s) and the output curve(s).

o Additional Options
There are additional options that can help you manage
parameters and zones.

o *- Automatic launch Automatically updates the results

when you change a parameter.

o ir
À?
Fill-Up/loFil!-Down
Fir!-Righu-% Fil!-Left
Allows you to propagate a value
throughout a table.

o The options are available on the

right-click menu and as keyboard
shortcuts Ctrl + D or Ctrl + U.

o !,.r Extend to the zones Allows you to propagate an

identical value from one zone to all
wells in the same zone.

o The option is available on the right-

click menu and as keyboard
shortcut ctrl + shift + z.

o 53r Switch between

variable or constant
Allows you to use a variable
instead of a constant parameter.
parameter
o
o
o Techlog tundamentals, Version 2013 397
Application Workflow lnterface (AWl) Basic Concepts Schlumberger
o
2
Procedure Fine-Tuning the Result with the
Wheel Tool o
1. On the Parameters tab, click on the name of a parameter
and select the option Aùl a wheel. ln the figure, a wheel is
added to the GR_matrix and GR_shale parameters.
o
r! \Eh gamma ray
Method settings
>llto o
ffi
M
ir!
Group
o
il w"tt
è.À Datàset
ô Zone
O
Top 7432 7494 7582
o
7674
..,
{' Bottom 7494 7gO7 7674 8222

-r".-."""16
.t{ t,K $ate . .
- uu.uoo

o
Kemove tne wneel
E GR method 1 lavier
lavier -
RÊname parameter

Add parameter to Fàvorites

2. Highlight the cells you wish to adjust using the wheel (move
o
the wheel up and down). Notice that the values of the cells
are modified accordingly and the baselines move over the
plots.
-^
o
TIP: Click l* to detach the wheel interface from the
I workflow. o
o
o
o
o
398 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
Schlumberger Application Workflorv lnterface (AWl) Basic Concepts

3. Control the sensitivity of the wheel by modiÿing its minimum

and maximum limits.

-aai: !a.r ,IÉ,.

.'a-1 - . a Method seüiôgs
r!vsngammaray - ù r o,3pray >ll üo
I :r: i:ii" t.,,a ii Ji ) &,-rqq rteElqrEEEq GR_matrix
100
EI
.
Èt
) a:, :
z"er
-,... l-l
, ,' ]', :.::- :,
tsl
0

"
1:"
''o
r-" d l
Too
S *no.
-==
7432 7494 1582 7674
6R_shale
1000
7494 7 7 167a 8222
EI
b ca-rrr.tt ]xetrr 146.017 30.5182 Lg.72g3 l:I
dC GR-$ale 102.571 82.0525 94.8474 108,066 lil ror.r
E GR rethod ]Claÿaer ' Clavrer r Clàvrer - Clavr€r ' IH
0

4. When you are *nn the parameter settings, eppfy

mode to save or"rti.n"O ""t
save and display and run the computation to
display the outputs.

Values Outside of the Predefined Limits

All the parameters have predefined default values as well as
Minimum and Maximum value. However, it is possible for the user
to remove these Minimum and Maximum limits.

ln the Properties window of the workflow, set the property Use

the parameters limits to no. This setting allows you to set any
parameter value outside of the default limits within the workflow
(Figure 11).
&M6Q'
abgrlnq.ùlril*

ala4,.k*Ç

;;:" &, *,, Ë -ry-I

I bftÉB .l
>^ oara*' Ur*UUr*Uf, -
. Zok d Z@C H 2or0
. loe 11. rtr: LaTl
-t
-t
-I
I@ffi
-
Figure 11 Set default workflow limits

Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 399

Application Workflow lnterface (AWl) Basic Concepts Schlumberger
o
Report Options
Reporting provides information about how the output curves were
o
computed, the input curves that were used, the depth intervals,
and the values of the parameters for each interval.
O
Exercise Creating a Report
.r\, 1

ln this exercise, you generate a workflow report in PDF format

o
1. Right-click in the Parameters tab on one of the rows and
select Generate a workflow report. o
,.:,I È È 'll i:illi

>llrÈo
o
o
i iru:, i.;r'

o
, ri..: ;.,in :.i,! i: )

ii : :::-:
1- rl
'..,,

;
,j ]:.
Yrh qallrà
i !

rè!

.- lop
Y Bofl*
7432
t4s4
7494
tgot
7582
7614
ZoneD
7671
8222
o
] cn-m.u lE?Eltlrco.orz 30.182 t9.7291
Ji GLshâle
lI GR ærhod
102,57:
Clàvpr
q

^i
F,lr

til
lett
right
tt Switch b€lwn veiable or con(ànl pâ.amete(
Crd+U
Cü+D
Ct l+Shift+M
o
l Ensütothezm

o
CH+Shift+Z
4 l>l Vâriablr æ.tioû- Crd+T. C

LlJ p.Emd
D.fiæ a p.oj«Î crn+8,
I HiæazæpaEMe Cùl+E Z

rf
{
D.limæEilp.6mÉ
PanmctÊr

Copÿ t Ur-
mnagÉ
Clrl+E W
Crd+E P

Clrl+C, P
o
2. Set the format of the output to PDF for this exercise and
o
press OK. (Other formats available are listed in the figure.)

'rRêpngtævsemtuy
i
l_i Type
. r Sclæt all
Methods
t?lEl
o
a gtr 1 gÊærôte POf rcpon

o
tÊ PDt cpo.t
copy the HTMI repon into thc dipboàrd iierge ûE s'milar.olum6 / I \rsh gamma ray I

i I
gia.t
|, ".pty.otr.-
Hiae me unit cotumro
9eneaàte a well property report
I

o
Align Érticàlly the methôds

400 Techlog FundafiEntals, Version 201 3

O
 schtumberger Application Workflow lnterface (AWl) Bâsic Concepts
O
Several options are available to generate the report:
. Merge similar columns: lf a column name appears twice
in the workflow (for example, the same parameter in
different methods), it will appear only once in the report.
The input curves for each method will appear.
. Hide the empÿ columns: A column with only missing
values (-9999) will not appear in the report.
. Hide the unit columns: Hides the parameter units in the
generated report.
. AIign vertically the methods: Each method is reported
separately in the same document.
3. Select the folder where you want to save the report and save
the report âs My_vsh_Report.
4. Open lhe My_Vsh_Repoft.pdf to view your report.
wdhmhry
shpmr.y
hs zdh

I $li ffiffi
Ue fil D.re &ltxEÈy zd T+ tu kn Gr-lffir Gt-tuh GRffi

ffimrî #
TIP: lf only a specific table is needed, click Copy table
from the workflow sidebar to copy the table to the
clipboard.

Lesson 5 Workflow Templates and

Parameters
This lesson explains the distinction between a workflow and the
parameters used in a workflow in Techlog.

A workflow contains a list of wells, zone methods, and their order

of appearance in the process. lt also includes the features you
defined in the properties of all methods, such as the names of
output curves, Monte Carlo, and Automatic Launch Cascade
mode.

The Workflow manager allows you to create multiple workflows

and save them. For example, you would use multiple workflows
inside a single manager to use different sets of zonations or move
wells from one set of methods to the other.

ïechlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 401

O
Application Workflow lnterface (AWl) Basic Concepts Schlumberger
o
Parameters are constant values that appear on the Parameters
tab within the workflow. You can switch from constant to curve
(variable) by clicking the switch between variable or constant
o
parameter icon on the left side of Methods setttngs section.
You can save both the workflow and the parameters using the
Save menu, any of three ways: Save workflow, Save the
o
workflow as template, and Duplicate the workflow (Figure 12).
§{. WorHlow manager
o
Load Save View

H Save the manager Ctrl+S, M O

l,Uorkfrow
[l
ù.1
Save worHlow..
Save the workflow as
Ctrl+S. W

template... Ctrl+S, T
o
>;
)) Duplicate the worHlow...
Prramctcr
Shift+A
o
Figure 12
JC Save the worldlow parameters... Ctrl+S, P

Options when saving workflows

o
When saving a workflow, the parameter files you save are linked
to the workflow as well as to the list of all input curves. The
associated parameter files are given the same name as the
o
workflow with suffixes; when you launch a saved workflow, it
launches with the correct parameter fïles. o
There are three ways to save parameters:
.
.
Zonation Dataset method o
Saving Parameters with the Workflow
. Parameter Manager method (Advanced users)
o
a
o
o
402 Tæhlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Application Workflow lnterface (AWl) Basic Concepts

I Using the Zonation Dataset

o Procedure
Method to Save and Reuse
Parameters
t3l
o The Zonation Dataset method is the quickest way to save
parameters.

o 1. Click Save all parameters in the zonation dataset

When using this option, the parameters table is saved in the
B.

a zonation dataset for each well in the workflow. The names of

new variables are identical to the names of the parameters.
The save applies only for the zones selected in the AWI
Zonation tab (and leaves values that were previously stored
o for other zones unchanged).
.I srRAnGRapuY Measured Depth Ff

a (MD
È GR method
(L GR_matrix
Measured

Gamma Ray
Depth FT

9API

o 2.
(
r]
eR-slate
ZONE NAMI
Gamma Ray
Zone Name

Load parameters into a different workflow by clicking Load

qAPI

o the parameters from the zonation dataset Li. When

loading parameters from a zonation dataset, the application
compares the names of the curves with the names of the

a parameters.
NOTE: Because the parameters are saved in the zonation
dataset, they are attached to this set of zones.
.,

o
o
o
a
o
a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 403
Application Workflow lnterface (AW) Basic Concepts Schlumberger
o
2
ri
Procedure Saving Parameters with the
Workflow a
When you save a workflow, you also can save the associated
parameters. a
1. ln the Save menu of the workflow, select Save the

2.
workflow.
ln the Workflow window, name the workflow and click Save.
o
tl wumw

tolder Prgect
a
^
r' Workflow name Vsh Gamma Ray o
v. WorHlow parameters Vsh Gamma Ray_WO

I
J
Project parameters

Wells parâmeters
Vsh Gamma Ray_PR

Vsh Gamma Ray_WE

a
; Zones parameters

Keep input table selection

Vsh 6amma Ray_ZO
o
o
o
You can save files in the Userfolder, the Company folder, or
lhe Projectfolder. lf you save them inlhe Project folder, they
appear in the Project browser by default.

U
TIP: The name you assign to a workflow is the same name
given to the associated parameter files. The associated
files are appended with suffixes, depending on file type
o
(for example, _PR, _WE, and _ZO).

o
o
o
o
404 Techlog Fundarn€ntals, Version 2013
o
 schtumberger Application Workflow Interfæe (AWl) Basic Concepts
O
When you launch a saved workflow, the workflow opens with
the correct parameters if the parameter files have the same
name as the workflow.

* Prclcct brot:cr . x

* Amè [..i T-üâî

Pro.1ect D:\Documents\Techlog-Pro.lectsi
e WorHlows
rr Quick took
r'+ Vsh Gamma Ray
, WorHlow manager
Fundamentals AWI
''
, Project parameters
;l! Vsh Gamma Ray-PR
. Wells parameters
;l! vsh Gamma Ray-wE
, Zone parameters
iii Vsn Gamma Ray-Zo
. WorKlow parameters
;ii qulcr look-wo
;ii vsh Gamma Ray-Wo

Parameters and the workflow are saved in separate files.

. Workflow ftle: Contains the methods, their order, and their
input families (variables)
. Project parameters file: Contains the parameters defined as
project parameters
. Wells parameters file: Contains the parameters defined as
wells parameters
. Zones parameters file: Contains the parameters defined as
zones parameters
. Workflow parameterfile: Contains all the other parameters.

Techlog Fundamentals, version 2013 405

O
Application Workflow lnterface (AWl) Basic Concepts Schlumberger
o
3
r3
Procedure Parameter Manager Method
(Advanced Users) o
Another method is to define, save, and load parameters of various
types using the Parameteni manager interface. This procedure
shows you how to use the Parameters manager to define project
o
parameters, zone parameters, or well parameters.Techlog
distinguishes between several types of parameters:
.
o
Workflow parameters: Unless it is defined otherwise, a

.
parameter is used as a workflow parameter.
Project parameters: An identical value for the entire project,
a
such as all wells in all zones.
. We!! parameters: A unique value for the well throughout all
zones.
o
. Zone parameters: An identical value to the zone throughout
allwells. o
1. To open the Parameters manager, on the Parameters tab,
right-click inside the parameters table and select
o
ili Parameter manager or click the -i: icon to the left of the
Method seffrngs section, as shown in the flgure.
Melhod enrngs
o
r ! vsà gamma ray ' Ù rD eveanddisplay - ) ll û Ô
L[ hpuB zoBtion
î,
I
Group WelI Dataset Zone Top Bonom.GR_m.Lit GR_rhale GRmethod
'ffiç,,,
7432 74el uo Ctrl +U
a
adâ 7907

o
7491 10.85:
ür: alsel ta,l 3r.E1{
l' tilldm Cui +D

i. 14 # ,uro 13.63, :! switn oemn vàdâbte or (omanr paramd- Cd+ÿffr+M

"rr, l Extcndtodrzm Crt + Slr-lt+Z
',lr
»l lâ.iebtê cdim- Crl+T, C

.rd

E
@ D!fiæGprciÉip.ntrEtÈ
! DGfææzæpâErnctÉ
ta Dêtræ æ Kll pônrEie
CùllE
Cùl+E Z
Cùl+E
J

w
o
tr
Copy table-
G.ffitc. wldd irport
Ctd+C, P

CM+C R
a
o
o
406 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
 schtumberger Application Workflow Interlæe (AWl) Basic Concepts
O
ln the Parameters manager, you can view workflow
parameters within the workflow for each method, while other
parameter types can be viewed using the Parameters
manager.

qrc
I

1., Project lcvcl: V3h Gàmma R.y PR

:', Group I wett Dàtaset zone rop I aotto, GR-matrix I cR-snate GR unit I GR mcthod
I
't1

Ë
H zonc ldÊl: vrh G.mm. RlY zo
î+ Group I Wett I oatasetl zone I rop lBottom GR-matrix IcR-rhelc GR uniti GR method

1l
i* 21 Zone(
ZoneD
H
B
Wclls lcvcl: Vsh Gamma Ray WE
M
h-
lcroup Well Dataset Zone ] Top Bottom GR-matrix GR-shale GR unit GR mclhod
x ), Welll
- 12 Well2

ê,
Current view: Vsh gàmma ray -

The Parameters manager is divided into three tables:

Project level, Zone level, and Wells level. ln the previous
example, you used two wells (Well1 and Well2) with two
zones (ZoneC and ZoneD).
The Parameters manager displays only one method at a
time, but it is linked to the Quanti interface. This means that,
ifyou have several methods, you can change a method
within Quanti, the Parameters manager interface changes
to display the current method.
lf a parameter is a special parameter (well, project, or zone
parameter) and not a workflow parameter, you must define it
accordingly. When you save the parameters, each parameter
type is saved in a different file.

Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 407

O
Application Workflow Interface (AW) Basic Concepts Schlumberger
a
2. Define parameters in one of three ways: as a project
parameter, as a zone parameter, or as a well parameter.
a. On the Parameters tab, choose the value that you wish to
o
define as a parameter.
b. Right-click and select one of the options
project, zone or well parameter.
in the menu: o
tr 0efine as project parameter,,. o
I Define as zone parameter...

# Define as well parameter...

N
o
The Parameters manager automatically updates, based on
your choice. O
/lshsm.,ry -Ùrie '>laüÔ p
o
ü @ h6 ttirri§tl

---
od.{r 20æ bo hnôfl 6tffi
w'ilr OÆ^M d rrr_' _rq
stui

I
, o
-
clffiw h9rnn.,ry '
o
o
o
o
O
o
o
408 Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013
O
o Schlumberger Application Worldow lnterface (AWl) Basic Concepts

4
o Procedure Loading and Removing Parameters
from a Parameter File

o This procedure shows you how to load parameter files into the
Parameters manager, propagate them to a workflow, and
remove them from a workflow.

o 1. Choose one of these methods to load parameters (project,

zone, or well) into a workflow.

t Load a project parameter file

O [J Load a zone parameter file

Âd Load a wells parameter file

O 2. After all parameters are loaded into the Parametes manager,
click rr to propagate them to the current method in the
o 3.
workflow.
Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 to load and propagate parameters

o for other methods in the workflow.

lf you wish to remove any type of parameter, choose one of
these actions:

o rx Remove project parameters

E Remove zone parameters

o $" Remove wells parameters.

a Hierarchy of Parameter Files

When simultaneously propagating several parameter fïles, the
order of priority is Well, Zone, then Project.

O . Propagate project parameters.

. Propagate zone parameters, overwriting project parameters

o .
if duplicates exist.
Propagate well parameters.
lf the parameter files are loaded and propagated one-by-one and

o parameters are deleted in the Parameter manager between each

propagation, the final value is from the file that that was
propagated last.

o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 20 1 3 409
Application Workflow lnterface (AWl) Basic Concepts Schlumberger
o
lf bofh files are present in the Parameter manager during the
propagation, the final value will be the one from the Wells
parameter file.
o
Lesson 6 Well Predict Tool o
The Well predict tool estimates the logs on wells, based on the
logs from the surrounding wells. Log estimation is performed
using geometry on a zone-by-zone basis, by stretching or
o
squeezing known logs with the required depth reference (TVD by
default) and aggregating information from all the input wells. o
The Well predict method is using AWI (Figure 13).

Reference
(X ând Y
well 2
coordinet€)
o
Predidion well
(xând Y coo.dinatcl
1/3 ofthe rone
o
Reference Well 1
(x endY oordinàtê)
è
-... o
f/: oftfrc rone o
.---

ab cd
Top and Bottom of the zone

Distance between Reference

and Prediction wells
o
o
13
Figure Well predict method
o
o
O
o
410 Techlog Fundanrentals, Version 20'13
a
o Schlumberger Application Workflow Interface (AWl) Basic Concepts

1 Starting Well Predict

a Procedure
This procedure shows you how to set up Well predict to estimate
trl
o the log responses for a well.

1. Select Data > Techdata+ > 6 Welt predict.

2. From the Data management window, select the inputs to

o predict (Family, Alias, or Variable) and click Greate. You can

predict one or more log curves. The application Workflow
manager window opens.

o 3. Drag the datasets from the reference wells and the datasets
for the prediction wells into the Workflow manager.
4.
o Define the inputs:
. Reference: Wells used as reference to compute the
prediction wells.

o . Prediction: Wells to be predicted without measurement

from the field.
. Validation: Wells used both as reference and validation
a where you already have measured variables. Their goal is
to evaluate the validity of the prediction by comparing
measured and predicted variables.

o 5. ln the Zonation dock window, select the zones to add to the

workflow.
*
o 6.

7.
Go to the Zonation tab and click
the Zonation dock window.
to insert the zones from

Go to the Parameters tab to set the options for each zone.

o Choose one ofthese methods:

. Distance method: This method combines the responses
from each initial input well weighted according to its

o distances from the prediction well. For the computation, you

need to know the coordinates of the wells and the well
trajectories to get TVD and TVDSS.

o . Average method: This method is a basic arithmetic

average between the reference logs by zones that required
only the Measured Depth.

o 8. Define the size of the smoothing window for the computation

by zone using the Gaussian Smooth method.

o
o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 411
Application Workflow lnterface (AW) Basic Concepts Schlumberger
o
9. Click ) to launch the Wel! predict method. A layout is
displayed with the input variables for each well. The last well
is the predicted well.
o
lît Exercise 1 Using Wel! Predict o
ln this exercise, you predict the GAMM, DENS, and SONI log
responses in Welll using the same variables from Well2, Well3,
Wel14, and Wel19.
o
1.
2.
Select Data > Techdata+ > 6 Wel! predict.
ln the Well predict window, select the Gamma Ray,
o
Compressional Slowness, and the Bulk Density families and
click Create. o
-
Data type filts Oata type assignment
o
relBdata*ts all

A weilt.DATAFULr- a,
{ Wettl.lndex
À weill.LQ(
Êt
-'
aAtrayResistivity ^
a Average Borosrty
I Average Shàre Volume
l trptl ,lGammaRay
I
Il
Compressional Slowness
Butk Densiry
o
A weill.MICP a 1 Bao uore rtag
& Welll.STRAnGR
À welll.suRvEY
À we[l.Tl_weil
( | Brt Srze
I Bonom Hole Temperatr
l Butt Oensity
a
a - a Bulk Oensity Corection '
o
well2.DATAFULl

Geate I '; Camel

The application Workflow manager window opens.

o
lü.thod stlangs
->llô o
la Us G.@plW€II Oôtæt hpul-callm R.y hput-comp.6iml goffillnB/LBulkDc6ity Iypel
p Please drop your
m dètasets here O
'c
o
o
412 ïechlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013
o
o Schlumberger Application Workflow lnterfæe (AWl) Basic Concepts

3. Create a conditional selection to select the fïve DATAFULL

o 4.
datasets from the Project browser.
Drag the five DATAFULL datasets into the Workflow

o manager.
The inputs are populated automatically. Because several
variables from the DATAFULL dataset are associated to the

o families selected, you must enter the correct variable name

manually.
5. Leave the lnputs for Welll blank (predicted well).

o 6. ln the last column (7"ype), select

. Prediction for Well1.
.
o .
Reference for Well2 and Well4
Validation for Well3 and Well9.
rt..r,, r:r.!r.

a : .: )
. Inprt Côn.pr.rrôr. Slo^n.rr

o EffiM
ilM
.st
-fl|
- rcNI
-SM
. DENS
- XNS
. DENS
- krer€tre -

o DTT
ilU
DTTN
@-
@
'c

o 7. On the Zonation tab, select all the zones from the

STRATIGRAPHY dataset in the Zonation dock window.

o i,i'.1.r'Lan,!ie,

M.thod
->uo
ffiirBs

o -:r'-:: )

-,t
Group I - 100
7315
Sollom
7432
]U.üt]Épædclt
FT -9999
l Boüon
-W
ædctùl -
'1132 7494 FT -9999

o
-9999
3 1494 Tn7 FT -9999 -9999
4 7*7 8215 FT -9999 -9B9B

5 E215 E281.501 Fr -9999 -EXX)

6 7467 7ÿ2 Fl -W9 -9p99

o 7
I
7fi2 7674 FT -999x} -9999

'c
8. On the Parameters tab, apply the Distance method and a

a Smoothing window equal to 1.

o Techlog Fundamentals. Version 2013 413

Application Workffow lnterface (AW) Basic Concepts Schlumberger

9. Given that data do not cover all the wells and all the intervals,
some adjustments have to be made in the Parameterc tab. For
each interval, leave these wells from the dropdown list in the
Input llells column:
. ZoneB:Well2, Well3, Well4
. ZoneC:Well2, Well3, Well4
. ZoneD:Well2, Well3, Well4, Well9
. Zone9, ZoneF, ZoneS: Well3, Well4.

Load S.E Ys e
WorHlow overus
Ȥ0.} bit
rËl||l[I§r tnputdata ,)
: ;ilput Wells
Workflow / Methods EMblÀ
, |rWorkflow t
ml
WellPredict r

1
o
'c
10. Set tn" eppfy mode to Display and click ) to launch the Well
predict method.
A layout opens with the input variables for each well and for
the predicted well. The last well displayed is the predicted
well.
. Reference wells (Well2 and Well4): Only the inputs logs
are displayed, one track per family input.
. Validation wells (We!!3 and Well9): There is an additional
pink curve per input track to check the quality of the
computation. Each pink curve is the result of the well predict
calculation by the other reference wells.
. Prediction wells (Wel11): The first tracks display each
curve stretched and squeezed from the reference and the
validation wells that are sorted by input types.
. The last tracks show the computation results with the
curves predicted in blue. These output curves are displayed
with an uncertainty in light blue (variance of all the well-by-
well predictions).
Refer to the figure that follows.

414 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 2013

o Application Workflow lnterface (AWl) Basic Concepts

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
a
o
o
o
a Techlog Fundamentals, Version 201 3 415
Application Workflow Interface (AW) Basic Concepts Schlumberger
o
11 .

12.
Align the wells using the ZoneD Top.
Activate erJ Automatic launch. Any modification made in the
table (new input, modification of parameters) will be reflected
o
in real time on the layout.
13. Modiÿ the Smoothing window size (use 2, 5, and10) and
observe the results.
o
14. Drag the measured GAMM, SONI, and DENS variables into
the layout and compare the Well predict result with the actual
o
measurements.
15. Save the results.
a. Select Well predict method in the Workflow overview
o
window.
b. Open the Properties window.
c. ln the Output variables tab, enter a prefix (WPJ.
o
'
,l
Propcrtic:
Ouject Urutercdkt (wellPredict)
=x o
Properÿ
zi

reference
Main parameters
Value
True Vertical Depth
o
Prefix
Suffix
wP_
_wP
o
Group
i
I
I
Enable all
s"u"
"rr,,
outputs
o*r*
default
yes
o
Display advanced out... yes
I
I ( output-r
o
o
o
o
o
416 Techlog Fundarnentals, Version 201 3
o
o Schlumberger Application Workflonr lnterface (AWl) Basic Concepts

16. Change the Apply mode to save and display and click ) to
o launch the Well predict method. The created variables are
displayed in the DATAFULL dataset in Well1.

o a
ij.r"r1 oq ,rênage.
-': .;: t . l.'.

o
o
o
o q. wP_BuL Ircniry_sID_WP
{. wP-BulI tlcnrity-WP
(.
o WP-Comprcrslond |tlouttctt-sTD-wP
q. WP-Comp.6iaott l goün63-wP
{. wP-G.mm. Rrÿ-sTD-wP
q. wP-G.mm.ltry-wP

o 17. Save the workflow. ln the

tab, select Save Workflow....
Workflow manager, on the Save

o Enter a name for the Workflow

U
(ÿüellPredict).

o l / WorHlow name
a Project
WellPredict
- I

o r' WorHlow parameters

Project parameters
weltPredic{wo
WellPredict PR
- I

Wells parameters WellPredict-WE

O Zones parameters WellPredict-ZO

Keep inpul table r€lection

o Save Close

18. Click Save. The WellPredict workflow now is saved in your

o Project browser.

o Techlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 417

Application Worknow lnterface (AW) Basic Concepts
o
Review Questions
. How can you group output variables for one method? For a
o
.
full workflow?
How can you modiÿ input variables, if needed? o
Summary o
ln this module, you learned about:
. the four primary tabs of the AWI interface: Controller, lnput
Data, Favorite Parameters, and Outputs
o
. using the Application Workflow lnterface (AWl) for predict
methods. o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
O
o
418 Techlog FundanEntals, Version 201 3
O
 schtumberger Application Workflort, Interface (AWl) Basic Concepts
O
,vorEs
o
o
o
O
o
o
O
o
o
o
a
o
o
o
Ïechlog Fundamentals, Version 2013 419
O